manualshive.com logo in svg

GE MiCOM P40 Agile, Technical Manual, Page: 111 / 962

Share
Download
GE MiCOM P40 Agile Technical Manual Download Page 111

It is convenient to specify all the settings in a single column, detailing the complete Courier address for each
setting. The above table may therefore be represented as follows:

Setting

Column

Row

Description

SYSTEM DATA

00

00

First Column definition

Language (Row 01)

00

01

First setting within first column

Password (Row 02)

00

02

Second setting within first column

Sys Fn Links (Row 03)

00

03

Third setting within first column

…

…

…

VIEW RECORDS

01

00

Second Column definition

Select Event [0...n]

01

01

First setting within second column

Menu Cell Ref

01

02

Second setting within second column

Time & Date

01

03

Third setting within second column

…

…

…

MEASUREMENTS 1

02

00

Third Column definition

IA Magnitude

02

01

First setting within third column

IA Phase Angle

02

02

Second setting within third column

IB Magnitude

02

03

Third setting within third column

…

…

…

The first three column headers are common throughout much of the product ranges. However the rows within
each of these column headers may differ according to the product type. Many of the column headers are the
same for all products within the series. However, there is no guarantee that the addresses will be the same for a
particular column header. Therefore you should always refer to the product settings documentation and not make
any assumptions.

3.8

CHANGING THE SETTINGS

1.

Starting at the default display, press the Down cursor key to show the first column heading.

2.

Use the horizontal cursor keys to select the required column heading.

3.

Use the vertical cursor keys to view the setting data in the column.

4.

To return to the column header, either press the Up cursor key for a second or so, or press the Clear key
once. It is only possible to move across columns at the column heading level.

5.

To return to the default display, press the Up cursor key or the Clear key from any of the column headings. If
you use the auto-repeat function of the Up cursor key, you cannot go straight to the default display from
one of the column cells because the auto-repeat stops at the column heading.

6.

To change the value of a setting, go to the relevant cell in the menu, then press the Enter key to change the
cell value. A flashing cursor on the LCD shows that the value can be changed. You may be prompted for a
password first.

7.

To change the setting value, press the Up and Down cursor keys. If the setting to be changed is a binary
value or a text string, select the required bit or character to be changed using the horizontal cursor keys.

P446SV

Chapter 5 - Configuration

P446SV-TM-EN-1

79

Summary of Contents for MiCOM P40 Agile

Page 1: ...GE Grid Solutions MiCOM P40 Agile P446SV Technical Manual Distance Protection IED Hardware Version P Software Version 80 Publication Reference P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ... and Servicing 20 4 1 Lifting Hazards 20 4 2 Electrical Hazards 20 4 3 UL CSA CUL Requirements 21 4 4 Fusing Requirements 21 4 5 Equipment Connections 22 4 6 Protection Class 1 Equipment Requirements 22 4 7 Pre energisation Checklist 23 4 8 Peripheral Circuitry 23 4 9 Upgrading Servicing 24 5 Decommissioning and Disposal 25 6 Regulatory Compliance 26 6 1 EMC Compliance 2014 30 EU 26 6 2 LVD Compli...

Page 4: ...oftware 61 3 1 Real Time Operating System 61 3 2 System Services Software 61 3 3 Self Diagnostic Software 61 3 4 Startup Self Testing 61 3 4 1 System Boot 61 3 4 2 System Level Software Initialisation 62 3 4 3 Platform Software Initialisation and Monitoring 62 3 5 Continuous Self Testing 62 4 Platform Software 64 4 1 Record Logging 64 4 2 Settings Database 64 4 3 Interfaces 64 5 Protection and Con...

Page 5: ...r Overview 95 2 Introduction To Sampled Values 96 3 Data Resampling 97 4 Sampled Value Alignment 98 4 1 Channel mappings for SAV Test SAV Questionable SAV Invalid 98 4 2 Data Quality 98 4 2 1 Impact of Data Quality on Protection Functions 99 4 3 Process Bus Performance 99 4 3 1 Sample Loss Data 100 4 4 VT Switching 100 4 5 Virtual Inputs and Outputs 101 4 5 1 P446 P546 P841B Virtual Inputs and Out...

Page 6: ...nance 144 4 8 Load Blinding 145 4 9 Cross Country Fault Protection 146 5 Delta Directional Element 147 5 1 Delta Directional Principle and Setup 147 5 2 Delta Directional Decision 148 6 Application Notes 150 6 1 Setting Mode Choice 150 6 2 Operating Characteristic Selection 150 6 2 1 Phase Characteristic 150 6 2 2 Earth Fault Characteristic 151 6 3 Zone Reach Setting Guidelines 151 6 3 1 Quadrilat...

Page 7: ... 184 5 1 Aided DEF Introduction 184 5 2 Implementation 184 5 3 Aided DEF Polarization 184 5 3 1 Zero Sequence Polarizing 185 5 3 2 Negative Sequence Polarizing 186 5 4 Aided DEF Setting Guidelines 187 5 5 Aided DEF POR Scheme 188 5 6 Aided DEF Blocking Scheme 189 5 7 Aided DEF Logic Diagrams 190 5 7 1 DEF Directional Signals 190 5 7 2 Aided DEF Send Logic 191 5 7 3 Carrier Aided Schemes Receive Lo...

Page 8: ... 10 Power Swing Functions 225 1 Chapter Overview 227 2 Introduction to Power Swing Blocking 228 3 Power Swing Blocking 230 3 1 Power Swing Detection 230 3 1 1 Settings Free Power Swing Detection 230 3 1 2 Slow Power Swing Detection 232 3 2 Detection of a Fault During a Power Swing 234 3 3 Power Swing Blocking Configuration 234 3 4 Power Swing Load Blinding Boundary 235 3 5 Power Swing Blocking Log...

Page 9: ... 4 1 Autoreclose Enable Logic Diagram 292 5 5 Autoreclose Leader Follower 292 5 5 1 Leader Follower CB Selection Logic Diagram 293 5 5 2 Leader Follower Logic Diagram 294 5 6 Autoreclose Modes 295 5 6 1 Single Phase and Three Phase Autoreclose 295 5 6 2 Autoreclose Modes Enable Logic Diagram 296 5 7 AR Force Three Phase Trip Logic 297 5 7 1 Force Three Phase Trip Logic Diagram 297 5 8 Autoreclose ...

Page 10: ... Trip Conversion Logic Diagram 331 5 23 Monitor Checks for CB Closure 331 5 23 1 Voltage Monitor for CB Closure 332 5 23 2 Check Synchronisation Monitor for CB Closure 333 5 24 Synchronisation Checks for CB Closure 334 5 24 1 Three phase Autoreclose Leader Check Logic Diagram 336 5 24 2 Three phase Autoreclose Follower Check Logic Diagram 338 5 24 3 CB Manual Close System Check Logic Diagram 340 6...

Page 11: ...arth Fault Protection Logic 372 5 4 Application Notes 373 5 4 1 Insulated Systems 373 5 4 2 Setting Guidelines Insulated Systems 374 6 High Impedance REF 376 6 1 High Impedance REF Principle 376 7 Thermal Overload Protection 378 7 1 Single Time Constant Characteristic 378 7 2 Dual Time Constant Characteristic 378 7 3 Thermal Overload Protection Implementation 379 7 4 Thermal Overload Protection Lo...

Page 12: ... F Protection Implementation 405 3 2 Independent R O C O F Protection Logic 405 Chapter 16 Monitoring and Control 407 1 Chapter Overview 409 2 Event Records 410 2 1 Event Types 410 2 1 1 Opto input Events 411 2 1 2 Contact Events 411 2 1 3 Alarm Events 411 2 1 4 Fault Record Events 412 2 1 5 Maintenance Events 412 2 1 6 Protection Events 412 2 1 7 Security Events 413 2 1 8 Platform Events 413 3 Di...

Page 13: ...or CB Closure 440 9 4 System Check PSL 442 9 5 Application Notes 442 9 5 1 Predictive Closure of Circuit Breakers 442 9 5 2 Voltage and Phase Angle Correction 442 Chapter 17 Supervision 445 1 Chapter Overview 447 2 Voltage Transformer Supervision 448 2 1 Loss of One or Two Phase Voltages 448 2 2 Loss of all Three Phase Voltages 448 2 3 Absence of all Three Phase Voltages on Line Energisation 448 2...

Page 14: ...ing 479 3 1 2 Setting up IM64 480 3 1 3 Two Terminal IM64 Operation 480 3 1 4 Dual Redundant Two Terminal IM64 Operation 480 3 1 5 Three Terminal IM64 Operation 480 3 1 6 Physical Connection 481 4 IM64 Logic 485 5 Application Notes 487 5 1 Alarm Management 487 5 2 Alarm Logic 487 5 3 Two ended Scheme Extended Supervision 488 5 4 Three ended Scheme Extended Supervision 488 Chapter 20 Electrical Tel...

Page 15: ...iguration 524 5 8 8 Check for Connected Equipment 524 5 8 9 PRP Configuration 524 5 8 10 HSR Configuration 525 5 8 11 Filtering Database 525 5 8 12 End of Session 526 5 9 RSTP Configurator 526 5 9 1 Connecting the IED to a PC 526 5 9 2 Installing the Configurator 527 5 9 3 Starting the Configurator 527 5 9 4 RSTP Device Identification 527 5 9 5 RSTP IP Address Configuration 528 5 9 6 SNTP IP Addre...

Page 16: ... Output 551 7 3 7 Object 50 Time Synchronisation 551 7 3 8 DNP3 Device Profile 551 7 3 9 DNP3 Configuration 559 7 4 IEC 61850 560 7 4 1 Benefits of IEC 61850 561 7 4 2 IEC 61850 Interoperability 561 7 4 3 The IEC 61850 Data Model 561 7 4 4 IEC 61850 in MiCOM IEDs 562 7 4 5 IEC 61850 Data Model Implementation 563 7 4 6 IEC 61850 Communication Services Implementation 563 7 4 7 IEC 61850 Peer to peer...

Page 17: ...Password Encryption 589 4 5 Disabling Physical Ports 589 4 6 Disabling Logical Ports 589 4 7 Security Events Management 590 4 8 Logging Out 592 Chapter 23 Installation 593 1 Chapter Overview 595 2 Handling the Goods 596 2 1 Receipt of the Goods 596 2 2 Unpacking the Goods 596 2 3 Storing the Goods 596 2 4 Dismantling the Goods 596 3 Mounting the Device 597 3 1 Flush Panel Mounting 597 3 2 Rack Mou...

Page 18: ...t 613 4 3 Advisory Test Equipment 614 5 Product Checks 615 5 1 Product Checks with the IED De energised 615 5 1 1 Visual Inspection 616 5 1 2 Current Transformer Shorting Contacts 616 5 1 3 Insulation 616 5 1 4 External Wiring 616 5 1 5 Watchdog Contacts 617 5 1 6 Power Supply 617 5 2 Product Checks with the IED Energised 617 5 2 1 Watchdog Contacts 617 5 2 2 Test LCD 618 5 2 3 Date and Time 618 5...

Page 19: ...36 10 1 6 Zone P Reach Check 636 10 1 7 Resistive Reach 637 10 1 8 Load Blinder 637 10 2 Operation and Contact Assignment 637 10 2 1 Phase A 637 10 2 2 Phase B 637 10 2 3 Phase C 637 10 2 4 Time Delay Settings 638 10 3 Scheme Testing 638 10 3 1 Scheme Trip Test for Zone 1 Extension 639 10 3 2 Scheme Trip Tests for Permissive Schemes 639 10 3 3 Scheme Trip Tests for Blocking Scheme 639 10 3 4 Signa...

Page 20: ...Remote Loopbacks 653 17 3 Verify Communication between IEDs 653 18 End to End Scheme Tests 655 18 1 Aided Scheme 1 655 18 1 1 Preparation at Remote End 655 18 1 2 Performing the Test 655 18 1 3 Channel Check in the Opposite Direction 655 18 2 Aided Scheme 2 655 19 Onload Checks 657 19 1 Confirm Current Connections 657 19 2 Confirm Voltage Connections 657 19 3 On load Directional Test 658 20 Final ...

Page 21: ... 677 3 7 3 Signalling failure and C diff failure alarms together 677 3 7 4 Incompatible IED 677 3 7 5 Comms changed 677 3 7 6 IEEE C37 94 fail 678 3 8 PSL Editor Troubleshooting 678 3 8 1 Diagram Reconstruction 678 3 8 2 PSL Version Check 678 3 9 Repair and Modification Procedure 678 Chapter 26 Technical Specifications 681 1 Chapter Overview 683 2 Interfaces 684 2 1 Front Serial Port 684 2 2 Downl...

Page 22: ...Records 695 5 4 Fault Locator 695 6 Ratings 696 6 1 AC Measuring Inputs 696 6 2 Current Transformer Inputs 696 6 3 Voltage Transformer Inputs 696 6 4 Auxiliary Supply Voltage 696 6 5 Nominal Burden 697 6 6 Power Supply Interruption 697 6 7 Battery Backup 698 7 Input Output Connections 699 7 1 Isolated Digital Inputs 699 7 1 1 Nominal Pickup and Reset Thresholds 699 7 2 Standard Output Contacts 699...

Page 23: ...ducted Disturbances Induced by Radio Frequency Fields 705 11 11 Magnetic Field Immunity 706 11 12 Conducted Emissions 706 11 13 Radiated Emissions 706 11 14 Power Frequency 706 12 Regulatory Compliance 707 12 1 EMC Compliance 2014 30 EU 707 12 2 LVD Compliance 2014 35 EU 707 12 3 R TTE Compliance 2014 53 EU 707 12 4 UL CUL Compliance 707 12 5 ATEX Compliance 2014 34 EU 707 Appendix A Ordering Opti...

Page 24: ...Contents P446SV xxii P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 25: ...igure 20 Ethernet board 49 Figure 21 Redundant Ethernet board 51 Figure 22 Fully populated Coprocessor board 53 Figure 23 High Break relay output board 54 Figure 24 High Break contact operation 55 Figure 25 Software Architecture 60 Figure 26 Frequency response of FIR filters 66 Figure 27 Frequency Response indicative only 67 Figure 28 Navigating the HMI 74 Figure 29 Default display navigation 76 F...

Page 26: ...eneral characteristic in ZLP plane 134 Figure 57 Phase relations between I2 and Iph for leading and lagging polarizing currents 135 Figure 58 General characteristic in Z1 plane 136 Figure 59 Simplified characteristic in Z1 plane 137 Figure 60 Phase to phase current changes for C phase to ground CN fault 141 Figure 61 Biased Neutral Current Detector Characteristic 142 Figure 62 Load Blinder Charact...

Page 27: ...g logic 199 Figure 98 POR Aided Tripping logic 201 Figure 99 Aided Scheme Blocking 1 Tripping logic 201 Figure 100 Aided Scheme Blocking 2 Tripping logic 201 Figure 101 Apparent Impedances seen by Distance Protection on a Teed Feeder 204 Figure 102 Problematic Fault Scenarios for PUR Scheme Application to Teed Feeders 206 Figure 103 Any Distance Start 214 Figure 104 Standard basic scheme mode logi...

Page 28: ...ent Fault 258 Figure 136 Autoreclose Sequence for an evolving permanent fault on a dual CB application 259 Figure 137 Autoreclose Sequence for a persistent fault on a multishot dual CB application set for single phase operation 259 Figure 138 Key to logic diagrams 262 Figure 139 Autoreclose System Map part 1 263 Figure 140 Autoreclose System Map part 2 264 Figure 141 Autoreclose System Map part 3 ...

Page 29: ...Modules 32 33 314 Figure 175 Prepare Reclaim Initiation logic diagram Module 34 315 Figure 176 Reclaim Time logic diagram Module 35 316 Figure 177 Successful Autoreclose Signals logic diagram Module 36 317 Figure 178 Autoreclose Reset Successful Indication logic diagram Modules 37 38 318 Figure 179 Circuit Breaker Healthy and System Check Timers Healthy logic diagram Module 39 319 Figure 180 Autor...

Page 30: ... for dual time constant thermal characteristic 380 Figure 215 Dual time constant thermal characteristic 380 Figure 216 Broken conductor logic 382 Figure 217 Undervoltage single and three phase tripping mode single stage 389 Figure 218 Overvoltage single and three phase tripping mode single stage 392 Figure 219 Residual Overvoltage logic 396 Figure 220 Residual voltage for a solidly earthed system ...

Page 31: ...minal Scheme 479 Figure 257 Interfacing to PCM multiplexers 483 Figure 258 IM64 channel fail and scheme fail logic 485 Figure 259 IM64 general alarm signals logic 485 Figure 260 IM64 communications mode and IEEE C37 94 alarm signals 486 Figure 261 IM64 two terminal scheme extended supervision 488 Figure 262 IM64 three terminal scheme extended supervision 488 Figure 263 Example assignment of InterM...

Page 32: ...ues 566 Figure 285 Example of Standby IED 567 Figure 286 Standby IED Activation Process 568 Figure 287 GPS Satellite timing signal 571 Figure 288 Timing error using ring or line topology 573 Figure 289 Default display navigation 584 Figure 290 Location of battery isolation strip 597 Figure 291 Rack mounting of products 598 Figure 292 Terminal block types 600 Figure 293 40TE case dimensions 604 Fig...

Page 33: ...CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION ...

Page 34: ...Chapter 1 Introduction P446SV 2 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 35: ...al manual and an introduction to the device s described in this technical manual This chapter contains the following sections Chapter Overview 3 Foreword 4 Product Scope 6 Features and Functions 8 Logic Diagrams 11 Functional Overview 13 P446SV Chapter 1 Introduction P446SV TM EN 1 3 ...

Page 36: ...taining troubleshooting or operating any of the products within the specified product range This includes installation and commissioning personnel as well as engineers who will be responsible for operating the product The level at which this manual is written assumes that installation and commissioning engineers have knowledge of handling electronic equipment Also system and protection engineers h...

Page 37: ...hanges of nomenclature however The word relay is no longer used to describe the device itself Instead the device is referred to as the IED Intelligent Electronic Device the device or the product The word relay is used purely to describe the electromechanical components within the device i e the output relays British English is used throughout this manual The British term Earth is used in favour of...

Page 38: ...tance protection of overhead line and underground cable applications where the network is solidly grounded It is used for dual circuit breaker applications such as breaker and a half or ring bus topologies where two circuit breakers feed each line As well as distance protection this device can also be used for 4 shot phase segregated Autoreclose protection and a range of standard current voltage p...

Page 39: ...ducts M82 IEC 61850 Edition 2 IEEE 1588 support P445 J37 P54x No Distance K47 P841A K47 All other products K57 P446 P546 P841B M72 Conventional Stream NCIT Stream Sub cycle Diff Stream P54A P54B P01 P54C P54E M01 Non distance Multi end Sub cycle Multi end subcycle stream Figure 1 P40L family version evolution 3 2 ORDERING OPTIONS All current models and variants for this product are defined in an i...

Page 40: ...e zones InterMiCOM64 teleprotection for direct device to device communication optional 4 2 PROTECTION FUNCTIONS Feature IEC 61850 ANSI Tripping Mode 1 3 pole PTRC ABC and ACB phase rotation Phase overcurrent with optional directionality 4 stages OcpPTOC RDIR 50 51 67 Earth Ground overcurrent stages with optional directionality 4 stages EfdPTOC RDIR 50N 51N 67N Sensitive earth fault SEF 4 stages Se...

Page 41: ...condition monitoring XCBR 52 CT supervision VT supervision Trip circuit and coil supervision Control inputs PloGGIO1 Power up diagnostics and continuous self monitoring Dual rated 1A and 5A CT inputs Alternative setting groups 4 Graphical programmable scheme logic PSL Fault locator RFLO 4 4 MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS Measurement Function IEC 61850 ANSI Measurement of all instantaneous integrated values...

Page 42: ...eprotection fibre and copper optional 16S Ethernet communication optional 16E Redundant Ethernet communication optional 16E Courier Protocol 16S IEC 61850 edition 2 16E IEC 60870 5 103 optional 16S DNP3 0 over serial link optional 16S DNP3 0 over Ethernet optional 16E SNMP 16E IRIG B time synchronisation optional CLK IEEE 1588 PTP Edition 2 devices only Chapter 1 Introduction P446SV 10 P446SV TM E...

Page 43: ...ng note will accompany the relevant part The logic diagrams follow a convention for the elements used using defined colours and shapes A key to this convention is provided below We recommend viewing the logic diagrams in colour rather than in black and white The electronic version of the technical manual is in colour but the printed version may not be If you need coloured diagrams they can be prov...

Page 44: ...gising Quantity Hardcoded setting RD Q S Comparator for detecting undervalues Switch MeasurementCell Derived setting SRLatch HMIkey Pulse Latch Connection Node Inverted logicinput Softswitch Latched on positive edge X Multiplier 2 1 NOTgate XOR XORgate R Q S Internal Calculation Switch Bandpassfilter Figure 2 Key to logic diagrams Chapter 1 Introduction P446SV 12 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 45: ...Fault records Disturbance Record Measurements PSL Local Communication 2 nd Remote comm port Remote LINE LINE BUS BUS comm port P443 P445 P446 Inter MiCOM LEDs Conventional signalling Always available P443 P446 only P446 only Optional Protection communication V ref V ref V I Self monitoring 85 FL 50N 51N I V 67 46 67N SEF 68 78 59N Neutral current if present from parallel line I M 49 SOTF TOR 64 RE...

Page 46: ...Chapter 1 Introduction P446SV 14 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 47: ...CHAPTER 2 SAFETY INFORMATION ...

Page 48: ...Chapter 2 Safety Information P446SV 16 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 49: ...onnel safe at all times You must be familiar with information contained in this chapter before unpacking installing commissioning or servicing the equipment This chapter contains the following sections Chapter Overview 17 Health and Safety 18 Symbols 19 Installation Commissioning and Servicing 20 Decommissioning and Disposal 25 Regulatory Compliance 26 P446SV Chapter 2 Safety Information P446SV TM...

Page 50: ...equipment and the system to which it is being connected familiar with accepted safety engineering practises and are authorised to energise and de energise equipment in the correct manner trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering practises trained in emergency procedures first aid The documentation provides instructions for installing commissioning and op...

Page 51: ...e equipment Warning Risk of electric shock Earth terminal Note This symbol may also be used for a protective conductor earth terminal if that terminal is part of a terminal block or sub assembly Protective conductor earth terminal Instructions on disposal requirements Note The term Earth used in this manual is the direct equivalent of the North American term Ground P446SV Chapter 2 Safety Informat...

Page 52: ...tation before installing commissioning or servicing the equipment Caution Always use the equipment as specified Failure to do so will jeopardise the protection provided by the equipment Warning Removal of equipment panels or covers may expose hazardous live parts Do not touch until the electrical power is removed Take care when there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment Warning Isolate ...

Page 53: ...rface of a Type 1 enclosure as defined by Underwriters Laboratories UL Caution To maintain compliance with UL and CSA CUL install the equipment using UL CSA recognised parts for cables protective fuses fuse holders and circuit breakers insulation crimp terminals and replacement internal batteries 4 4 FUSING REQUIREMENTS Caution Where UL CSA listing of the equipment is required for external fuse pr...

Page 54: ... of 1 3 Nm Tighten captive screws of terminal blocks to 0 5 Nm minimum and 0 6 Nm maximum Caution Always use insulated crimp terminations for voltage and current connections Caution Always use the correct crimp terminal and tool according to the wire size Caution Watchdog self monitoring contacts are provided to indicate the health of the device on some products We strongly recommend that you hard...

Page 55: ...ions that are pre wired but not used should be earthed or connected to a common grouped potential 4 7 PRE ENERGISATION CHECKLIST Caution Check voltage rating polarity rating label equipment documentation Caution Check CT circuit rating rating label and integrity of connections Caution Check protective fuse or miniature circuit breaker MCB rating Caution Check integrity of the PCT connection Cautio...

Page 56: ...ing Take extreme care when using external test blocks and test plugs such as the MMLG MMLB and P990 as hazardous voltages may be exposed Ensure that CT shorting links are in place before removing test plugs to avoid potentially lethal voltages 4 9 UPGRADING SERVICING Warning Do not insert or withdraw modules PCBs or expansion boards from the equipment while energised as this may result in damage t...

Page 57: ...allel which may still be charged To avoid electric shock discharge the capacitors using the external terminals before decommissioning Caution Avoid incineration or disposal to water courses Dispose of the equipment in a safe responsible and environmentally friendly manner and if applicable in accordance with country specific regulations P446SV Chapter 2 Safety Information P446SV TM EN 1 25 ...

Page 58: ... use in an outdoor location it must be mounted in a specific cabinet or housing to provide the equipment with the appropriate level of protection from the expected outdoor environment 6 3 R TTE COMPLIANCE 2014 53 EU Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment R TTE directive 2014 53 EU Conformity is demonstrated by compliance to both the EMC directive and the Low Voltage directive to zero volt...

Page 59: ...t category for control of equipment in gas atmospheres in Zone 1 and 2 This equipment with parentheses marking around the zone number is not itself suitable for operation within a potentially explosive atmosphere P446SV Chapter 2 Safety Information P446SV TM EN 1 27 ...

Page 60: ...Chapter 2 Safety Information P446SV 28 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 61: ...CHAPTER 3 HARDWARE DESIGN ...

Page 62: ...Chapter 3 Hardware Design P446SV 30 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 63: ...bout the product s hardware design This chapter contains the following sections Chapter Overview 31 Hardware Architecture 32 Mechanical Implementation 33 Front Panel 35 Rear Panel 38 Boards and Modules 39 P446SV Chapter 3 Hardware Design P446SV TM EN 1 31 ...

Page 64: ...required There is also a separate serial data bus for conveying sampled data from the input module to the CPU These parallel and serial databuses are shown as a single interconnection module in the following figure which shows typical modules and the flow of data between them Communications Sample Value Inputs I O Interconnection Output relay boards Opto input boards IEC 61850 9 2LE input board RS...

Page 65: ...oducts are implemented in a range of case sizes Case dimensions for industrial products usually follow modular measurement units based on rack sizes These are U for height and TE for width where 1U 1 75 inches 44 45 mm 1TE 0 2 inches 5 08 mm The products are available in panel mount or standalone versions All products are nominally 4U high This equates to 177 8 mm or 7 inches The cases are pre fin...

Page 66: ...Z Ethernet board Standard 100MHz Ethernet board for LAN connection fibre copper 100MhZ Ethernet board with modulated IRIG B Standard 100MHz Ethernet board fibre copper modulated IRIG B 100MhZ Ethernet board with demodulated IRIG B Standard 100MHz Ethernet board fibre copper demodulated IRIG B High break output relay board Output relay board with high breaking capacity relays Redundant Ethernet SHP...

Page 67: ... front panel Figure 6 Front panel 40TE The front panel consists of Top and bottom compartments with hinged cover LCD display Keypad Fixed function LEDs 9 pin D type serial port behind hinged cover 25 pin D type download port behind hinged cover 4 1 1 FRONT PANEL COMPARTMENTS The top compartment contains labels for the Serial number Current and voltage ratings P446SV Chapter 3 Hardware Design P446S...

Page 68: ...ont serial port is a 9 pin female D type connector providing RS232 serial data communication It is situated under the bottom hinged cover and is used to communicate with a locally connected PC It is used to transfer settings data between the PC and the IED The port is intended for temporary connection during testing installation and commissioning It is not intended to be used for permanent SCADA c...

Page 69: ...tion LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel indicate the following conditions Trip Red switches ON when the IED issues a trip signal It is reset when the associated fault record is cleared from the front display Also the trip LED can be configured as self resetting Alarm Yellow flashes when the IED registers an alarm This may be triggered by a fault event or maintenance record The LED flash...

Page 70: ...al blocks plus the rears of the communications boards The back panel cut outs and slot allocations vary This depends on the product the type of boards and the terminal blocks needed to populate the case The following diagram shows the rear view of a 40TE The IEC 61850 9 2LE interface is highlighted in grey E00283 Figure 7 Rear view of populated case Note This diagram is a typical example and may n...

Page 71: ...system parallel bus via a ribbon cable and an interface to the rear This rear interface may be Directly presented to the outside world as is the case for communication boards such as Ethernet Boards Presented to a connector which in turn connects into a terminal block bolted onto the rear of the case as is the case for most of the other board types Figure 8 Rear connection to terminal block P446SV...

Page 72: ...panel communication ports The memory on the main processor board is split into two categories volatile and non volatile The volatile memory is fast access SRAM used by the processor to run the software and store data during calculations The non volatile memory is sub divided into two groups Flash memory to store software code text and configuration data including the present setting values Battery...

Page 73: ...to it There are three board types which support the following voltage ranges 24 54 V DC 48 125 V DC or 40 100V AC 110 250 V DC or 100 240V AC The power supply board connector plugs into a medium duty terminal block This terminal block is always positioned on the right hand side of the unit looking from the rear The power supply board is usually assembled together with a relay output board to form ...

Page 74: ...driving the output relay coils All power supply voltages including the 0 V earth line are distributed around the unit by the 64 way ribbon cable The power supply board incorporates inrush current limiting This limits the peak inrush current to approximately 10 A Power is applied to pins 1 and 2 of the terminal block where pin 1 is negative and pin 2 is positive The pin numbers are clearly marked o...

Page 75: ...chdog facility provides two output relay contacts one normally open and one normally closed These are used to indicate the health of the device and are driven by the main processor board which continually monitors the hardware and software when the device is in service P446SV Chapter 3 Hardware Design P446SV TM EN 1 43 ...

Page 76: ...o for the signal connection and the third for the earth shield of the cable These are located on pins 16 17 and 18 of the power supply terminal block which is on the far right looking from the rear The interface can be selected between RS485 and K bus When the K Bus option is selected the two signal connections are not polarity conscious The polarity independent K bus can only be used for the Cour...

Page 77: ...61850 9 2LE ETHERNET BOARD RX TX LINK ACTIVITY Fibre optic Ethernet connections RJ45 service port for commissioning and testing only E00227 RJ45 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TX TX RX RX Figure 15 IEC 61850 9 2LE board Optical Fibre Connectors The board uses 1300 nm multi mode 100BaseFx with ST connectors P446SV Chapter 3 Hardware Design P446SV TM EN 1 45 ...

Page 78: ...relay board has 8 relays with 6 Normally Open contacts and 2 Changeover contacts The output relay board is provided together with the power supply board as a complete assembly or independently for the purposes of relay output expansion There are two cut out locations in the board These can be removed to allow power supply components to protrude when coupling the output relay board to the power sup...

Page 79: ...l 17 Relay 8 changeover Terminal 18 Relay 8 common 6 6 IRIG B BOARD Figure 17 IRIG B board The IRIG B board can be fitted to provide an accurate timing reference for the device The IRIG B signal is connected to the board via a BNC connector The timing information is used to synchronise the IED s internal real time clock to an accuracy of 1 ms The internal clock is then used for time tagging events...

Page 80: ...ated IRIG B input 6 7 FIBRE OPTIC BOARD Figure 18 Fibre optic board This board provides an interface for communicating with a master station This communication link can use all compatible protocols Courier IEC 60870 5 103 MODBUS and DNP 3 0 It is a fibre optic alternative to the metallic RS485 port presented on the power supply terminal block The metallic and fibre optic ports are mutually exclusi...

Page 81: ...nfigured as DTE ports This means pin 2 is used to transmit information and pin 3 to receive SK4 can be used with RS232 RS485 and K bus SK5 can only be used with RS232 and is used for electrical teleprotection The optional rear communications board and IRIG B board are mutually exclusive since they use the same hardware slot However the board comes in two varieties one with an IRIG B input and one ...

Page 82: ...e unit one board for modulated IRIG B and one for demodulated The IRIG B signal is connected to the board with a BNC connector The Ethernet and other connection details are described below IRIG B Connector Centre connection Signal Outer connection Earth LEDs LED Function On Off Flashing Green Link Link ok Link broken Yellow Activity Traffic Optical Fibre Connectors Connector Function Rx Receive Tx...

Page 83: ...ncy Protocol There are several variants for this board as follows 100 Mbps redundant Ethernet running RSTP with on board modulated IRIG B 100 Mbps redundant Ethernet running RSTP with on board unmodulated IRIG B 100 Mbps redundant Ethernet running SHP with on board modulated IRIG B 100 Mbps redundant Ethernet running SHP with on board unmodulated IRIG B 100 Mbps redundant Ethernet running DHP with...

Page 84: ...broken Yellow Activity SHP running PRP RSTP or DHP traffic Optical Fibre Connectors ST Connector DHP RSTP SHP PRP A RXA RX1 RS RXA B TXA TX1 ES TXA C RXB RX2 RP RXB D TXB TX2 EP TXB RJ45connector Pin Signal name Signal definition 1 TXP Transmit positive 2 TXN Transmit negative 3 RXP Receive positive 4 Not used 5 Not used 6 RXN Receive negative 7 Not used 8 Not used Chapter 3 Hardware Design P446SV...

Page 85: ...essor s built in serial port as on the main processor board There are several different variants of this board which can be chosen depending on the exact device and model The variants are Coprocessor board with current differential inputs and GPS input Coprocessor board with current differential inputs only Coprocessor board with GPS input only 6 11 1 COPROCESSOR BOARD WITH 1PPS INPUT In some appl...

Page 86: ...high reverse voltage that could damage the MOSFET if not protected When there is a control input command to operate an output contact the miniature relay is operated at the same time as the MOSFET The miniature relay contact closes in nominally 3 5 ms and is used to carry the continuous load current The MOSFET operates in less than 0 2 ms but is switched off after 7 5 ms When the control input is ...

Page 87: ...ch cases High Break contacts can be used to break the trip coil current in these applications Breaker fail In the event of failure of the local circuit breaker stuck breaker or defective auxiliary contacts stuck contacts it is incorrect to use 52a contact action The interrupting duty at the local breaker then falls on the relay output contacts which may not be rated to perform this duty High Break...

Page 88: ...Chapter 3 Hardware Design P446SV 56 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 89: ...CHAPTER 4 SOFTWARE DESIGN ...

Page 90: ...Chapter 4 Software Design P446SV 58 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 91: ...ftware design of the IED This chapter contains the following sections Chapter Overview 59 Sofware Design Overview 60 System Level Software 61 Platform Software 64 Protection and Control Functions 65 P446SV Chapter 4 Software Design P446SV TM EN 1 59 ...

Page 92: ...re Control ofinterfacesto keypad LCD LEDs front rear ports Self checking maintenance records Hardware Device Layer LEDs LCD Keypad Memory FPGA Protection Task Programmable fixed scheme logic Signal processing Coprocessor protection algorithms Supervisor task Platform Software Layer Event fault disturbance maintenance record logging Remote communications interfaces Frontpanel interface LCD Keypad L...

Page 93: ...unit takes itself permanently out of service the Healthy LED stays OFF and watchdog contact stays ON If a problem is detected by the self monitoring functions the device attempts to store a maintenance record to allow the nature of the problem to be communicated to the user The self monitoring is implemented in two stages firstly a thorough diagnostic check which is performed on boot up and second...

Page 94: ...ng the reference voltage At the successful conclusion of all of these tests the unit is entered into service and the application software is started up 3 5 CONTINUOUS SELF TESTING When the IED is in service it continually checks the operation of the critical parts of its hardware and software The checking is carried out by the system services software and the results are reported to the platform s...

Page 95: ...unavailable A restart should clear most problems that may occur If however the diagnostic self check detects the same problem that caused the IED to restart it is clear that the restart has not cleared the problem and the device takes itself permanently out of service This is indicated by the health state LED on the front of the device which switches OFF and the watchdog contact which switches ON ...

Page 96: ...y either the system services or the protection software function See the Monitoring and Control chapter for further details on record logging 4 2 SETTINGS DATABASE The settings database contains all the settings and data which are stored in non volatile memory The platform software manages the settings database and ensures that only one user interface can modify the settings at any one time This i...

Page 97: ...e provided is between 45 Hz and 66 z If the frequency falls outside this range the sample rate reverts to its default rate of 2 400 Hz for 50 Hz or 2 880 Hz for 60 Hz The frequency tracking of the analog input signals is achieved by a recursive Fourier algorithm which is applied to one of the input signals It works by detecting a change in the signal s measured phase angle The calculated value of ...

Page 98: ...of the input current and voltage signals are stored in memory so that they can be accessed by all of the protection elements algorithms The Fourier components are calculated using single cycle Fourier algorithm This Fourier algorithm always uses the most recent 48 samples from the 2 cycle buffer Most protection algorithms use the fundamental component In this case the Fourier algorithm extracts th...

Page 99: ...cessing time that is used by the PSL The protection control software updates the logic delay timers and checks for a change in the PSL input signals every time it runs The PSL can be configured to create very complex schemes Because of this PSL desing is achieved by means of a PC support package called the PSL Editor This is available as part of the settings application software MiCOm S1 Agile or ...

Page 100: ...t location The result is returned to the protection and control task which includes it in the fault record The pre fault and post fault voltages are also presented in the fault record When the fault record is complete including the fault location the protection and control task sends a message to the supervisor task to log the fault record The Fault Locator is not available on all models 5 10 FUNC...

Page 101: ...CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURATION ...

Page 102: ...Chapter 5 Configuration P446SV 70 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 103: ... carried out using settings applications software This chapter includes concise instructions of how to configure the device particularly with respect to the communications setup as well as a description of the common methodology used to configure the device in general This chapter contains the following sections Chapter Overview 71 Settings Application Software 72 Using the HMI Panel 73 Line Param...

Page 104: ...t When you launch the Settings Application Software you will be presented with a panel that allows you to invoke the Data Model Manager This will close the other aspects of the software in order to allow an efficient import of the chosen data model If you don t have or can t find the data model relating to your product please call the General Electric contact centre When you have loaded all the da...

Page 105: ...s To change the menu level or change between settings in a particular column or changing values within a cell Left and right cursor keys To change default display change between column headings or changing values within a cell ENTER key For changing and executing settings Hotkeys For executing commands and settings for which shortcuts have been defined Cancel key To return to column header from an...

Page 106: ...t display option Default display options Subsequent column headings Row 01 Language Row 01 Subsequent rows Subsequent rows Vertical cursor keys move between setting rows Horizontal cursor keys move between values within a cell The Cancel key returns to column header C C C Figure 28 Navigating the HMI 3 2 GETTING STARTED When you first start the IED it will go through its power up procedure After a...

Page 107: ...e other alarms present these must also be cleared before you can get into the default display menu options 3 3 DEFAULT DISPLAY The HMI contains a range of possible options that you can choose to be the default display The options available are NERC Compliant banner If the device is a cyber security model it will provide a NERC compliant default display If the device does not contain the cyber secu...

Page 108: ...al display options available depend on the exact model Use the horizontal cursor keys to step through from one display to the next NERC compliant banner V00403 Access Level System Current Measurements System Frequency System Voltage Measurements System Power Measurements Date Time Plant Reference Description NERC Compliance Warning NERC Compliance Warning Figure 29 Default display navigation If th...

Page 109: ...ssword 3 Press the Enter key to confirm the password If you enter an incorrect password an invalid password message is displayed then the display reverts to Enter password On entering a valid password a message appears indicating that the password is correct and which level of access has been unlocked If this level is sufficient to edit the selected setting the display returns to the setting page ...

Page 110: ...arm reset prompt then press the Clear key again to clear all alarms 3 7 MENU STRUCTURE Settings commands records and measurements are stored in a local database inside the IED When using the Human Machine Interface HMI it is convenient to visualise the menu navigation system as a table Each item in the menu is known as a cell which is accessed by reference to a column and row address Each column a...

Page 111: ... for a particular column header Therefore you should always refer to the product settings documentation and not make any assumptions 3 8 CHANGING THE SETTINGS 1 Starting at the default display press the Down cursor key to show the first column heading 2 Use the horizontal cursor keys to select the required column heading 3 Use the vertical cursor keys to view the setting data in the column 4 To re...

Page 112: ... LCD display These so called Hotkeys can be used to execute specified settings and commands directly The functions available for direct access using these keys are Setting group selection Control inputs Circuit Breaker CB control functions The availability of these functions is controlled by the Direct Access cell in the CONFIGURATION column There are four options Disabled Enabled CB Ctrl only and...

Page 113: ...he right cursor key twice to get to the first control input or the left cursor key to get to the last control input STP GP User02 Control Input 1 EXIT SET Now you can execute the chosen function Set Reset in this case If neither of the cursor keys is pressed within 20 seconds of entering a hotkey sub menu the device reverts to the default display 3 9 3 CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL You can open and clos...

Page 114: ...ivating or deactivating critical functions FUNCTION KEYS Fn Key 1 Unlocked The next cell down Fn Key 1 Mode allows you to set the function key to Normal or Toggled In the Toggle mode the function key DDB signal output stays in the set state until a reset command is given by activating the function key on the next key press In the Normal mode the function key DDB signal stays energised for as long ...

Page 115: ...press duration of approximately 200 ms is required before the key press is recognised This feature avoids accidental double presses P446SV Chapter 5 Configuration P446SV TM EN 1 83 ...

Page 116: ...ction elements detect single phase faults Selecting 1 and 3 Pole means that the product will only trip the affected phase for a single phase fault For faults involving more than one phase the product will always trip all three phases Selecting 3 Pole means that the product will always trip all three phases For products controlling more than one circuit breaker the tripping mode is independent for ...

Page 117: ...uts B Trip Inputs C 1 R Q S R Q S 2 3 Ph Fault 3 Ph Fault 2 530 531 532 530 531 532 858 533 529 1485 1604 1608 530 531 532 892 893 894 523 524 525 526 1601 1602 1603 1600 522 527 528 Figure 30 Circuit Breaker Trip Conversion Logic Diagram Module 63 4 2 RESIDUAL COMPENSATION To improve accuracy of impedance measuring elements such as those used in distance protection and fault locators the total lo...

Page 118: ...tance zones A current input the Mutual Compensation input is provided to compensate If you want to use Mutual Compensation the connection polarity must match that shown in the connection diagram and the element must be Enabled in the settings Consider for example an A phase to earth fault on one circuit of a parallel circuit The positive sequence impedance between the relaying point and the fault ...

Page 119: ...may not be applicable to your model In applications where the Mutual Compensation is used to reduce errors in the distance elements a third setting Mutual Cut Off is used for a fast dynamic control The ratio IM IN is compared with the Mutual Cut Off setting If the ratio is higher mutual compensation is suppressed to prevent false tripping for faults on the parallel line Typically a Mutual Cut Off ...

Page 120: ...rce setting is set to IRIG B 2 Ensure the IED is receiving the IRIG B signal by checking that IRIG B Status cell reads Active 3 Check that the Act Time Source cell reads IRIG B This indicates that the IED is using IRIG B as the source for its time Note that If SNTP or PTP have been selected as the Primary Source these must first be disconnected before the device can switch to IRIG B as the active ...

Page 121: ...ses Greenwich Mean Time as its standard Without compensation the date and time would be displayed on the device irrespective of its location You may wish to display the local time corresponding to its geographical location You can do this with the settings LocalTime Enable and LocalTime Offset The LocalTime Enable has three setting options Disabled Fixed and Flexible With Disabled no local time zo...

Page 122: ...sing the following settings DST Enable DST Offset DST Start DST Start Day DST Start Month DST Start Mins DST End DST End Day DST End Month DST End Mins These settings are described in the DATE AND TIME settings table in the configuration chapter Chapter 5 Configuration P446SV 90 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 123: ...p using the Active Settings setting or with the hotkeys If you choose Select via PSL you set the settings group with DDB signals according to the following table SG Select 1X SG Select X1 Selected Setting Group 0 0 1 0 1 2 1 0 3 1 1 4 Each setting group has its own PSL Once a PSL configuration has been designed it can be allocated to any one of the 4 setting groups When downloading or extracting a...

Page 124: ...Chapter 5 Configuration P446SV 92 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 125: ...CHAPTER 6 SAMPLED VALUE OPERATION ...

Page 126: ...Chapter 6 Sampled Value Operation P446SV 94 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 127: ...OVERVIEW This chapter contains the following sections Chapter Overview 95 Introduction To Sampled Values 96 Data Resampling 97 Sampled Value Alignment 98 P446SV Chapter 6 Sampled Value Operation P446SV TM EN 1 95 ...

Page 128: ...s such as optical and Rogowski devices IEDs which accept digital sampled values rather than analog signals have no need for expensive and heavy on board scaling CTs and VTs making them smaller lighter safer and cheaper An SV IED with the same size case as a conventional IED would have more room for digital I O because valuable space is not taken up by the on board CTs and VTs The following figure ...

Page 129: ...and VTs The resampling frequency depends on the device The IEC 61850 9 2LE interface also tracks the supply frequency This is because the Sampled Values from the Process Bus are fixed at 4000 samples sec for 50 Hz and 4800 samples sec at 60 Hz V03701 SV IED VA VB VC VN IA IB IC IN Sampled Values 80 samples per cycle CPU Analog Merging Unit IEC 61850 SV Interface Process Bus Resampling Figure 32 Da...

Page 130: ...g commissioning set MUs Delay Search to Yes The IED then monitors the Sampled Value frames received for the next two seconds and displays the maximum delay between identical samples 4 1 CHANNEL MAPPINGS FOR SAV TEST SAV QUESTIONABLE SAV INVALID These signals correspond to the analogue channels in a conventional MiCOM IED The channel name appears on the IED display against each bit P446 P546 P841B ...

Page 131: ...lity IA1 IB1 IC1 IA2 IB2 IC2 VA VB VC VSC1 VSC2 IN SEN IM Differential Protection X Distance Protection X X Directional Earth Fault X X Overcurrent Protection X Negative Sequence X Broken Conductor X Earth Fault Protection X REF Protection X SEF Protection X Residual Overvoltage X Voltage Protection X Frequency Protection 4 3 PROCESS BUS PERFORMANCE Ethernet networks sometimes lose frames so the I...

Page 132: ...and P841B IEDs which have an IEC 61850 9 2LE interface It allows the user to switch the three phase voltage input between two independent Sampled Value frames while the IED is in service This may correspond to two separate voltage transformers in the primary system The VT Switch function also allows the single phase check synchronising voltages to be selected from three independent Sampled Value f...

Page 133: ...age 1888 to 1919 GOOSEOUT_33 64 PSL GOOSEOUT Protection Event Virtual outputs These allow you to control binary signals which can be mapped using the SCADA protocol output to other devices 4 5 2 VIRTUAL CT AND VT RATIO SETTINGS The Sampled Value frames are primary measurements These come from Merging Units MU connected to conventional CTs and VTs or Non Conventional Instrument Transformers NCITs A...

Page 134: ... protection functions when receiving frames with a test flag One or more of the Sampled Value frames received does not have a test flag and the IED is configured to receive only frames with a test flag Sampled Values received have a nominal frequency different to that set in the IED The secondary current or voltage exceeds the acceptable limit 4 6 1 P446 P546 P841B ALARMS Sampled Value global sync...

Page 135: ...l assignment depends on the IED SAV Invalid 18 55 00000000 00000000 00000000 This is a data cell with 24 binary flags It indicates the status of the IEC 61850 Quality attribute Invalid in the Sampled Value frames for each of the analogue channels The channel assignment depends on the IED 4 6 1 2 ALARM SIGNALS DDB TABLE Ordinal Signal Name Source Type Response Description 340 ALARM_9_2_SAV Software...

Page 136: ...Chapter 6 Sampled Value Operation P446SV 104 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 137: ...CHAPTER 7 DISTANCE PROTECTION ...

Page 138: ...Chapter 7 Distance Protection P446SV 106 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 139: ...ce for applying this protection is also provided This chapter contains the following sections Chapter Overview 107 Introduction 108 Distance Measuring Zones Operating Principles 110 Phase and Earth Fault Distance Protection Implementation 139 Delta Directional Element 147 Application Notes 150 P446SV Chapter 7 Distance Protection P446SV TM EN 1 107 ...

Page 140: ...aring the calculated impedance with the zone reach points the device can determine whether a fault is present and if necessary trip the associated circuit breakers 2 2 PERFORMANCE INFLUENCING FACTORS As well as the accuracy of the signals presented by the input transducers an important factor that influences the performance of distance protection is the relationship between the source and line imp...

Page 141: ...s defined on an R X diagram Many numerical IEDs emulate their traditional electro mechanical counterparts Rather than calculating the absolute impedance they compare the measured fault voltage with a replica voltage derived from the fault current and the zone impedance setting to determine whether the fault is within zone or out of zone Typically a comparator will compare either the relative ampli...

Page 142: ... Mho expansion and help establish a directional decision R Resistance R Forward Resistance Reach R Reverse Resistance Reach S A voltage vector value comprising one or more voltage components S1 A voltage vector input to a comparator S2 A second voltage vector input to a comparator V Voltage V Voltage used by the Distance protection measuring element V I Impedance measured by the Distance protectio...

Page 143: ...omponents are usually used to provide a polarizing reference Directional Self Polarized Mhos however are simpler to understand and are used by way of introduction 3 1 1 DIRECTIONAL MHO CHARACTERISTIC FOR PHASE FAULTS The following diagram illustrates how the Directional Self Polarized Mho characteristic for phase Distance protection is created 90 V I Z I Z I V V02710 Figure 34 Directional mho elem...

Page 144: ...nd the loop impedance plane ZLP plane The reach impedance setting defines the reach in positive sequence impedance terms The characteristic in the ZLP plane is generally dynamic because it depends on fault currents However the ZLP plane representation is often more convenient for reference especially if an injection test kit is used which cannot apply the residual compensation to the impedance plo...

Page 145: ...3Z1 and is defined by two settings kZm Mutual Set and kZm Mutual Angle Operation occurs when the angle between the signals is greater than 90 To obtain a ZLP plane representation in the directional Mho element construction V is replaced with Vph and I is replaced with Iph kZN IN where Vph and Iph are the faulty phase voltage and current respectively assuming no mutual current compensation The two ...

Page 146: ... Mho characteristic for earth fault distance protection is created in the impedance domain plane 1 Z 90 Z R X j Z I V Z I V Z I V V02713 Figure 37 Offset Mho characteristics impedance domain The two signals provided to the comparator are S1 V I Z S2 V I Z Operation occurs when the angle between the signals is greater than 90 The following diagram below how the Offset Mho characteristic for earth f...

Page 147: ... than the current of the faulty phase then the neutral current is approximately the same as the phase current and the terms can be simplified as follows Zreplica Z 1 kZN kZM IM Iph Z replica Z 1 kZN kZM IM Iph If the healthy phase currents are much less than the current of the faulty phase and mutual current compensation is not applied then these terms can be simplified as follows Zreplica Z 1 kZN...

Page 148: ...als provided to the Mho comparators for memory polarization are S1 V pVmem S2 V IZ where V is the self polarization voltage Vmem is the memory polarization voltage Operation occurs when the angle between the signals is greater than 90 The memory voltage Vmem is the pre fault voltage Assuming the pre fault current is close to zero at the relaying point he pre fault voltage is equal to the source vo...

Page 149: ...nals S1 and S2 provided to the Mho comparators In some cases the source and line impedances are different from their actual values used in various power system studies This is mainly due to pre fault current and the residual compensation for phase to ground loops To plot an accurate impedance characteristic calculate the values of ZS as follows ZS Vmem V I Dynamic Mho Contraction for Reverse Fault...

Page 150: ...implified Reverse Fault For a fault condition we can write the following equations VS V I ZS ZL 90 1 90 V I Z Z V I Z p p S L The Mho contraction for a reverse fault is illustrated in the following diagram Chapter 7 Distance Protection P446SV 118 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 151: ...and S2 provided to the Mho comparators In some cases the source and line impedances are different from their actual values used in various power system studies This is mainly due to pre fault current and the residual compensation for phase to ground loops To plot an accurate impedance characteristic calculate the values of ZS ZL as follows ZS ZL V Vmem I 3 1 7 CROSS POLARIZATION OF MHO CHARACTERIS...

Page 152: ...ge is added Note If no memory voltage is available then the cross polarized quantity is used instead The setting Dist Polarizing p defines the amount of memory polarization or if need be cross polarization voltage which should be added with respect to the existing self polarizing voltage so that S1 V pVmem The value p can be set from 0 2 20 to 5 500 This will have an affect on the characteristic w...

Page 153: ... benefits of adding memory into the polarizing mix is that Mho characteristics offer dynamic expansion if there is a forward fault therefore covering greater fault arc resistance 3 2 QUADRILATERAL CHARACTERISTIC A number of zones are provided to make up the Quadrilateral characteristics The following diagram shows examples of Directional Forward Directional Reverse and Offset zones V02700 Zone 3 o...

Page 154: ... Reach Lines exhibit a characteristic tilt slope A line that tilts to reduce the reactive reach negative tilt tilt down encourages underreaching A line that tilts to increase the reactive reach positive tilt tilt up encourages overreaching The tilt can be used to reinforce the overreaching underreaching requirements of the zone For example for an underreaching Forward zone a negative tilt will ens...

Page 155: ... default value of 60º but you can change it with the Dir Char Angle setting If you want to use a conventional directional technique then you can do this by disabling the Delta Directional element The protection will then use a conventional directional element with a fixed angle of 60º The following figure illustrates two Offset zones that have been converted into Directional Forward zones by the o...

Page 156: ...ripping region The polygon may be either 4 sided or 5 sided The shape depends according to the settings that are applied by the five comparators and how the Directional Line interacts with the reach lines usually the Reverse Impedance Reach Line The Directional Line may completely mask a reach line If that is the case the polygon will be 4 sided quadrilateral If the Directional Line intersects a r...

Page 157: ...e Z3 Ph Reach 0 25 Z R3 Ph Resistive 0 25 R 3 Ph Ph Offset Z3 Ph Reach Z3 Ph Rev Reach R3 Ph Resistive R3 Ph Res Rev 4 Ph Ph Reverse Z4 Ph Reach Z R4 Ph Resistive 0 25 R P Ph Ph Forward ZP Ph Reach Z RP Ph Resistive 0 25 R P Ph Ph Reverse ZP Ph Reach Z RP Ph Resistive 0 25 R P Ph Ph Offset ZQ Ph Reach ZP Ph Rev Reach RP Ph Resistive RP Ph Res Rev Q Ph Ph Forward ZQ Ph Reach Z RQ Ph Resistive 0 25 ...

Page 158: ...inders The two resistive blinders Resistive Reach Line and Reverse Resistive Reach Line are parallel to the zone characteristic impedance angle The two reactance lines of each Quadrilateral exhibit a characteristic tilt In the phase fault characteristics the tilt of the Reverse Impedance Reach Line is preset whilst you can choose the tilt angle for the Impedance Reach Line 3 2 2 1 PHASE FAULT IMPE...

Page 159: ... following diagram R jX V02723 Z V I Z V I 3 Figure 49 Reverse impedance reach line construction For an Offset zone Z is the settable reverse reach For a directional zone Z is a fixed percentage either 25 or 100 of the forward reach Z in the opposite direction The signals provided to the comparator are S1 V I Z S2 I Ð 3 Impedance on the tripping side of the Reverse Impedance Reach line is detected...

Page 160: ...measures half of the loop the right hand resistive reach R of the characteristic is equal to half of the setting value R Rx Ph Resistive R jX V02724 Z V I R V I R Ð Z Figure 51 Resistive Reach line construction For all V I vectors which are on the left side of the right blinder the following condition is true Ð V I R Z or Ð V I R Ð I Z The two signals provided to the comparator are S1 V I R S2 I Z...

Page 161: ...fixed at 25 of the Resistive Reach Rx Ph Res Rev acting in the opposite direction The two signals provided to the comparator are S1 V I R S2 I Z The impedance on the right side of the left hand resistive line is detected when the angle between S1 and S2 is less than 0 3 2 2 5 PHASE FAULT QUADRILATERAL CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY The phase fault Quadrilateral characteristics are summarised in the follow...

Page 162: ...Ph Resistive 0 25 R Q Ph Ph Offset ZQ Ph Reach ZQ Ph Rev Reach RQ Ph Resistive RQ Ph Res Rev Note Not all zones feature in all product variations 3 2 3 EARTH FAULT QUADRILATERAL CHARACTERISTICS Quadrilateral characteristics are available for earth fault protection A mix of Directional Forward Directional Reverse and Offset characteristics is available Zone 1 and Zone 2 are Directional Forward Zone...

Page 163: ...ng then the reactance line is formed by phase comparison between an operating signal V I Z S1 and a polarizing quantity IPOL S2 Ifault should be used to determine S2 but because the Distance protection cannot measure the fault current directly due to the unknown infeed from the remote end Ifault cannot be used as the polarizing current Instead the angle of Ifault must be estimated Two proven metho...

Page 164: ... Impedance Reach line of the characteristic in the Z1 plane is shown in the following diagram R jX Z I V Z I V V02731 Z1 plane Ð j e I Iph Figure 54 Impedance Reach line in Z1 plane For all V I vectors below the Impedance Reach line the following condition is true Ð V I Z σ or Ð V I Z I σ If mutual compensation is not applied for an earth fault loop V Vph and I Iph kZN IN so the signals fed into c...

Page 165: ... If the healthy phase currents are much less than the current of the faulty phase then IN Iph The tilting angle in this case is fixed at the following value Tilt angle Ð 1 1 kZN σ For products that have mutual compensation if the mutual compensation is enabled the tilting angle is Tilt angle Ð Iph Iph kZN IN kZM IM σ The replica reach Zreplica depends on the ratio of IN Iph If IN Iph and if mutual...

Page 166: ...fixed tilt angle σ Dynamic Tilt Angle I2 I σ The default value of the fixed tilt is 3 It is introduced to reduce the possibility of overreach caused by any small differences between the negative sequence source impedances and general CT VT angle tolerances The tilting of Earth Fault Quadrilateral characteristic reactance lines are constrained to prevent inappropriate excessive tilting according to...

Page 167: ...hether to use I2 or Iph and hence whether dynamic tilting will apply according to the angular relationship between I2 and Iph The following criteria are applied If the angle between I2 and Iph is more than 45 the Quadrilateral characteristics are disabled and Mho characteristics are used instead If the angle between I2 and Iph is less than 45 Leading and lagging polarizing currents are allocated a...

Page 168: ...elationship between the positive sequence impedances and the earth fault loop impedances needs to be understood Consider the general characteristic in the Z1 plane shown in the following figure R jX V02734 V I R Z Z1 plane Ð Iph I 3 Z R Ð Iph I Figure 58 General characteristic in Z1 plane R RLP Iph I and R R LP Iph I I Iph kZN IN For products that have mutual compensation if the mutual compensatio...

Page 169: ...Zreplica S1 S2 0º Reverse Reverse resistive reach Vph Iph R LP Iph Zreplica S1 S2 0º The Resistive Impedance Reach side of the earth zone is controlled by the Resistive Reach setting applied Rx Gnd Resistive This defines the fault arc resistance that can be detected for a single phase earth fault For such a fault the fault resistance appears in the total fault loop out and return loop in which the...

Page 170: ... the fixed tilt applies If fixed tilting is selected then he current input quantity for S2 is Iph in all cases The positive sequence reach settings used for the Earth Fault Quadrilateral characteristics are summarised in the table below Zone Type Impedance Reach Z Reverse Impedance Reach Z Resistive Reach R Reverse Resistive Reach R 1 Ph Earth Forward Z1 Gnd Reach 1 kZN 0 25 Z R1 Gnd Resistive 0 2...

Page 171: ...ed or Disabled using the Zone Gnd Status settings in the DISTANCE SETUP column Characteristics can be either Quadrilateral polygon or Mho circular The chosen characteristic applies to all zones All distance elements are directionalized and use residual compensation of the corresponding phase fault reach 4 3 DISTANCE PROTECTION TRIPPING DECISION A fault is detected if the phase voltage drops below ...

Page 172: ... operate all elements are enabled for the following five cycles before the phase selector returns to its quiescent state Operation of an enabled distance element during the two cycle or five cycle period causes the phase selector state to be maintained until the element resets An exception to this is when the phase selector changes decision while an element is operated In this case the selected el...

Page 173: ...d enables Distance protection on all elements which have been selected by the pick up These elements are enabled for 2 cycles and normally this will result in tripping On double ground to phase faults only appropriate phase elements are enabled This is because they are generally more accurate than ground elements under these conditions If however tripping is not initiated within the 2 cycles for t...

Page 174: ...ing assumes that the residual compensation factor is equal for all zones The protection calculates the required reach settings from the percentage settings The calculated zone reaches are available for viewing but you cannot change a value An Advanced Setting Mode allows individual distance ohmic reaches and residual compensation factors to be entered for each zone When Advanced mode is selected a...

Page 175: ...ht through to an SIR ratio of 60 When quadrilateral characteristics are used you can set the tilt angle of the impedance reach lines In Advanced setting mode the impedance reach lines of the quadrilateral characteristics are fixed but not as horizontal reactance lines To account for phase angle tolerances in the current and voltage transformers etc the lines are tilted downwards at a droop of 3 In...

Page 176: ...nsient components that could be caused by close up faults uses an anti resonance design and the resulting transient distortion is fairly small Passively suppressed CVTs are sometimes classed as type 2 In passive CVT applications the effect on characteristic accuracy is generally negligible for source to line impedance ratios of less than 30 SIR 30 However with a high Source to Line Impedance Ratio...

Page 177: ...er Characteristics Z denotes the Load B Impedance setting This sets the radius of the under impedance circle ß denotes the Load B Angle setting This sets the angle of the two blinder boundary lines the gradient of the rise or fall with respect to the resistive axis The protection can allow the load blinder to be bypassed any time that the measured voltage for the phase in question falls below an u...

Page 178: ... whilst allowing the appropriate Zone1 phase earth element to trip Acts when the distance protection makes a multiple phase selection where more than one phase is involved in the fault but only one Zone 1 phase earth element picks up Only on angle operation of the Zone 1 phase earth element can activate the logic this prevents incorrect operation due to impedance encroachment Allows only one Zone ...

Page 179: ...e Under healthy network conditions the system voltage is close to Vn nominal and load current flows Under such steady state conditions if the voltage measured on each phase now is compared with a stored memory from exactly two power system cycles previously the difference between them is zero Zero voltage change DV 0 and zero current change DI 0 except when there are changes in load current When a...

Page 180: ...rce S and part from remote end R of the line Therefore each element measures a lower proportion of DI The DV generated by the fault is equal to the fault arc voltage minus the pre fault voltage so it is in anti phase with the pre fault voltage The DV measured by the protection is the voltage drop across the source impedance behind the protection location This is generally smaller than the DV measu...

Page 181: ...f the set characteristic angle Note If Delta directional aided scheme are not used Distance zone directionalizing uses fixed operating thresholds DV 0 5V and DI 5 In If the fault DV is below the setting of 0 5V a conventional distance line ensures correct forward reverse polarizing For Delta directional aided schemes sufficient DV must be present for tripping to occur The delta directional element...

Page 182: ...l for earth fault zones For open delta vee connected voltage transformer applications Set Mho for phase fault distance protection For Earth Fault protection disable the Earth Fault Distance elements and use Directional Earth Fault instead For series compensated lines Select Mho characteristics for both phase and earth faults 6 2 1 PHASE CHARACTERISTIC The phase characteristic selection is common t...

Page 183: ...cted line impedance positive phase sequence line impedance with Zone 2 elements set to cover the final 20 of the line The Zone 2 elements should be set to cover the 20 of the line not covered by Zone 1 Allowing for underreaching errors the Zone 2 reach Z2 should be set in excess of 120 of the protected line impedance for all fault conditions Where aided tripping schemes are used fast operation of ...

Page 184: ...one reach to resistive reach is the same for all zones The Fault Resistance setting defines a reference fault at the remote end of the line The resistive reach is set at the same percentage of the fault resistance as the Zone Reach setting For example if the Zone 1 reach is 80 of the protected line its resistive reach is 80 of the reference fault resistance The Proportional setting is used to avoi...

Page 185: ...esistive internal fault Figure 67 Over tilting effect In the case of high resistance external faults on a short line particularly under heavy power exporting conditions Zone 1 remains stable due to dynamic downwards tilting of the impedance reach line However the detection of high resistance internal faults especially towards the end of the line needs consideration In such applications you can cho...

Page 186: ...f you use the Advanced Setting Mode in addition to the reach and compensation settings you have additional settings to enter Each zone has a minimum current sensitivity setting Zn Sensit Iph which sets the minimum current that must be flowing in each of the faulted phases before a trip can occur It is recommended to leave these settings at their default An exception is where the protection is made...

Page 187: ... regardless of the degree of compensation and for which the 60 shift is most appropriate To ensure correct reliable and fast operation for both fault locations in the case of predominantly capacitive source we recommend a Dir Char Angle setting of 30 6 7 FILTERING SETUP A number of filters and features are provided to help avoid false tripping during conditions that can be challenging to distance ...

Page 188: ...tolerances on load A fault must be present on the phase in question and it is acceptable to override the blinder action and allow the distance zones to trip according to the entire zone shape The benefit is that the resistive coverage for faults near to the protection location can be higher The undervoltage setting must be lower than the lowest phase neutral voltage under heavy load flow and depre...

Page 189: ...ycles on fault inception If any distance elements are enabled these will automatically allow the delta forward or reverse decisions to seal in until such time as the fault is cleared from the system Therefore as a minimum some distance zone s must be enabled in the DISTANCE SETUP column as fault detectors It does not matter what time delay is applied for the zone s This can either be the typical d...

Page 190: ...line diagram for the system is shown in the following figure Tiger Bay Green Valley Blue River Rocky Bay 80 km 100 km 60 km IED IED E02705 Figure 68 Example power system The system data is as follows System Voltage 230kV System earthing Solid CT ratio 1200 5 VT ratio 230 000 115 Line length 100km Positive sequence line impedance Z1 0 089 j0 476 ohms km 0 484Ð79 4 Zero sequence line impedance Z0 0 ...

Page 191: ... protection at Green Valley The required Zone 1 reach is to be 80 of the line impedance between Green Valley and Blue River substations Using the Setting Mode Simple Set Zone 1 Ph Status and Zone 1 Gnd Stat to Enabled Set Zone 1 Ph Reach and Zone 1 Gnd Reach to 80 From this the protection algorithm automatically calculates the required Ohmic reaches Alternatively using the Setting Mode Advanced th...

Page 192: ...e 6 11 6 ZONE 3 REVERSE REACH SETTINGS For the protection at Green Valley In the absence of special requirements because the protected line length is more than 30km Zone 3 can be given a small reverse reach say 10 Using Advanced mode in the DISTANCE SETUP column set Z3 Ph Rev Reach and Z3 Gnd Rev Rch 0 1 5 81 0 58 W 6 11 7 ZONE 4 REVERSE REACH SETTINGS For the protection at Green Valley Where Zone...

Page 193: ...t the recommended 70 of Vn 66 4 x 0 7 45 V 6 11 9 QUADRILATERAL RESISTIVE REACH SETTINGS If applying Quadrilateral characteristics as well as the Impedance Reaches the Resistive Reaches also need to be considered The Resistive reaches of the phase fault elements must be set to cover the maximum expected phase to phase fault resistance The Resistive reaches of the earth fault elements should take i...

Page 194: ...h 5 x Ra 20 W primary value The Phase Resistive Reach could be set higher than this for example using the rule of thumb 2 3 0 0045 x Line length km x Zone 1 reach so typically it would be set higher than 20Ω but lower than the Load Avoidance setting Earth Fault Elements Fault resistance would comprise arc resistance and tower footing resistance A typical resistive reach coverage setting would be 4...

Page 195: ...into account the effect of the infeed from the tee point Like overreaching of Zone 2 elements underreaching of Zone 1 elements must also be assured Zone 1 elements at each terminal must be set to underreach the true impedance to their nearest terminal limiting case no infeed to the tee point hence no overreach contribution Changing the reach requirements to match the infeed expectations is possibl...

Page 196: ...Chapter 7 Distance Protection P446SV 164 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 197: ...CHAPTER 8 CARRIER AIDED SCHEMES ...

Page 198: ...Chapter 8 Carrier Aided Schemes P446SV 166 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 199: ... sections Chapter Overview 167 Introduction 168 Carrier Aided Schemes Implementation 169 Aided Distance Scheme Logic 171 Aided DEF Scheme Logic 184 Aided Delta Scheme Logic 195 Application Notes 202 P446SV Chapter 8 Carrier Aided Schemes P446SV TM EN 1 167 ...

Page 200: ...licable Delta Directional Comparison Protection schemes Aided Delta Schemes where a communication channel is used to send command signals between line ends are known as Carrier Aided Schemes The terms simplex and duplex are used to describe the type of communication channel used Simplex communication also sometimes referred to as half duplex requires only a single communication channel between lin...

Page 201: ...he entire circuit by communicating command signals For the the communication between local and remote terminals InterMiCOM 64 IM64 can be used 3 1 CARRIER AIDED SCHEME TYPES This product has two independent Carrier Aided Schemes Aided Scheme 1 and Aided Scheme 2 The two schemes are independent but the design of both is the same Each of the two Carrier Aided Schemes provides the following options P...

Page 202: ...f scheme you want to use and then you choose whether to use it in conjunction with the Distance protection and or the Aided DEF protection The scheme options are Disabled No scheme is implemented PUR Permissive Underreach Transfer Tripping PUPP PUR or PUTT scheme PUR Unblocking Perrmissive Underreach Unblocking scheme POR Permissive Overreach Transfer Tripping POP POR or POTT scheme POR Unblocking...

Page 203: ...20 of the protected line are therefore cleared with minimal time delay Note This assumes a 20 typical end zone when Zone 1 is set to 80 of the protected line The following are some of the main features and requirements for a permissive under reaching scheme Only a simplex channel is required Scheme security is high because the signalling channel is only keyed for faults in the protected line If th...

Page 204: ...hannel is keyed that means that the aiding signal is asserted by the pickup of an over reaching Zone 2 element To use this scheme you need to set the relevant setting Aid 1 Selection or Aid 2 Selection in the SCHEME LOGIC column to POR If a remote protection element detects a forward fault and receives a POR signal the protection operates without further delay Faults in the last 20 of the protecte...

Page 205: ... than that of the Zone 1 elements in the case of Mho elements Current reversal guard logic prevents healthy line protection maloperation for high speed current reversals that can be experienced on double circuit line applications which can be caused by sequential opening of circuit breakers If the signalling channel fails basic distance scheme tripping remains available The POR logic is Send logic...

Page 206: ...nced by POR Trip Reinforcement and POR Weak Infeed features 4 2 1 PERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRIP REINFORCEMENT The send logic in the POR scheme is arranged so that for any trip command at a local end the local protection sends a Channel Aided signal to the remote end s This facilitates fault isolation at each terminal as quickly as possible The send signal is generated by the Any Trip command and it is...

Page 207: ...ect the line fault at the weak infeed terminal This voltage check prevents tripping during spurious operations of the channel or during channel testing The Weak Infeed Echo and Trip logic is No Distance Zone Operation has been detected but a POR signal has been received AND a V condition exists Weak infeed tripping is time delayed according to the value set in the WI Trip Delay settingin the SCHEM...

Page 208: ... POR and Blocking schemes from tripping incorrectly during current reversal conditions E03503 Strong source Fault Weak source Fault Note how after circuit breaker B on line L1 opens the direction of current flow in line L2 is reversed A C L2 D B L1 t2 C t2 D A C L2 D B L1 Figure 73 Example of fault current reversal of direction The current reversal guard incorporated in the permissive overreach sc...

Page 209: ...d does not occur for any internal faults The blocking signal is transmitted over a healthy line and so problems associated with power line carrier signals failing are avoided Blocking schemes provide similar resistive coverage to the permissive overreach schemes Fast tripping occurs at a strong source line end for faults along the protected line section even if there is weak or zero infeed at the ...

Page 210: ...trip fault condition signal should be transmitted to the remote terminal s Normally either a guard signal or a trip signal should be transmitted and received Under certain fault conditions however the PLC signal can be heavily attenuated or even lost completely In such conditions Permissive Overreach Unblocking schemes allow the permissive tripping to operate for a short period after the carrier i...

Page 211: ...ms after the guard signal is lost and continues for 150ms The 10ms delay gives time for the signalling equipment to change frequency Note If the Z1 Ext Scheme setting is set to operate for channel failure the Zone 1 extension logic will be invoked if a channel failure is detected This scheme type also provides Loss of Guard logic as described below System condition Permissive channel received Loss...

Page 212: ...nd Aid1 Custom Send 1 From Aided 1 DEF From Aided 1 Delta if applicable Notes This example assumes zone 2 distance phase and distance ground elements are enabled Aided 1 scheme only shown Note For the purpose of clarity this diagram shows the first relevant stage number for each signal and setting name 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 984 985 986 987 988 989 394 498 497 496 Figure 7...

Page 213: ... Def Trip C From Aided 1 Delta Trip C if applicable From Aided 1 Def Trip N From Aided 1 Delta Trip N if applicable Aid 1 Distance Ground Only Phase Only Phase And Ground 1 1 Zone2 AN Element Zone2 BN Element Zone2 CN Element Zone2 AB Element Zone2 BC Element Zone2 CA Element 394 501 502 966 967 968 969 970 971 503 633 634 635 636 Figure 77 Aided Distance Tripping logic 4 7 4 PUR AIDED TRIPPING LO...

Page 214: ...ot Logic Aided 1 WI V A Aided 1 WI V A Aid 1 WI Trip A Aid 1 WI Trip A Aid 1 WI Trip B Aid 1 WI Trip B Aid 1 WI Trip C Aid 1 WI Trip C WI Sngl Pole Trp WI Sngl Pole Trp Disabled Disabled Aid1 WI Trip 3Ph Aid1 WI Trip 3Ph CB1 Open A ph CB1 Open A ph CB2 Open A ph CB2 Open A ph CB1 Open B ph CB1 Open B ph CB2 Open B ph CB2 Open B ph CB1 Open C ph CB1 Open C ph CB2 Open C ph CB2 Open C ph Any Trip An...

Page 215: ...ded 1 COS LGS 498 494 492 501 Figure 80 Aided Scheme Blocking 1 Tripping logic 4 7 7 AIDED SCHEME BLOCKING 2 TRIPPING LOGIC V03517 Aided 1 Receive Aid1 Trip Enable 1 Aided 1 Send 1 Aided 1 COS LGS tRGD tReversal Guard 494 498 492 501 Figure 81 Aided Scheme Blocking 2 Tripping logic P446SV Chapter 8 Carrier Aided Schemes P446SV TM EN 1 183 ...

Page 216: ...g the Directional E F setting in the CONFIGURATION column This makes the settings in the AIDED DEF column visible The Aided DEF requires a polarizing quantity selected in the DEF Polarizing setting in conjunction with a characteristic angle setting DEF Char Angle to make the directional decision For all models a signal derived from the phase voltage inputs can be used for polarization For certain ...

Page 217: ...n Delta in the CT AND VT RATIOS COLUMN This then reveals the DEF Vnpol Input setting in the AIDED DEF column which can be set to Measured or Derived 5 3 1 1 VIRTUAL CURRENT POLARIZING A technique called Virtual Current Polarizing can allow the Aided DEF protection to operate even if the Polarizing voltage is below the DEF VNPol Set threshold If the superimposed current phase selector associated wi...

Page 218: ...e a 3 limb voltage transformer is fitted which has no path for residual flux Where the application features a parallel line and zero sequence mutual coupling may exist The problems in these applications can be alleviated using negative phase sequence nps voltage for polarization The nps voltage threshold must be set in the cell DEF V2pol Set Note The current quantity used for operation of the Aide...

Page 219: ...ng the polarized voltage Hence negative characteristic angle settings are required for Aided DEF applications This is set in cell DEF Char Angle in the EARTH FAULT settings The following angle settings are recommended for a residual voltage polarized device Solidly earthed distribution systems 45 Solidly earthed transmissions systems 60 If Virtual I Pol is set to Disabled it prevents checking of t...

Page 220: ...ing channel is keyed from operation of the forward DEF Fwd Set element If the remote device has also detected a forward fault it operates with no additional delay when it receives this signal The logic is Send logic Key channel if DEF Fwd Set picks up Permissive trip logic Trip if DEF Fwd Set picks up AND the channel key is received The figure below shows the element reaches and the simplified sch...

Page 221: ... for high resistance earth faults The signalling channel is keyed from operation of the reverse Aided DEF element DEF REV Set If the remote device s forward Aided DEF element DEF FWD Set has picked up it operates after the Aid 1 DEF Dly expires if no block is received Where t is shown in the diagram this signifies the time delay associated with an element To allow time for a blocking signal to arr...

Page 222: ...1 DEF Inst DEF Forward E03519 Start Start Stop Stop DEF Reverse DEF Forward DEF Forward DEF Reverse t IDMT t Bu2 t Bu1 t IDMT t Bu2 t Bu1 A B ZL 1 1 Figure 85 Aided DEF Blocking scheme 5 7 AIDED DEF LOGIC DIAGRAMS 5 7 1 DEF DIRECTIONAL SIGNALS V03526 Pole Dead A DEFForward element DEFReverse element Pole Dead B Pole Dead C 1 DEF Forward DEF Reverse 892 893 894 996 997 Figure 86 DEF Directional Sig...

Page 223: ... Aided 1 Delta Notes Aided 1 scheme only shown P445 does not provide an Aided Delta function 996 997 395 877 497 496 498 Figure 87 Aided DEF Send logic 5 7 3 CARRIER AIDED SCHEMES RECEIVE LOGIC V03508 Aided 1 COS LGS Aided1 Scheme Rx Aid 1 Chan Fail Aided 1 receive Aid 1 Selection PUR Unblocking tDR 1 tDW 1 1 1 tPR POR Unblocking Prog Unblocking 1 493 492 494 317 Figure 88 Carrier Aided Schemes Re...

Page 224: ...om Aided 1 Distance Trip B From Aided 1 Delta Trip B if applicable From Aided 1 Distance Trip C From Aided 1 Delta Trip C if applicable From Aided 1 Distance Trip N From Aided 1 Delta Trip N if applicable DEF Forward DEF Status Enabled Aid1 Trip Enable Aid1 Custom Trip 1 Aid 1 DEF Trip 3 Pole 1 And 3 Pole 1 Aid1 DEF Trip 3Ph tDEF 1 Phase Select N 395 501 502 996 1010 1011 1012 1013 1013 641 505 63...

Page 225: ...ot Logic Aided 1 WI V A Aided 1 WI V A Aid 1 WI Trip A Aid 1 WI Trip A Aid 1 WI Trip B Aid 1 WI Trip B Aid 1 WI Trip C Aid 1 WI Trip C WI Sngl Pole Trp WI Sngl Pole Trp Disabled Disabled Aid1 WI Trip 3Ph Aid1 WI Trip 3Ph CB1 Open A ph CB1 Open A ph CB2 Open A ph CB2 Open A ph CB1 Open B ph CB1 Open B ph CB2 Open B ph CB2 Open B ph CB1 Open C ph CB1 Open C ph CB2 Open C ph CB2 Open C ph Any Trip An...

Page 226: ...ded 1 COS LGS 498 494 492 501 Figure 91 Aided Scheme Blocking 1 Tripping logic 5 7 7 AIDED SCHEME BLOCKING 2 TRIPPING LOGIC V03517 Aided 1 Receive Aid1 Trip Enable 1 Aided 1 Send 1 Aided 1 COS LGS tRGD tReversal Guard 494 498 492 501 Figure 92 Aided Scheme Blocking 2 Tripping logic Chapter 8 Carrier Aided Schemes P446SV 194 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 227: ... apply the Aided Delta Directional Comparison Protection 6 1 AIDED DELTA POR SCHEME The channel for an Aided Delta POR scheme is keyed by operation of the overreaching Delta Forward elements If the remote device has also detected a forward fault upon receipt of this signal the protection operates If the signalling channel fails Basic distance scheme tripping is available The logic is Send logic Ke...

Page 228: ... channel is keyed from operation of the Delta Reverse elements If the remote device has detected Delta Forward it operates after the trip delay if no block is received The logic is Send logic Key channel if a Delta Fault Reverse condition is detected Trip logic Trip if a Delta Fault Forward condition is detected AND a keyed channel signal is NOT received before the Aided Delta Delay timer expires ...

Page 229: ...EV DIR REV DIR FWD DIR FWD Signalling Equipment Signalling Equipment CTX CTX CRX CRX G H TZ T TZ T Trip G Trip H END G END G Z Z E03521 R R 1 1 t t 0 0 Figure 94 Aided Delta Blocking scheme P446SV Chapter 8 Carrier Aided Schemes P446SV TM EN 1 197 ...

Page 230: ...Blk Send Echo Send Aid1 Custom Send Dir Comp Fwd Dir Comp Rev 1 1 Aid1 Inhib Delta From Aided 1 Distance From Aided 1 DEF Notes Aided 1 scheme only shown 396 496 497 498 1009 1008 1007 1006 1005 1004 1003 1002 1001 1000 999 998 Figure 95 Aided Delta Send logic 6 3 2 CARRIER AIDED SCHEMES RECEIVE LOGIC V03508 Aided 1 COS LGS Aided1 Scheme Rx Aid 1 Chan Fail Aided 1 receive Aid 1 Selection PUR Unblo...

Page 231: ...Trip N From Aided 1 Def Trip A From Aided 1 Distance Trip A From Aided 1 Def Trip B From Aided 1 Distance Trip B From Aided 1 Def Trip C From Aided 1 Distance Trip C From Aided 1 Def Trip N From Aided 1 Distance Trip N Aid 1 Delta Enabled Aid1 Trip Enable Aid1 Custom Trip 1 Aid1 Delta Tr3Ph Aid 1 DeltaTrip 3 Pole 1 And 3 Pole 1 396 501 502 640 504 633 634 635 636 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 Figure...

Page 232: ...ot Logic Aided 1 WI V A Aided 1 WI V A Aid 1 WI Trip A Aid 1 WI Trip A Aid 1 WI Trip B Aid 1 WI Trip B Aid 1 WI Trip C Aid 1 WI Trip C WI Sngl Pole Trp WI Sngl Pole Trp Disabled Disabled Aid1 WI Trip 3Ph Aid1 WI Trip 3Ph CB1 Open A ph CB1 Open A ph CB2 Open A ph CB2 Open A ph CB1 Open B ph CB1 Open B ph CB2 Open B ph CB2 Open B ph CB1 Open C ph CB1 Open C ph CB2 Open C ph CB2 Open C ph Any Trip An...

Page 233: ...ded 1 COS LGS 498 494 492 501 Figure 99 Aided Scheme Blocking 1 Tripping logic 6 3 6 AIDED SCHEME BLOCKING 2 TRIPPING LOGIC V03517 Aided 1 Receive Aid1 Trip Enable 1 Aided 1 Send 1 Aided 1 COS LGS tRGD tReversal Guard 494 498 492 501 Figure 100 Aided Scheme Blocking 2 Tripping logic P446SV Chapter 8 Carrier Aided Schemes P446SV TM EN 1 201 ...

Page 234: ...ng is employed a typical voltage setting is 70 of rated phase neutral voltage Weak infeed tripping is time delayed according to the WI Trip Delay value usually set at 60ms Current Reversal Guard The recommended setting is tReversal Guard Maximum signalling channel reset time 60 ms 7 3 AIDED DISTANCE BLOCKING SCHEME This scheme uses a reverse looking zone 4 element to block operation of a forward l...

Page 235: ...ping must be used The recommended delay time setting Aid 1 DEF Dly Aid 2 DEF Dly is the maximum signalling channel operating time 20 ms 7 6 AIDED DELTA POR SCHEME This scheme allows an instantaneous Delta trip of a local terminal if it sees a forward fault AND it receives a signal from the remote end protection indicating that it is too has seen a forward fault Send logic Delta fault Forward Permi...

Page 236: ...ance elements at A and C will underreach If terminal C is a relatively strong source the underreaching effect at A can be substantial If Zone 2 was set to a typical value of 120 of line AB the element may fail to operate for internal faults To compensate the Zone 2 element must be set to further overreach by a factor which takes into account the effect of the infeed from the tee point So if infeed...

Page 237: ...hough POR schemes are feasible for teed feeders the signalling requirements and the very large Zone 2 settings can make its use unattractive 7 8 2 PUR SCHEMES FOR TEED FEEDERS For a Permissive Underrreaching PUR scheme the signalling channel is only keyed for internal faults The channel is keyed by Zone 1 operation Aided tripping will occur at a receiving terminal if its overreaching Zone 2 settin...

Page 238: ...ping at A and B Scenario iii shows an example where outfeed from terminal C feeds an internal fault via terminal B In this case terminal C will not see the fault until the breaker at B has operated The result would be sequential and hence delayed tripping 7 8 3 BLOCKING SCHEMES FOR TEED FEEDERS With Blocking schemes high speed operation can be achieved for circuits where there is no current infeed...

Page 239: ...s results in a blocking signal being sent to the two remote terminals Although the fault will be cleared tripping will be prevented until the Zone 2 time delay has expired P446SV Chapter 8 Carrier Aided Schemes P446SV TM EN 1 207 ...

Page 240: ...Chapter 8 Carrier Aided Schemes P446SV 208 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 241: ...CHAPTER 9 NON AIDED SCHEMES ...

Page 242: ...Chapter 9 Non Aided Schemes P446SV 210 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 243: ...communication between the ends Non Aided Schemes This chapter contains the following sections Chapter Overview 211 Non Aided Schemes 212 Basic Schemes 213 Trip On Close Schemes 217 Zone1 Extension Scheme 221 Loss of Load Scheme 222 P446SV Chapter 9 Non Aided Schemes P446SV TM EN 1 211 ...

Page 244: ... operation delayed Zone 2 protection and further delayed Back up protection etc It also implements some special standalone schemes that don t require communications These are known as Non Aided Distance Schemes The non aided schemes provided in this product can be divided into the following categories Basic schemes Trip On Close schemes Zone 1 Extension scheme Loss of Load scheme The settings for ...

Page 245: ...any carrier aided acceleration schemes which may be enabled 3 1 BASIC SCHEME MODES The operation of distance zones according to their set time delays is called the basic scheme The basic scheme always runs regardless of any channel aided acceleration schemes which may be enabled The BasicScheme Mode setting defines how the timers associated with the different Distance zones in the Basic Scheme are...

Page 246: ...s Zone P Phase Elements 1 960 961 962 384 963 964 965 385 1691 Figure 103 Any Distance Start V02737 Block Zone 1 Gnd Zone 1 Gnd Stat Enabled Zone1 AN Element Zone1 BN Element Zone1 CN Element Block Zone 1 Phs Zone1 Ph Status Enabled Zone1 AB Element Zone1 BC Element Zone1 CA Element 1 tZ1 Gnd Delay Zone 1 A Start 1 1 Zone 1 Trip Zone 1 A Trip Zone 1 B Trip Zone 1 C Trip Zone 1 N Trip 1 1 1 1 Zone ...

Page 247: ...s of the order of 200 ms The Zone 3 time delay tZ3 is typically set with the same considerations made for the Zone 2 time delay except that the delay needs to co ordinate with the downstream Zone 2 fault clearance A typical minimum Zone 3 operating time would be in the region of 400 ms The Zone 4 time delay tZ4 needs to coordinate with any protection for adjacent lines in the protection s reverse ...

Page 248: ...lay B Typical application Trip A Trip B Note All timers can be set instantaneous TZ4 TZ3 TZ2 TZP TZ1 Z4 Z3 Z2 ZP Z1 Z4 Z3 Z2 ZP Z1 TZ4 TZ3 TZ2 TZP TZ1 Z Z B 1 1 Figure 106 Basic time stepped distance scheme Chapter 9 Non Aided Schemes P446SV 216 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 249: ...TRIP ON CLOSE section of the SCHEME LOGIC column SOTF and TOR are complemented by Current No Voltage level detectors also known as CNV level detectors These CNV level detectors are set using the voltage and current settings located in the CB FAIL P DEAD column The same settings are used for pole dead logic detection A 20ms time delay in the logic avoids a possible race between very fast overvoltag...

Page 250: ...ng occurs for any fault detected by the selected zones or Current No Volt level detectors when in SOTF mode Whether this feature is enabled or disabled the normal time delayed elements or aided channel scheme continues to function and can trip the circuit The SOTF Delay is a pick up time delay that starts after opening all three poles of a circuit breaker CB If the CB is then closed after the set ...

Page 251: ...IC Start SOTF Tripping Current No Volts SOTF Active SOTF Trip CNV 559 864 560 865 561 866 879 556 558 Figure 110 SOTF Tripping with CNV 4 2 TRIP ON RECLOSE TOR Trip On Reclose TOR is special protection following auto reclosure The TOR status setting is used to enable or disable TOR When enabled TOR is activated after the TOC Delay expires ready for application when an auto reclose shot occurs When...

Page 252: ...G LOGIC FOR APPROPRIATE ZONES V02755 TOR Tripping Zone 1 TOR Active Zone1 AN Element Zone1 BN Element Zone1 CN Element Zone1 AB Element Zone1 BC Element Zone1 CA Element 1 TOR Trip Zone1 Note This diagram shows Zone 1 only The other zones follow the same principles 878 960 961 962 963 964 965 704 Figure 111 TOR Tripping logic for appropriate zones 4 2 3 TOR TRIPPING LOGIC WITH CNV V02757 Fast OV P...

Page 253: ...ownstream protection for permanent faults Therefore transient faults on the line are cleared instantaneously which reduces the probability of a transient fault becoming permanent However the scheme can operate for some faults on an adjacent line although this is followed by autoreclosure with correct protection discrimination Increased circuit breaker operations would occur together with transient...

Page 254: ...ote device at IED 2 The local device IED 1 can recognise this by detecting loss of load current in the healthy phases This condition in conjunction with operation of a Zone 2 comparator at IED 1P can be used to trip the local circuit breaker Before an accelerated trip can occur load current must be detected before the fault The loss of load current opens a window during which time a trip occurs if...

Page 255: ...n On Ch1 Fail En On Ch2 Fail En All Ch Fail En Any Ch Fail Aid 1 Chan Fail Aid 2 Chan Fail 1 Any trip Tripping Mode 3 Pole 1 I LoL A I LoL B I LoL C 1 Zone2 AN Element Zone2 BN Element Zone2 CN Element Zone2 AB Element Zone2 BC Element Zone2 CA Element LOL Window 1 18 ms tLOL 317 318 491 522 1365 1366 1367 966 967 968 969 970 971 654 Figure 116 Loss of Load Logic P446SV Chapter 9 Non Aided Schemes...

Page 256: ...Chapter 9 Non Aided Schemes P446SV 224 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 257: ...CHAPTER 10 POWER SWING FUNCTIONS ...

Page 258: ...Chapter 10 Power Swing Functions P446SV 226 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 259: ...otection functions which use Power swing Analysis This chapter contains the following sections Chapter Overview 227 Introduction to Power Swing Blocking 228 Power Swing Blocking 230 Out of Step Protection 241 P446SV Chapter 10 Power Swing Functions P446SV TM EN 1 227 ...

Page 260: ...gy for instigating a controlled system split In this case distance protection should not trip during loss of stability If unstable power swings or Pole Slipping conditions might be expected certain points on the network may be designated as split points where the network should be split if unstable or potentially unstable conditions occur Strategic splitting of the system can be achieved by means ...

Page 261: ...plus becomes a deficit so the sending end generators begin to speed up and the receiving end generators begin to slow down With no losses the system operating point will oscillate around point E on curve 3 but in practise the oscillation is damped and the system eventually settles at operating point E So if Area 1 is less than Area 2 the system will oscillate but will stay in synchronism This swin...

Page 262: ...ween the two DI this indicates that something is happening on that current loop The superimposed current DI is compared with a set threshold set at 5 In to produce a switching signal PH1 This switching signal is used as an input to the power swing blocking function It also triggers the current sample values in the 2 cycle FIFO butter to be stored in memory for further current comparisons Superimpo...

Page 263: ...ector timing for power swing condition Faultinception Faultcleared i t PH1 PH2 t1 t2 t3 t1 D i exceedsthreshold 1 5 In so PH1 and PH2 go high t2 Faultcurrentvalue appearsin 2 cycle buffer Thisequalspresentfaultcurrentvalue so D i isreduced to zero PH1 therefore goeslow PH2 remainshigh because value in PH2 memoryisa stored value t3 Faultiscleared so PH 2 goeslow PH1 staysloweven though there isa ne...

Page 264: ...ent may remain below the minimum 5 In threshold needed for the superimposed current DI detector a different detection method is used This method is called Slow Swing detection This method requires the Slow Swing setting to be enabled Note If the Slow Swing feature is not Enabled very slow power swings 0 5 Hz may not be detected The Slow Swing method is based on changing impedance measurements and ...

Page 265: ...Both Zone 7 and Zone 8 characteristics are based on the positive sequence impedance measurement Z1 V1 I1 The minimum current sensitivity needed for Zone 7 and Zone 8 measurements is 5 In Configuring Slow Swing Detection Slow Swing power swing detection and blocking must first be enabled with the Slow Swing setting After this you need to configure the resistive and impedance reach settings to defin...

Page 266: ...e two cycle ΔI window of the phase selector has expired remains blocked This prevents tripping for a continued swing that may pass through a fast acting zone which could cause spurious tripping if the element was allowed to unblock by an unqualified phase selector reset 3 3 POWER SWING BLOCKING CONFIGURATION To use the Power Swing function you must ensure that the PowerSwing Block setting in the C...

Page 267: ...e current maxima and minima in the swing envelope A typical setting of 0 2s is used to seal in the detection until DI has chance to appear again The WI Trip PSB setting determines what will happen if a power swing is detected whilst the Weak Infeed WI tripping feature is being used and the WI condition is present for longer than the WI Trip Delay time If Blocking is selected the weak infeed operat...

Page 268: ...d blinder angle setting Load B Angle 10 and a circular arc with a radius concentric with and equivalent to 20 greater than the load blinder impedance setting Z Blinder Imp 20 This is clearly indicated with reference to the diagram Note This power swing conditions are completely independent of the slow swing associated with Zone 7 and Zone 8 3 5 POWER SWING BLOCKING LOGIC The Power Swing function f...

Page 269: ...mposed current ΔI component techniques to automatically detect power swings The threshold to detect a power swing is 5 In During power oscillations slower than 0 5Hz the continuous I phase current integral to the detection technique may be less than the 5 In threshold So it may not operate Slow swings usually occur following sudden load changes or single pole tripping on weak systems where the dis...

Page 270: ...qual to R7 and R8 respectively R7 R7 R8 R8 V02750 Zone 8 Zone 7 Resistive forward R Resistive reverse R MaximumLoad jX RxPh Resistive Distance zonesto be blocked onlyphase to phase Figure 124 Setting the resistive reaches 3 6 2 SETTING THE REACTIVE LIMITS The inner Zone 7 should be set in excess of total impedance ZT which include local source impedance ZS line impedance ZL and remote source imped...

Page 271: ...efined in the following figure fnom is the nominal frequency fPS is the maximum Power Swing frequency to be taken into account Since any power swing with fPS 0 5Hz can be detected by the setting free delta current algorithm only power swings with fPS 0 5Hz Hz need to be considered for Slow Power Swing detection We recommended setting fPS to 1Hz because this value provides sufficient security margi...

Page 272: ...V02752 S Z L Z R Z T Z 2 T Z Zone 7 Zone 8 2 q 1 q Figure 126 PSB timer setting guidelines Chapter 10 Power Swing Functions P446SV 240 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 273: ... stable areas so that synchronism is maintained in each area This is called Out of Step tripping OOS or OST As well as tripping for Out of Step conditions it is possible to predict OST conditions This allows controlled tripping and consequent splitting of the system to recover stable operation before pole slipping occurs This is called Predictive Out of Step tripping Predictive OST Out of Step and...

Page 274: ...the positive sequence impedance passes through the inner quadrilateral zone 5 Let us call this time the zone 6 to zone 5 transition time If this time is less than 25 ms the protection considers this to be a power system fault not an Out of Step condition This 25 ms time is fixed and cannot be set During a power system fault the speed of change from a load impedance to a fault impedance is fast but...

Page 275: ... for a separate stand alone Out of Step device This section provides guidance on how to configure Out of Step protection If you are going to use either of the predictive OST options Pred OST Trip or Pred OST Trip you must conduct detailed system studies to determine accurate settings This is because high setting accuracy is needed to avoid premature system splitting in the case of severe power osc...

Page 276: ...curate settings can only be determined by exhaustive system studies The setting Pred OST Trip provides two stages of OST If a power system oscillation is very fast the combination of R the difference between the Zone 5 and Zone 6 resistive reaches and the Delta T settings must be set so that Pred OST Trip operates If the oscillation is slower the condition for the predictive OST is not met and so ...

Page 277: ...R6 max needs to be calculated Referring to the figure below point A must not overlap with the load area for the worst assumed power factor of 0 85 and the lowest possible ZT angle α V02764 Zone 6 Resistive forward R Resistive reverse R α OSTZ6 OSTZ6 OSTR6 OSTR6 jX ZT β 32 O A LOAD Figure 130 OST R6max determination β 32 90 α Z load min OA Where Z load min is the minimum load impedance radius 32º i...

Page 278: ...the Delta T timer Predictive OST setting For the Pred OST Trip setting it is important to Set OST R6 equal to R6max Set OST R5 as close as practical to R6max The aim of pushing the OST R5 setting to the right is to detect fast oscillations as soon as possible in order to gain sufficient time to operate the breaker before the two source voltages are in opposite directions The only restriction is th...

Page 279: ...bypass level is normally set between 2 3In they will not operate during the power oscillations and therefore in the majority of applications they will not make any impact on Out of Step operation In the worst case power oscillations are triggered on fault clearance on a parallel line Approximately twice the load current starts flowing through the remaining circuit This increases further and eventu...

Page 280: ...soperation DR Figure 131 Example of timer reset due to MOVs operation Note If the OST Trip setting is chosen the timer when triggered will eventually expire as the power oscillations progress therefore the MOV operation will not have any impact on Out of Step operation Chapter 10 Power Swing Functions P446SV 248 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 281: ...CHAPTER 11 AUTORECLOSE ...

Page 282: ...Chapter 11 Autoreclose P446SV 250 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 283: ...ibe the operation of this functionality including the principles logic diagrams and applications This chapter contains the following sections Chapter Overview 251 Introduction to Autoreclose 252 Autoreclose Implementation 253 Autoreclose System Map 261 Logic Modules 289 Setting Guidelines 341 P446SV Chapter 11 Autoreclose P446SV TM EN 1 251 ...

Page 284: ... three phase operation with potentially multiple reclosure attempts Autoreclosing provides an important benefit on circuits using time graded protection in that it allows the use of instantaneous protection to provide a high speed first trip With fast tripping the duration of the power arc resulting from an overhead line fault is reduced to a minimum This lessens the chance of damage to the line w...

Page 285: ... in the programmed cycle If all programmed reclose attempts have been made and the circuit breaker does not remain closed the Autoreclose function goes into Lockout whereupon manual intervention is required An Autoreclose cycle can be initiated by operation of an internal or external protection element provided it is mapped correctly and that the circuit breaker is closed when the protection opera...

Page 286: ...breaker before initiating a circuit breaker close command If the signal indicating the health of the circuit breaker is low and remains low for a defined period set in the circuit breaker healthy timer the circuit breaker locks out and stays open If the circuit breaker healthy signal is not mapped in the PSL the DDB signal defaults to high so that Autoreclose may proceed 3 1 2 INHIBIT AUTORECLOSE ...

Page 287: ...e used to initiate the Autoreclose function By default these external trip inputs are mapped to initiate Autoreclose and to initiate breaker failure protection if the functions are enabled These inputs are not mapped to the trip outputs With appropriate mapping in the PSL however the external device can use this product to trip connected circuit breakers 3 2 AUTORECLOSE LOGIC INPUTS This section p...

Page 288: ...y afterwards the circuit breaker will open as indicated by the CB Open signal Opening of the CB clears the fault and the protection resets When this happens the Dead Timer is started and the output remains high until the Dead Time setting expires whereupon it resets and the Autorecloser issues the Auto close command to close the circuit breaker As the fault has been cleared the circuit breaker clo...

Page 289: ...be three phase only until the AR has been successful or until AR has locked out as shown in the figure below V03397 Protection Trip AR in Progress CB Open Dead Time Auto close Reclaim Time Autoreclose Lockout Successful Autoreclose 1 ph 3 ph Figure 134 Autoreclose sequence for an evolving or permanent fault single phase operation 3 4 4 AR TIMING SEQUENCE TRANSIENT FAULT DUAL CB The figure below de...

Page 290: ...he Autorecloser issues the Autoclose command to close CB2 After CB2 has closed as the fault has been cleared both CBs remain closed When the Auto close 2 pulse is removed the Reclaim Timer starts If no further fault is detected before the Reclaim Timer expires the Autoreclose is considered to be successful and this is indicated by the Successful Autoreclose signals 3 4 5 AR TIMING SEQUENCE EVOLVIN...

Page 291: ...g more than one phase This case shows a second fault inception occurring before the Reclaim Time has expired The significant point here is that after the first trip has occurred the Autorecloser forces the 2 CBs into three pole operation and different Dead Timers are used for the single phase cycle compared with the three phase cycle V03400 Protection Trip CB1 CB2 AR 1 ph in Progress CB1 Open 1 ph...

Page 292: ...e performed without checking that the voltages are in synchronism using a setting This setting CB1L SC Shot 1 or CB2L SC Shot 1 can be enabled to perform synch checks on shot 1 for CB1 or CB2 or disabled to not perform the checks Chapter 11 Autoreclose P446SV 260 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 293: ...ilable for mapping in the PSL Internal signals are similar to DDBs but they are self contained within the device s functions and are not user accessible The Autoreclose System Map shows the interconnection of the logic modules that are used in the Autoreclose system The logic diagrams follow a convention for the elements used using defined colours and shapes A key to this convention is provided be...

Page 294: ...sing Quantity Hardcoded setting RD Q S Comparator for detecting undervalues Switch MeasurementCell Derived setting SRLatch HMIkey Pulse Latch Connection Node Inverted logicinput Softswitch Latched on positive edge X Multiplier 2 1 NOTgate XOR XORgate R Q S Internal Calculation Switch Bandpassfilter Figure 138 Key to logic diagrams Chapter 11 Autoreclose P446SV 262 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 295: ... Unhealthy ARIP Leader CB 2 CB2 Close Fail AR CB2 Unhealthy ResetL F PrefLCB1 CB2 NoAR CB1 NoAR CB1 ARIP PrefLCB2 CB2 ARIP AR In Service AR Enable CB1 CB1 In Service CB1 AR Lockout BARCB1 SetLCB1 FollSPAROK Foll3PAROK CB2LFRC AR Enable CB2 CB2 In Service CB2 AR Lockout BARCB2 SetLCB2 CB1LFRC CB1LFRC CB2LFRC SetLCB1 SetLCB2 CB1 NoAR Leader CB 1 Follower CB1 CB2 NoAR Leader CB 2 Follower CB2 AR In S...

Page 296: ...1 Trip OutputA CB1 Trip OutputB CB1 Trip OutputC CB1 Ext Trip A CB1 Ext Trip B CB1 Ext Trip C CB1 Ext Trip3ph ARIP TARAny CB1 Trip AR MemA CB1 Trip AR MemB CB1 Trip AR MemC NUM CBs CB2TARA CB2TARB CB2TARC CB2 Trip AR MemA CB2 Trip AR MemB CB2 Trip AR MemC TAR2 3PH TARAny TARA TARB TARC ResPRMem CB1 Trip AR MemA CB1 Trip AR MemB CB1 Trip AR MemC TMemAny TMEM1Ph TMEM2 3Ph TMEM3Ph Module 14 CB2 1 pol...

Page 297: ... ARIP CB2LARIP CB2FARIP ARIP AR Start Seq Counter 0 Seq Counter 4 Seq Counter 2 Seq Counter 3 Seq Counter 4 Seq Counter Set SCIncrement ProtRe_Op Single Pole Shot Three Pole Shot Seq Counter 1 LastShot 1P Dtime Seq Counter 1 Module 18 Sequence Counter CB2 AR Init ProtRe_Op CB1 AR Init Module 19 1 phase AR Cycle Selection CB1LARIP CB1LSPAROK TMEM1Ph CB1L3PAR CB2L3PAR ResetL F ARIP CB2LARIP CB2LSPAR...

Page 298: ...rot AR Start CB1OP2 3P CB2OP2 3P 1 Pole Dead Time Module 25 3 phase AR Dead Time CB1L3PAR DTOK CB1L 3P 3PDTCOMP DTOK All OK Time 3P CB2L3PAR DTOK CB2L 3P AR Start 3PDTCOMP Seq Counter 1 Seq Counter 2 Seq Counter 3 Seq Counter 4 3P AR DT Shot1 3P DTime1 3P AR DT Shot2 3P AR DT Shot3 3P AR DT Shot4 3P DTime2 3P DTime3 3P DTime4 3P Dead Time IP CB13PDTComp CB23PDTComp CB1 3P DTime CB2 3P DTime Module...

Page 299: ...1F SCOK CB13PFTComp SetCB1SPCl SetCB13PCl Module 35 Reclaim Time Auto Close CB1 Dynamic F L SetCB1SPCl CB2FARIP SetCB2SPCl SetCB23PCl CB1LARIP Auto Close CB2 CB1FARIP SetCB13PCl CB2LARIP CB2LFRC CB1LFRC LeaderSPAR 1P Reclaim Time 3P Reclaim Time ProtRe_Op CB1 Closed 3 ph CB1 ARIP CB2 Closed 3 ph CB2 ARIP Close Pulse Time SPAR ReclaimTime 3PAR ReclaimTime 1P Reclaim TComp 3P Reclaim TComp 1P Reclai...

Page 300: ...me Man Close Delay CB Healthy Time Check Sync Time CB1 Close Fail Control CloseCB1 CB1 Close inProg CB1 Trip Fail Control TripCB1 ManCB1 Unhealthy NoCS CB1ManClose Module 37 38 AR Reset Successful AROK Reset Time CB1ARSucc CB1OPAny AR Start Res AROK by UI Res AROK by NoAR Res AROK by Tdly Reset AROK Ind ARDisabled Num CBs Res AROK by Ext Ext Rst CB1 AROK ResCB1ARSucc CB2ARSucc CB2OPAny Ext Rst CB2...

Page 301: ... CB2 Close inProg CB2 Trip Fail Control TripCB2 ManCB2 Unhealthy NoCS CB2ManClose Module 46 3 Phase AR System Check Leader CB2 CB2 Fast SCOK CB2L SCOK CB2L SC ClsNoDly CB2L SC CS1 CB2L SC CS2 CB2 CS1 OK CB2L SC DLLB CB2L SC LLDB CB2L SC Shot1 CB2L SC all CB2 CS2 OK Dead Line Live Bus 2 Live Line Seq Counter 1 CB2L SC DLDB Dead Bus2 Dead Line CB2 Ext CS OK Module 47 3 Phase AR System Check Follower...

Page 302: ...PAny CB1 ARIP Block CB1 AR AR CB1 Unhealthy AR CB1 No C S Evolve 3Ph ProtRe_Op LastShot EvolveLock ProtARBlock CB1 In Service TMEM2 3Ph CB1L3PAROK CB1F3PAROK TMEM1Ph CB1LSPAROK CB1FSPAROK Seq Counter Set CB1 Status Alm CB1LARIP CB1FARIP Set CB1 Close Set CB2 Close CB2OPAny Num CBs CB2 In Service CB2 Fail Pr Trip Invalid_AR_Mode CB1 AR Init DeadLineLockout AR In Service ResCB1Lo BARCB1 CB1 AR Locko...

Page 303: ...ock CB1 In Service TMEM2 3Ph CB2L3PAROK CB2F3PAROK TMEM1Ph CB2LSPAROK CB2FSPAROK Seq Counter Set CB2 Status Alm CB2LARIP CB2FARIP Set CB1 Close Set CB2 Close CB2OPAny Num CBs CB2 In Service CB2 Fail Pr Trip Invalid_AR_Mode CB2 AR Init DeadLineLockout AR In Service ResCB2Lo BARCB2 CB2 AR Lockout Trip Pulse Time Module 57 58 Reset CB Lockout ResCB1Lo Rst CB1 Lockout Res LO by CB IS CB1CRLo Res LO by...

Page 304: ...Trip OutputC CB1 Trip 3ph CB2 Trip OutputA CB2 Trip OutputB CB2 Trip OutputC CB2 Trip 3ph Any Trip 2 3 Ph Fault 3 Ph Fault Module 61 Check Sync Signals CB2 VTS Fast Block F out of Range Sys checks CB2 CB2 CS1 Status CB2 CS1 Enabled CB2 CS2 Status CB2 CS2 Enabled MCB VTS MCB VTS CB2 CS VAN VBN VCN VAB VBC VCA VBus1 CB2 CS1 SlipF CB2 CS1 OK CB2 CS2 OK CB2 CS1 SlipF CB2 CS2 SlipF CS Vbus2 CB2 CS2 Sli...

Page 305: ...is OK for single phase autoreclosure either as leader or follower CB1CRLo CB In Service 4 Reset CB Lockout 57 Reset CB1 lockout CB1F3PAR 3 phase AR cycle selection 21 Follower 3 phase CB AR Time 29 CB Autoclose 32 Three phase Autoreclose is active for CB1 as follower CB1F3PAROK AR Modes Enable 9 CB1 AR In Progress 16 3 phase AR cycle selection 21 Autoreclose Lockout 55 CB1 is OK to perform three p...

Page 306: ...llower CB2LARIP CB2 AR In Progress 17 1 phase AR Cycle Selection 19 3 phase AR cycle selection 21 Reclaim Time 35 Autoreclose is in progress for CB2 as leader CB2OP1P CB Open 3 Dead Time Start Enable 22 Follower 1 phase CB AR Time 28 CB2 is open on 1 phase CB2OP2 3P CB Open 3 CB2 AR In Progress 17 3 phase AR cycle selection 21 Follower 1 phase CB AR Time 28 1 phase AR Dead Time 24 CB2 is open on 2...

Page 307: ...9 1 phase AR Dead Time 24 Single phase Autoreclose is in progress for CB2 as leader CB2LSPAROK AR Modes Enable 9 AR Modes Enable 9 1 phase AR Cycle Selection 19 3 phase AR cycle selection 21 CB2 is OK to perform single phase Autoreclose as leader CB2SPDTComp 1 phase AR Dead Time 24 CB2 single phase dead time is complete CB2SPFTComp Follower 1 phase CB AR Time 28 CB2 single phase follower time is c...

Page 308: ...nals 36 Successful AR Signals 36 AR Reset Successful 37 Reset the indication of successful Autoreclose for CB1 ResCB1Lo Reset CB Lockout 57 Autoreclose Lockout 55 Reset the indication of lockout for CB1 ResCB2ARSucc Reset the indication of successful Autoreclose for CB2 ResCB2Lo Reset the indication of lockout for CB2 ResetL F Evolving Fault 20 Leader Follower 7 1 phase AR Cycle Selection 19 Used ...

Page 309: ...n the CB control and Autoreclose logic system DDB Signal Name DDB Signal Number Source Module Module Number Destination Module Module Number 1P DTime 1554 1 phase AR Dead Time 24 Sequence Counter 18 Evolving Fault 20 1P Follower Time 1446 Follower 1 phase CB AR Time 28 1P Reclaim TComp 1568 Reclaim Time 35 Successful AR Signals 36 1P Reclaim Time 1567 Reclaim Time 35 Reclaim Time 35 1PF TComp 1561...

Page 310: ...lose Lockout 56 Leader Follower Logic 7 AR Mode 1P 1497 AR Modes Enable 9 AR Mode 3P 1498 AR Modes Enable 9 AR OFF Pulse 1383 AR Enable 5 AR On Pulse 1382 AR Enable 5 AR Start 1541 CB1 AR In Progress 16 Fault Memory 15 CB1 AR In Progress 16 CB2 AR In Progress 17 Sequence Counter 18 Dead Time Start Enable 22 1 phase AR Dead Time 24 3 phase AR Dead Time 25 Follower CB AR Enable 27 Follower 1 phase C...

Page 311: ...7 CB1 Autoclose 32 CB Healthy and System Check Timers 39 AR Shot Counters 41 Reset CB Lockout 57 Pole Discrepancy 62 Leader Follower Logic 7 CB2 Autoreclose Lockout 56 CB1 ARIP 1544 CB1 AR In Progress 16 CB In Service 4 Force 3 phase Trip 10 Evolving Fault 20 CB1 Autoclose 32 CB1 AR In Progress 16 Reclaim Time 35 AR Shot Counters 41 CB Control 43 Autoreclose Lockout 55 Leader Follower Logic 7 CB1A...

Page 312: ...K 883 Check Sync Signals 60 3 Phase AR System Check 45 CB Manual Close System Check 51 CB1 CS1 SlipF 1579 Check Sync Signals 60 CB1 CS1 SlipF 1578 Check Sync Signals 60 CB1 CS1 VL VB 1588 Check Sync Signals 60 CB1 CS1 VL VB 1586 Check Sync Signals 60 CB1 CS2 AngHigh 1496 Check Sync Signals 60 CB1 CS2 AngHigh 1495 Check Sync Signals 60 CB1 CS2 Enabled 882 Check Sync Signals 60 CB1 CS2 FL FB 1494 Ch...

Page 313: ...llower Logic 8 Leader Follower Logic 7 CB1 AR In Progress 16 Leader Follower Logic 7 CB1 Open 3 ph 903 CB State Monitor 1 CB Open 3 Dead Time Start Enable 22 Follower 3 phase CB AR Time 29 CB1 Autoclose 32 CB Control 43 CB Trip Time Monitor 53 CB1 Open A ph 904 CB State Monitor 1 CB Open 3 CB Control 43 Pole Discrepancy CB1 Open B ph 905 CB State Monitor 1 CB Open 3 CB Control 43 Pole Discrepancy ...

Page 314: ...CB In Service 4 Leader Follower Logic 8 Force 3 phase Trip 10 Evolving Fault 20 Follower CB AR Enable 27 CB2 Autoclose 33 CB2 Healthy and System Check Timers 40 CB2 AR Shot Counters 42 Reset CB2 Lockout 58 Pole Discrepancy 62 Leader Follower Logic 7 Autoreclose Lockout 55 CB2 ARIP 1435 CB2 AR In Progress 17 CB In Service 4 Force 3 phase Trip 10 Evolving Fault 20 CB2 Autoclose 33 CB1 AR In Progress...

Page 315: ...R System Check Leader CB2 46 3 Phase AR System Check Follower CB2 48 CB2 Manual Close System Check 52 CB2 CS1 SlipF 1467 CB2 Check Sync Signals 61 CB2 CS1 SlipF 1466 CB2 Check Sync Signals 61 CB2 CS1 VL VB 1472 CB2 Check Sync Signals 61 CB2 CS1 VL VB 1470 CB2 Check Sync Signals 61 CB2 CS2 AngHigh 1481 CB2 Check Sync Signals 61 CB2 CS2 AngHigh 1480 CB2 Check Sync Signals 61 CB2 CS2 Enabled 1427 CB2...

Page 316: ...out 56 Leader Follower Logic 7 CB2 Lead 1408 Leader Follower CB Selection 6 CB2 LO Alarm 1599 CB2 AR In Progress 17 Pole Discrepancy 62 CB2 Man SCOK 1458 CB2 Manual Close System Check 52 CB Control 44 CB2 NoAR 1429 Leader Follower Logic 8 Leader Follower Logic 7 CB2 AR In Progress 17 Leader Follower Logic 7 CB2 Open 3 ph 911 CB2 State Monitor 2 CB Open 3 Dead Time Start Enable 22 Follower 3 phase ...

Page 317: ...gnals 61 CS VBus2 1584 CB2 Check Sync Signals 61 CS VLine 1580 Check Sync Signals 60 CS VLine 1581 Check Sync Signals 60 Dead Bus 1 887 System Checks Voltage Monitor 59 3 Phase AR System Check 45 CB Manual Close System Check 51 Dead Bus 2 1462 System Checks Voltage Monitor 59 3 Phase AR System Check CB2 46 CB2 Manual Close System Check 52 Dead Line 889 System Checks Voltage Monitor 59 Dead Time St...

Page 318: ... Progress 16 CB2 AR In Progress 17 Inhibit DB1 1525 System Checks Voltage Monitor 59 Inhibit DB2 1425 System Checks Voltage Monitor 59 Inhibit DL 1523 System Checks Voltage Monitor 59 Inhibit LB1 1524 System Checks Voltage Monitor 59 Inhibit LB2 1424 System Checks Voltage Monitor 59 Inhibit LL 1522 System Checks Voltage Monitor 59 Init 3P AR Test 1507 Trip Test 12 Init APh AR Test 1504 Trip Test 1...

Page 319: ...nitor 59 CB2 Check Sync Signals 61 NoCS CB1ManClose 305 CB Control 43 NoCS CB2ManClose 327 CB Control 44 OK Time 3P 1555 3 phase AR Dead Time 25 Dead Time Start Enable 22 CB1 Autoclose 32 CB2 Autoclose 33 Prepare Reclaim Initiation 34 CB1 Healthy and System Check Timers 39 CB2 Healthy and System Check Timers 40 Pole Dead A 892 CB Trip Conversion 63 Pole Dead B 893 CB Trip Conversion 63 Pole Dead C...

Page 320: ...CB2 AR Shot Counters 42 Seq Counter 4 850 Sequence Counter 18 Force 3 phase Trip 10 3 phase AR Dead Time 25 AR Shot Counters 41 CB2 AR Shot Counters 42 Seq Counter 4 851 Sequence Counter 18 Seq Counter Set 1546 Sequence Counter 18 Autoreclose Lockout 55 CB2 Autoreclose Lockout 56 Set CB1 Close 1565 CB1 Autoclose 32 CB1 AR In Progress 16 Prepare Reclaim Initiation 34 AR Shot Counters 41 Autoreclose...

Page 321: ...y use some inputs are produce outputs that are used by the Autoreclose system These diagrams are shown in this section for the sake of completeness 5 1 CIRCUIT BREAKER STATUS MONITOR The Circuit Breaker State Monitor logic is part of the Monitoring and Control functionality and is fully described in that chapter The logic diagram is repeated in this section because some of the outputs of this logi...

Page 322: ... pole 52B 1 pole 52A 52B 1 pole Phase B Same logicasphase A Phase C Same logicasphase A 1 CB1 Closed A ph 1 CB1 Open A ph 1 CB1 Closed B ph 1 CB1 Open B ph 1 CB1 Closed C ph 1 CB1 Open C ph CB1 Status Alm 1 CB1 Status Time 420 424 421 425 422 426 423 427 907 903 908 904 909 905 910 906 301 Figure 149 CB State logic diagram Module 1 5 2 CIRCUIT BREAKER OPEN LOGIC The Circuit Breaker Open logic modu...

Page 323: ...breaker is considered to be in service if it has been closed for more than the CB IS Time setting For applications with fast acting circuit breaker auxiliary switches a time delay setting CB IS Memory Time is provided This is used to ensure correct operation if a delay between the circuit breaker tripping and recognition by the protection is expected When an Autoreclose cycle starts the in service...

Page 324: ... programming a function key on the HMI if applicable using IEC 60870 5 103 communications Further validation signals are also required to switch on Autoreclose These are the DDB signals AR Enable CB1 and AR Enable CB2 Once Autoreclose is in service the AR In Service DDB signal is asserted and the AR Status cell in the CB CONTROL column is set accordingly 5 4 1 AUTORECLOSE ENABLE LOGIC DIAGRAM V033...

Page 325: ...Menu Pref LCB1 Select Leader CB1 CB2 Pref LCB2 1 1 CB2 Lead Leader Select By Opto Leader Select By Control CB2 Lead Set Num CBs CB1 Only Both CB1 CB2 CB2 Only 1408 Figure 153 Leader Follower CB Selection Logic Diagram Module 6 P446SV Chapter 11 Autoreclose P446SV TM EN 1 293 ...

Page 326: ...CB1 Foll SPAROK Foll 3 PAROK Leader CB2 CB2 LFRC CB1 NoAR 1 R Q S Reset L F 1 Leader CB1 1 1 Follower CB1 0 1s AR in Service AR Enable CB2 CB2 in Service CB2 AR Lockout BAR CB2 ARIP Set LCB2 Foll SPAROK Foll 3 PAROK Leader CB1 CB1 LFRC CB2 NoAR 1 R Q S Reset L F 1 Leader CB2 1 1 Follower CB2 0 1s 0 1 0 0 1 0 1530 303 307 1542 1431 325 329 1542 1429 1544 1528 1435 1385 1609 1526 306 1542 1431 1385 ...

Page 327: ...a multi phase fault the logic triggers a three phase trip and goes to lockout Three phase Autoreclose Only During three phase Autoreclose for any fault the three phase dead timers 3P AR DT Shot 1 3P AR DT Shot 2 3P AR DT Shot 3 and 3P AR DT Shot 4 are started and the DDB signal is CB1 AR 3p InProg is asserted which indicates that three phase Autoreclose is in progress If three phase only Autoreclo...

Page 328: ... PSL AREnable CB1 and AREnable CB 2 defaultto high When Leader Follower ARmode is setvia opto inputs there are 7 invalid combinations Thislogic detectsthese combinationsand on a trip forcesboth CB 1 and CB2 to lockout 1P 3P 1P 3P 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 CB1L3PAROK CB2L3PAROK CB1LSPAROK CB2LSPAROK V03310 Seq Counter 0 Seq Counter 1 AR Enable CB1 1 Foll CB1 CB2L SPARO...

Page 329: ...r 3 Seq Counter 4 CB1 AR Lockout AR CB1 Unhealthy Inhibit AR AR Force CB1 3P 1 CB1 F SPAROK CB1 ARIP TARANY 1 1 CB2Tripping Mode 3 Pole 1 and 3 pole Leader CB2 AR In Service NUM CBs CB1 Only CB2 Only Both CB1 CB2 1 1 CB21 L SPAROK Seq Counter 1 Seq Counter 2 Seq Counter 3 Seq Counter 4 CB2 AR Lockout AR CB2 Unhealthy Inhibit AR AR Force CB2 3P 1 CB2 F SPAROK CB2 ARIP TARANY 1 1 CB1Tripping Mode 3 ...

Page 330: ... different device can be used to initiate Autoreclose via PSL By default these external trip input signals are mapped to initiate Autoreclose These inputs are not mapped to the trip outputs With appropriate mapping in the PSL however the external device can use this product to trip connected circuit breakers Evolving Fault Combinations The Autoreclose function would normally be initiated by a sing...

Page 331: ...7 866 865 864 Figure 157 Autoreclose Initiation logic diagram Module 11 5 8 2 AUTORECLOSE TRIP TEST LOGIC DIAGRAM V03304 Init APh AR Test Init 3P AR Test Init CPh AR Test Init BPh AR Test AR Trip Test A AR Trip Test3Ph AR Trip Test C AR Trip Test B Test Autoreclose Trip3 Pole Trip Pole A No Operation Trip Pole C Trip Pole B 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1504 1505 1506 1507 577 578 579 576 Figure 158 Autoreclose T...

Page 332: ...S 1 CB1 Trip AR MemA CB1 Trip AR MemB CB1 Trip AR MemC TMEMANY TMEM1Ph TMEM2 3Ph TMEM3Ph 1 2 1 Num CBs CB1 only CB2 only Both CB1 CB2 1 CB2 TARA CB2 TARB CB2 TARC 1 CB2 Trip AR MemA CB2 Trip AR MemB CB2 Trip AR MemC 1 1 523 535 524 536 525 537 534 1542 1499 1500 1501 1535 1536 1537 1535 1536 1537 Figure 159 Autoreclose initiation by internal single and three phase trip or external trip for CB1 Mod...

Page 333: ...Init AR 1 1 1 2 R Q S CB2 Trip AR MemB R Q S CB2 Trip AR MemC CB2 TMEM1Ph CB2 TMEM2 3Ph CB2 TMEM3Ph 1 2 Num CBs CB1 only CB2 only Both CB1 CB2 1 CB2 Trip AR MemA CB2 Trip AR MemB CB2 Trip AR MemC Figure 160 Autoreclose initiation by internal single and three phase trip or external trip for CB2 Module 14 Note For single phase Autoreclose these signals must be mapped as shown in the default PSL sche...

Page 334: ...28 907 1544 915 1544 576 1550 1441 Figure 161 Protection Reoperation and Evolving Fault logic diagram Module 20 5 8 6 FAULT MEMORY LOGIC DIAGRAM V03320 RESPRMEM Trip Inputs A Ext Fault APh FLTMEM 2P FLTMEM 3P AR Start Trip Inputs B Trip Inputs C Ext Fault BPh Ext Fault CPh 1 1 1 R Q S R Q S R Q S 2 Figure 162 Fault Memory logic diagram Module 15 5 9 AUTORECLOSE IN PROGRESS The AR In Progress modul...

Page 335: ...p3ph AR Start CB1 OpAny 1 1 TMEM2 3Ph AR Start 0 02 0 1 Set CB1 Close CB1 Closed 3 ph TMEM1Ph CB1 Op2 3P 1 CB1L3 PAROK CB1F3 PAROK 1 Inhibit AR CB1 LO Alarm 1 CB1 NoAR CB1 ARSUCC CBARCancel R Q S CB1 AR Init CB1 ARIP ARIP 1 CB1 LARIP CB1 FARIP Leader CB1 Follower CB1 CB2 ARIP 1 Figure 163 Autoreclose In Progress logic diagram for CB1 Module 16 P446SV Chapter 11 Autoreclose P446SV TM EN 1 303 ...

Page 336: ... initiation the sequence counter is incremented The counter provides output signals indicating how many initiation events have occurred in any Autoreclose cycle These signals are available as user indications and are used in the logic to select the appropriate dead times or for a persistent fault force a lockout It is possible to skip the first Autoreclose attempt by enabling the AR Skip Shot 1 se...

Page 337: ...ot Sequence Counter Seq Counter 1 LastShot Increment on rising edge Reset on falling edge S R Q 1P Dtime Seq Counter 1 1 CB1 AR Init Figure 165 Autoreclose Sequence Counter logic diagram Module 18 5 11 AUTORECLOSE CYCLE SELECTION The Autoreclose cycle selection logic is responsible for determining whether the Autoreclose will start as single phase or three phase P446SV Chapter 11 Autoreclose P446S...

Page 338: ...LeaderSPAR R Q S 1 CB2 L ARIP CB2 L SPAROK CB2 TMEM1PH CB2 L 3 PAR 1 CB2 L SPAR R Q S CB1F ARIP CB1F SPAROK TMEM1PH 1 R Q S CB2L SPAR CB1F SPAR CB1F 3PAR CB2L 3PAR CB2F ARIP CB2F SPAROK CB2 TMEM1PH 1 R Q S CB1L SPAR CB2F 3PAR CB1L 3PAR CB2F SPAR 1 CB2 AR 1p InProg 1 Figure 166 Single phase Autoreclose Cycle Selection logic diagram Module 19 Chapter 11 Autoreclose P446SV 306 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 339: ... sources Three settings are involved in controlling the dead time start DT Start by Prot 3PDTStart WhenLD DTStart by CB Op The DT Start by Prot determines how the protection action will initiate a dead time The setting is always visible and has three options Protection Reset Protection Op protection operation and Disable which should be selected if you don t want protection action to start the dea...

Page 340: ...by Prot Protection Reset Protection Op Disable 1 DTOK All AR Start R Q S 1 OKTimeSP OK Time 3P ARIP 1 CB1 AR Init CB2 AR Init 0 02 0 R Q S 0 t Dead Line DeadLineLockout 1 3PDTStart WhenLD Enabled Disabled 1 1 Protection Reset DT Start by Prot Disable CB1 AR 1p InProg CB2 AR 1p InProg Enabled DTStart by CB Op Disabled 1 CB1OP1P CB2OPAny CB1 Open 3 ph CB2 Open 3 ph CB2OP1P CB1OPAny CB1 Open 3 ph CB2...

Page 341: ...LSPAR DTOK CB2L 1P DTOK All 1 R Q S OKTimeSP DT Start by Prot Protection Reset AR Start 1 CB1LSPAR CB2LSPAR 1 CB1OP2 3P CB2OP2 3P 0 t CB1LSPAR CB2LSPAR Logic 1 Logic 1 1 1 Pole Dead Time CB1SPDTCOMP CB2SPDTCOMP 1 Figure 169 Single phase Leader Dead Time logic diagram Module 24 P446SV Chapter 11 Autoreclose P446SV TM EN 1 309 ...

Page 342: ... 1 Logic 1 3PDTCOMP Seq Counter 1 Seq Counter 2 Seq Counter 3 Seq Counter 4 0 t 3P AR DT Shot 1 3P DTime1 3P AR DT Shot 2 3P AR DT Shot 3 3P AR DT Shot 4 0 t 0 t 0 t 3P DTime2 3P DTime3 3P DTime4 1 1 3P Dead Time IP 3PDTCOMP CB1L3PAR CB2L3PAR CB13PDTCOMP CB23PDTCOMP CB1 3P DTime CB2 3P DTime Figure 170 Three phase Leader CB Dead Time logic diagram Module 25 Chapter 11 Autoreclose P446SV 310 P446SV...

Page 343: ...sed 3 ph CB2 Close Fail AR Start 1 1 En CB2 Follower 1 Logic 1 Logic 1 1 CB1F SPAR CB2 AR Lockout CB1F 3PAR CB2 Closed 3 ph RD Q S BF if LFail Cls Disabled CB2F SPAR Control CloseCB 2 CB2F 3PAR CB1 Closed 3 ph CB1 Close Fail AR Start 1 1 En CB1 Follower 1 Logic 1 Logic 1 1 Figure 171 Follower Enable logic diagram Module 27 P446SV Chapter 11 Autoreclose P446SV TM EN 1 311 ...

Page 344: ...AR Start 1 1 R Q S CB1SPFTCOMP CB2SPFTCOMP 1 Dynamic F L Enabled 1PF TComp 1PF TComp 1 CB1OP1P CB1FSPAR CB2OP1P CB2FSPAR En CB2 Follower Seq Counter 1 1 1 CB1FSPAR CB2FSPAR CB1OP2 3P CB2OP2 3P 0 t Follower Time Figure 172 Single phase Follower CB timing logic diagram Module 28 Chapter 11 Autoreclose P446SV 312 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 345: ...rol scheme Before a circuit breaker can be closed it must be healthy sufficient energy to close and if necessary re trip and it must not be in a lockout condition For three phase Autoreclose the circuit breaker must be open on all three phases and the appropriate system check conditions must be met For single phase Autoreclose the circuit breaker must be open on that phase The Autoclose command is...

Page 346: ...t SCOK CB2L SCOK OK Time 3P 1 1 CB2FSPAR CB2SPFTComp CB2F3PAR CB2F SCOK CB23PFTComp R Q S Set CB2 Close Auto Close CB2 CB2 Control ARIP CB2 ARIP CB2 Closed 3 ph CB2 AR Lockout ProtRe_Op 1 If the DDB signal CB2 Healthy is not mapped in PSL it defaults to High 522 306 436 903 1573 1572 1555 1491 306 1542 1544 907 522 328 437 911 1455 1454 1555 1456 328 1542 1435 915 1562 854 1566 1449 1448 1450 Figu...

Page 347: ...ed all the signals can be reset by user interface command Reset AROK Ind from the CB CONTROL menu If Res AROK by NoAR is set to Enabled the signals for each circuit breaker can be reset by temporarily generating an Autoreclose disabled signal according to the logic shown If Res AROK by Ext is set to Enabled the signals can be reset by activation of an external input signal appropriately mapped in ...

Page 348: ...T récup 1P term Logique 1 1 0 t T récup réenc 3P T récup 3P term Logique 1 Réenc DJ1 SETCB13PCL CB2FARIP SETCB23PCL CB1LARIP Réenc DJ2 SETCB2SPCL CB1FARIP SETCB13PCL CB2LARIP Tempo récup 1P Tempo récup 3P Tempo récup 1P Tempo récup 3P Prot Re op DJ1 fermé 3 ph RÉENC EN CRS DJ1 DJ fermé 3 ph RÉENC EN CRS DJ2 1 0 t Durée ordre enc CBARCancel 1 1 1 854 1448 854 1448 1567 1569 907 1544 915 1435 1568 1...

Page 349: ... 3 ph CB1OP2 3P 1 RD Q S 0 02S 0 1 3P Reclaim TComp R Q S SetCB2SPCl 1P Reclaim TComp CB2 Closed 3 ph CB2OP1P ResCB2ARSucc 1 RD Q S CB2 Succ 1P AR 1 CB2ARSucc 0 02S 0 1 CB2 Succ 3P AR 3P Reclaim TComp R Q S SetCB23PCl 1P Reclaim TComp CB2 Closed 3 ph CB2OP2 3P 1 RD Q S 0 02S 0 1 1570 1568 907 1570 1568 907 1570 1568 915 1570 1568 915 1571 852 1451 1452 Figure 177 Successful Autoreclose Signals log...

Page 350: ... not satisfied for example required line bus voltage conditions when the scheme is ready to close the circuit breaker At the completion of a dead time the logic starts an Autoreclose healthy timer If a circuit breaker healthy signal becomes high before the Autoreclose healthy time is complete the timer stops and if all other relevant circuit breaker closing conditions are satisfied the scheme issu...

Page 351: ...omp CB23PDTComp CB23PFTComp 1 1 AR CB2 Unhealthy CB Healthy Time CB2 AR Lockout CB2 Closed 3 Ph 1 CB2 Healthy CB23PDTComp CB2 Closed 3 Ph CB2 AR Lockout 1 RD Q S 0 t 1 AR CB2 No C S 1 CB2F SCOK CB23PFTComp CB2 Closed 3 Ph CB2 AR Lockout 1 RD Q S Check Sync Time Note If the DDB signal CB2 Healthy is not mapped in PSL it defaults to High Note If the DDB signal CB1 Healthy is not mapped in PSL it def...

Page 352: ...er of Autoreclose attempts Number of successful 1st shot single phase Autoreclose sequences Number of successful 1st shot three phase Autoreclose sequences Number of successful 2nd shot three phase Autoreclose sequences Number of successful 3rd shot three phase Autoreclose sequences Number of successful 4th shot three phase Autoreclose sequences Number of failed Autoreclose cycles which forced a c...

Page 353: ...R Lockout Ext Rst CB1Shots Seq Counter 1 Set CB2 Close CB2 Succ 1P AR CB2 Succ 3P AR Seq Counter 2 Seq Counter 3 Seq Counter 4 CB2 Total Shots Counter Increment Reset CB2 Successful SPAR Shot 1 Counter Increment Reset CB2 Successful 3PAR Shot 1 Counter Increment Reset CB2 Successful 3PAR Shot 2 Counter Increment Reset CB2 Successful 3PAR Shot 3 Counter Increment Reset CB2 Successful 3PAR Shot 1 Co...

Page 354: ...y NoCS CB1ManClose CB1 Man SCOK CB1 Ext Trip A CB1 Ext Trip B CB1 Ext Trip C CB1 Open A ph CB1 Open B ph CB1 Open C ph CB1 Closed A ph CB1 Closed B ph CB1 Closed C ph 1 1 Note If the DDB signal CB1 Healthy or CB2 Healthy is not mapped in PSL it defaults to High 1 RD Q S 0 t 1 RD Q S 0 t 1 RD Q S 0 t 1 1 1 1 0 t 0 t Trip Pulse Time Close Pulse Time Man Close Delay CB Healthy Time Check Sync Time 43...

Page 355: ...ot mapped in PSL it defaults to High 441 442 1435 1448 1419 522 840 538 539 540 541 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 437 1458 840 324 1453 841 325 326 327 Figure 182 CB2 Control Logic Module 44 5 18 CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIP TIME MONITORING The circuit breaker trip time monitoring logic checks for correct circuit breaker tripping following the issue of a protection trip signal When the protection trip s...

Page 356: ...1 Open 3 Ph RD Q S RD Q S 1 RD Q S 0 t Trip Pulse Time TAR2 3Ph TARA TMEM2 3Ph CB2 Closed 3 Ph CB2 Open 3 Ph CB2 Closed 3 Ph CB2 Open 3 Ph RD Q S RD Q S 1 CB2 Fail Pr Trip 1 0 t RD Q S 1 Trip Pulse Time TARB TMEM2 3Ph CB2 Closed 3 Ph CB2 Open 3 Ph RD Q S RD Q S 1 TARC TMEM2 3Ph CB2 Closed 3 Ph CB2 Open 3 Ph RD Q S RD Q S 1 903 907 903 907 903 907 903 907 911 915 911 915 911 915 911 915 1575 1459 F...

Page 357: ... close If a circuit breaker fails to close Autoreclose is blocked and forced to lockout Circuit breaker remains open at the end of the reclaim time An Autoreclose lockout is forced if the circuit breaker is open at the end of the reclaim time Circuit breaker fails to close when the close command is issued Circuit breaker fails to trip correctly Three phase dead time started by line dead violation ...

Page 358: ...3Ph CB1L3 PAROK CB1F3 PAROK CB1 In Service TMEM1Ph CB1 LSPAROK CB1 FSPAROK Seq Counter Set CB1 Status Alm CB1 LARIP CB1 FARIP Set CB1 Close Set CB2 Close CB2OpAny Num CBs Both CB1 CB2 CB1 In Service CB2 In Service CB2 Fail Pr Trip InvalidAR Mode CB1 AR Init CB1 ARIP DeadLineLockout 1 BAR 2 and 3 ph R Q S 1 1 0 02s 0 0 02s 0 1 0 t Trip Pulse Time 1 1 BARCB1 AR In Service Num CBs Both CB1 CB2 CB1 On...

Page 359: ...ce CB1 Fail Pr Trip Invalid_AR_Mode CB2 AR Init CB2 ARIP DeadLineLockout 1 BAR 2 and 3 ph R Q S 1 1 0 02s 0 0 02s 0 1 0 t Trip Pulse Time 1 1 BARCB2 AR In Service Num CBs Both CB1 CB2 CB1 Only 1 R Q S ResCB2Lo CB2 AR Lockout 325 306 1459 1435 1421 329 330 1547 1435 1428 1428 1546 323 1449 1565 1526 1428 1575 1434 1435 1385 328 Figure 185 CB2 Lockout Logic Diagram Module 56 5 20 RESET CIRCUIT BREAK...

Page 360: ... successfully closed manually For this the circuit breaker must remain closed long enough so that it enters the In Service state If Res LO by UI is set to Enabled the circuit breaker lockout can be reset from a user interface using the reset circuit breaker lockout command in the CB CONTROL column If Res LO by NoAR is set to Enabled the circuit breaker lockout can be reset by temporarily generatin...

Page 361: ...Enabled 1 Num CBs CB2 Only Res LO by ExtDDB Enabled CB2 AR Lockout Res LO by TDelay Enabled 0 t LO Reset Time 1 ResCB2Lo 446 306 1422 328 Figure 186 Reset Circuit Breaker Lockout Logic Diagram Modules 57 58 5 21 POLE DISCREPANCY In a three pole CB certain combinations of poles open and closed are indicative of a problem The Pole Discrepancy Logic combines an indication of a Pole Discrepancy condit...

Page 362: ...860 451 845 904 905 906 328 1599 1606 855 912 913 914 699 1607 Figure 187 Pole Discrepancy Logic Diagram Module 62 5 22 CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIP CONVERSION Circuit breakers should only trip single pole or three pole The trip conversion logic ensures that the tripping is either single pole or three pole The trip conversion logic ensures that all conditions that should cause three pole tripping do so In...

Page 363: ... 1604 1608 530 531 532 892 893 894 523 524 525 526 1601 1602 1603 1600 522 527 528 Figure 188 Circuit Breaker Trip Conversion Logic Diagram Module 63 5 23 MONITOR CHECKS FOR CB CLOSURE For single phase Autoreclose neither voltage nor synchronisation checks are needed as synchronising power should be flowing in the two healthy phases For three phase Autorelcose for the first shot and only the first...

Page 364: ...ne Dead Bus 1 Live Bus 1 Dead Bus 2 Live Bus 2 Inhibit LB2 Inhibit LB1 Inhibit DB1 Inhibit DB2 Inhibit LL Inhibit DL MCB VTS MCB VTS CB1 CS MCB VTS CB2 CS 1 1 1 1 1 1 VAN VBN VCN VAB VBC VCA VBus1 VBus2 438 1521 1423 1522 1523 1524 1525 1424 1425 888 889 886 887 1461 1462 Figure 189 Voltage Monitor for CB Closure Module 59 Chapter 11 Autoreclose P446SV 332 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 365: ...s CB1 CS1 Vl Vb CB1 CS1 Vl Vb CB1 CS1 AngHigh CB1 CS1 Fl Fb CB1 CS1 Fl Fb CB1 CS1 AngHigh CB1 CS2 AngHigh CB1 CS2 Fl Fb CB1 CS2 Fl Fb CB1 CS2 AngHigh CB1 CS AngRotACW CB1 CS AngRotCW SyschecksCB 1 Enabled SChksInactiveCB 1 Disabled CB1 CS1 Status Enabled CB1 CS1 Enabled CB1 CS2 Status Enabled CB1 CS2 Enabled Check Synchronisation Function CB1 CS2 Vl Vb CB1 CS2 Vl Vb MCB VTS MCB VTS CB CS CB1 CS2 V...

Page 366: ...atus Enabled CB2 CS1 Enabled CB2 CS2 Status Enabled CB2 CS2 Enabled Check Synchronisation Function CB2 CS2 Vl Vb CB2 CS2 Vl Vb MCB VTS MCB VTS CB CS CB2 CS2 Vl Vb CB2 CS2 Vl Vb 1521 438 832 319 1426 1427 1484 1466 1467 1468 1469 1585 1584 1470 1472 1474 1476 1478 1479 1475 1477 1480 1481 1482 1483 1471 1473 1577 884 Figure 191 Check Synchronisation Monitor for CB2 closure Module 61 5 24 SYNCHRONIS...

Page 367: ...cle is complete and signals are generated to indicate that Autoreclose was successful These are CB1 Succ 1P AR Single phase Autoreclose CB1 CB2 Succ 1P AR Single phase Autoreclose CB2 CB1 Succ 3P AR Three phase Autoreclose CB1 CB2 Succ 3P AR Three phase Autoreclose CB2 These signals increment the relevant circuit breaker successful Autoreclose shot counters as well as resetting the Autoreclose in ...

Page 368: ...l Disabled CB1 CS2 OK Dead Line Live Bus 1 Live Line Seq Counter 1 CB1 Fast SCOK 1 1 CB1L SCOK CB1L SC DLDB Enabled Dead Bus 1 Dead Line Dead Bus 1 CB1 Ext CS OK Note If the DDB signal CB1 Ext CS OK is not mapped in PSL it defaults to High 883 884 889 886 888 887 889 887 847 900 1572 1573 Figure 192 Three phase AR System Check logic diagram for CB1 as leader Module 45 Chapter 11 Autoreclose P446SV...

Page 369: ... Live Bus 2 Live Line Seq Counter 1 CB2 Fast SCOK 1 1 CB2L SCOK CB2L SC DLDB Enabled Dead Bus 1 Dead Line Dead Bus 2 CB2 Ext CS OK Note If the DDB signal CB2 Ext CS OK is not mapped in PSL it defaults to High 1577 1463 889 1461 888 887 889 1462 847 901 1455 1454 Figure 193 Three phase AR System Check logic diagram for CB2 as leader Module 46 P446SV Chapter 11 Autoreclose P446SV TM EN 1 337 ...

Page 370: ...l Disabled CB1 CS2 OK Dead Line Live Bus 1 Live Line Seq Counter 1 1 1 CB1F SCOK CB1F SC DLDB Enabled Dead Bus 1 Dead Line Dead Bus 1 CB1 Ext CS OK Note If the DDB signal CB1 Ext CS OK is not mapped in PSL it defaults to High 883 884 889 886 888 887 889 887 847 900 1491 Figure 194 Three phase AR System Check logic d for CB1 as follower Module 47 Chapter 11 Autoreclose P446SV 338 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 371: ...e Bus 2 Live Line Seq Counter 1 1 1 CB2F SCOK CB2F SC DLDB Enabled Dead Bus 1 Dead Line Dead Bus 2 CB2 Ext CS OK Note If the DDB signal CB2 Ext CS OK is not mapped in PSL it defaults to High 1577 1463 889 1461 888 887 889 1462 847 901 1456 Figure 195 Three phase AR System Check logic diagram for CB2 as follower Module 48 P446SV Chapter 11 Autoreclose P446SV TM EN 1 339 ...

Page 372: ...ne Dead Bus 1 CB1 Ext CS OK Note If the DDB signal CB2 Ext CS OK is not mapped in PSL it defaults to High CB2M SC CS1 Enabled CB2M SC CS2 Enabled CB2 CS1 OK CB2M SC DLLB Enabled CB2M SC LLDB Enabled CB2M SC required Disabled CB2 CS2 OK Dead Line Live Bus 2 Live Line 1 CB2 Man SCOK CB2M SC DLDB Enabled Dead Bus 2 Dead Line Dead Bus 2 CB2 Ext CS OK 883 884 889 886 888 887 889 887 900 1577 1463 889 1...

Page 373: ...of 300 ms may typically be required The minimum system dead time considering just the circuit breaker is the trip mechanism reset time plus the circuit breaker closing time The Autoreclose minimum dead time settings are governed primarily by two factors Time taken for de ionisation of the fault path Circuit breaker characteristics It is essential that the protection fully resets during the dead ti...

Page 374: ... breaker applications the two circuit breakers are normally arranged to reclose sequentially with one designated the Leader circuit breaker reclosing after a set dead time If the Leader circuit breaker remains closed after the dead time the second circuit breaker referred to as the Follower recloses after a further delay the Follower Time The Follower Time is provided to prevent un necessary opera...

Page 375: ...s healthy the Follower circuit breaker acts more like a bus coupler In this case there is no need for fast switching and a time delay in excess of 1s is often appropriate The default Follower time in this product is chosen as 5 s and this can comfortably be applied to most applications P446SV Chapter 11 Autoreclose P446SV TM EN 1 343 ...

Page 376: ...Chapter 11 Autoreclose P446SV 344 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 377: ...CHAPTER 12 CB FAIL PROTECTION ...

Page 378: ...Chapter 12 CB Fail Protection P446SV 346 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 379: ... this function including the principles logic diagrams and applications This chapter contains the following sections Chapter Overview 347 Circuit Breaker Fail Protection 348 Circuit Breaker Fail Implementation 349 Circuit Breaker Fail Logic 351 Application Notes 355 P446SV Chapter 12 CB Fail Protection P446SV TM EN 1 347 ...

Page 380: ...sons it is common practice to install Circuit Breaker Failure protection CBF CBF protection monitors the circuit breaker and establishes whether it has opened within a reasonable time If the fault current has not been interrupted following a set time delay from circuit breaker trip initiation the CBF protection will operate whereby the upstream circuit breakers are back tripped to ensure that the ...

Page 381: ...have also been reset The resetting mechanism is determined by the settings Volt Prot Reset and Ext Prot Reset The resetting options are summarised in the following table Initiation Menu Selectable CB Fail Timer Reset Mechanism Current based protection The resetting mechanism is fixed e g 50 51 46 21 87 IA operates AND IB operates AND IC operates AND IN operates Sensitive Earth Fault element The re...

Page 382: ...er the circuit breaker in the primary system has opened ensuring that the only current flowing in the AC secondary circuit is the subsidence current Chapter 12 CB Fail Protection P446SV 350 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 383: ...d 2 WITrip C 1 WIINFEEDA WIINFEEDB WIINFEEDC 1 1 1 V00729 ExtTrip OnlyIni Enabled Note Thispartisnotrelevantfor non distance models ExtTrip OnlyIni Enabled CurrentProtSEFTrip ISEF FastUndercurrent TripStateSEF ZCD function ZCDStateSEF ZCDStateA ZCDStateB ZCDStateC RD Q S 642 652 637 647 638 648 639 649 Figure 197 Circuit Breaker Fail logic part 1 P446SV Chapter 12 CB Fail Protection P446SV TM EN 1...

Page 384: ...Rst OR CBOp I 0 1 2 3 4 LatchATripResetIncompCB 1 CB1 Open A ph S RD Q Logic 0 535 904 Figure 198 Circuit Breaker Fail logic part 2 Note This diagram shows only phase A for the first CB CB1 of a dual CB device The diagrams for phases B and C and for the second CB CB2 follow the same principle and are not repeated here Chapter 12 CB Fail Protection P446SV 352 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 385: ...d C All Poles Dead Pole Dead A Pole Dead B 1 IC FastUndercurrent IA FastUndercurrent IB FastUndercurrent 0 1 2 LatchNonITripResetIncompCB 1 1 WIINFEEDA TripStateExtA TripStateACB1 ExtTrip Only Ini Enabled AnyTripPhaseA IA FastUndercurrent RD Q S CB1 Open 3 ph CB1 Open A ph CB1 Open B ph CB1 Open C ph 1 Logic 0 534 534 904 905 906 874 890 892 893 894 Figure 199 Circuit Breaker Fail logic part 3 Not...

Page 386: ...1 1 CB1 Fail2 Trip A TripStateA CB1 Fail2 Status Enabled 1 ZCD StateSEF TripStateSEF CB1 Fail1 Status Enabled 1 TripStateSEF CB1 Fail2 Status Enabled CB1 Fail1 Timer t t t t 0 0 0 0 CB1 Fail2 Timer CB1 Fail2 Timer 834 298 835 1672 1675 Figure 200 Circuit Breaker Fail logic part 4 Note This diagram shows only phase A for the first CB CB1 of a dual CB device The diagrams for phases B and C and for t...

Page 387: ...gives a reliable reset method if the protected circuit would always have load current flowing In this case detecting drop off of the initiating protection element might be a more reliable method Where non current operated protection such as under overvoltage or under overfrequency derives measurements from a busbar connected voltage transformer Again using I would rely on the feeder normally being...

Page 388: ... 50 50 10 50 160 ms CB open CB auxiliary contacts opening closing time max error in tBF timer safety margin 50 10 50 110 ms Undercurrent elements CB interrupting time undercurrent element max safety margin operating time 50 25 50 125 ms Note All CB Fail resetting involves the operation of the undercurrent elements Where element resetting or CB open resetting is used the undercurrent time setting s...

Page 389: ...CHAPTER 13 CURRENT PROTECTION FUNCTIONS ...

Page 390: ...Chapter 13 Current Protection Functions P446SV 358 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 391: ...iples please refer either to General Electric s NPAG publication earlier incarnations of this technical manual or one of our technical manuals from our P40 Agile Modular distribution range of products such as the P14x This chapter contains the following sections Chapter Overview 359 Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection 360 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection 363 Earth Fault Protection 366 Sensi...

Page 392: ...tandards A range of programmable user defined curves DT Definite Time characteristic This is achieved using the cells I n Function for the overcurrent operate characteristic I n Reset Char for the overcurrent reset characteristic I n Usr Rst Char for the reset characteristic for user defined curves where n is the number of the stage The IDMT equipped stages 1 and 2 also provide a Timer Hold facili...

Page 393: ... stages It is possible to set characteristic angles anywhere in the range 95 to 95 A directional check is performed based on the following criteria Directional forward 90 angle I angle V RCA 90 Directional reverse 90 angle I angle V RCA 90 For close up three phase faults all three voltages will collapse to zero and no healthy phase voltages will be present For this reason the device includes a syn...

Page 394: ...Directional check I 1 Direction VBC VTS Fast Block I Blocking VTS Blocks I 1 Directional check I 1 Direction VCA VTS Fast Block I Blocking VTS Blocks I 1 Directional check I 1 Direction VAB Note For the purpose of clarity this diagram shows the first relevant stage number for each signal and setting name 832 832 832 401 762 656 763 657 764 658 761 655 Figure 202 Phase Overcurrent Protection logic ...

Page 395: ...RENT PROTECTION IMPLEMENTATION Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection is implemented in the NEG SEQ O C column of the relevant settings group The product provides four stages of negative sequence overcurrent protection with independent time delay characteristics Stages 1 2 provide a choice of operate and reset characteristics where you can select between A range of standard IDMT Inverse Definite...

Page 396: ...standing negative phase sequence current The setting should be at least 20 above this figure Where the negative phase sequence element needs to operate for specific uncleared asymmetric faults a precise threshold setting would have to be based on an individual fault analysis for that particular system due to the complexities involved However to ensure operation of the protection the current pick u...

Page 397: ...en V2 and I2 under fault conditions is directly dependent on the negative sequence source impedance of the system However typical settings for the element are as follows For a transmission system the relay characteristic angle RCA should be set equal to 60 For a distribution system the relay characteristic angle RCA should be set equal to 45 For the negative phase sequence directional elements to ...

Page 398: ...a choice of operate and reset characteristics where you can select between A range of IDMT Inverse Definite Minimum Time curves DT Definite Time This is achieved using the cells IN n Function for the overcurrent operate characteristics IN n Reset Char for the overcurrent reset characteristic where n is the number of the stage Stages 1 and 2 provide a Timer Hold facility This is configured using th...

Page 399: ...u will need to use a directional overcurrent element to determine the direction of the fault Typical systems that require such protection are parallel feeders and ring main systems A directional element is available for all of the Earth Fault stages These are found in the direction setting cells for the relevant stage They can be set to non directional directional forward or directional reverse Di...

Page 400: ...ieve or at the very least problematic For example a suitable type of VT may be unavailable or an HV EHV parallel line application may present problems with zero sequence mutual coupling In such situations the problem may be solved by using Negative Phase Sequence NPS quantities for polarisation This method determines the fault direction by comparing the NPS voltage with the NPS current The operati...

Page 401: ...imbalances VT inaccuracies IED tolerances etc Hence the IED includes a user settable threshold IN VNPol Set which must be exceeded in order for the DEF function to be operational In practice the typical zero sequence voltage on a healthy system can be as high as 1 i e 3 residual and the VT error could be 1 per phase A setting between 1 and 4 is therefore typical The residual voltage measurement ma...

Page 402: ...ommend the following RCA settings Resistance earthed systems 0 Distribution systems solidly earthed 45 Transmission systems solidly earthed 60 Chapter 13 Current Protection Functions P446SV 370 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 403: ... Time curves DT Definite Time This is achieved using the cells ISEF n Function for the overcurrent operate characteristic ISEF n Reset Chr for the overcurrent reset characteristic where n is the number of the stage Stages 1 and 2 also provide a Timer Hold facility This is configured using the cells ISEF n tReset Stages 3 and 4 have definite time characteristics only Each stage can be individually ...

Page 404: ... 1 Current VTS Slow Block ISEF Blocking VTS Blocks IN 1 VN ISEF VNpol Set IDMT DT Directional check ISEF 1 Direction IN Low Current Residual voltage polarisation ISEF Blocking AR Blks ISEF 3 Stages 3 and 4 only Note For the purpose of clarity this diagram shows the first relevant stage number for each signal and setting name 928 1724 833 409 777 671 Figure 207 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection logi...

Page 405: ...ng the required protection sensitivity to be more easily achieved The following diagram shows an insulated system with a C phase fault E00627 IR3 IR3 IH1 IH2 IH3 IH3 IR3 IH1 IH2 IH3 IH1 IH2 IH1 IH2 IH3 jXc3 Ia3 Ib3 IH2 jXc2 IR2 Ia2 Ib2 IH1 jXc1 IR1 Ia1 Ib1 Figure 208 Current distribution in an insulated system with C phase fault The protection elements on the healthy feeder see the charging curren...

Page 406: ... This is for the case when the protection is connected such that its direction of current flow for operation is from the source busbar towards the feeder If the forward direction for operation were set such that it is from the feeder into the busbar then a 90 RCA would be required Note Discrimination can be provided without the need for directional control This can only be achieved however if it i...

Page 407: ...ted at the cable gland and directly earthed at that point a cable fault from phase to sheath will not result in any unbalanced current in the core balance CT Therefore prior to earthing the connection must be brought back through the CBCT and earthed on the feeder side This then ensures correct relay operation during earth fault conditions P446SV Chapter 13 Current Protection Functions P446SV TM E...

Page 408: ...it I RST I Is IF Figure 211 High Impedance REF principle When subjected to heavy through faults the line current transformer may enter saturation unevenly resulting in imbalance To ensure stability under these conditions a series connected external resistor is required so that most of the unbalanced current will flow through the saturated CT As a result the current flowing through the device will ...

Page 409: ...ase C IED I Neutral Phase A Phase B Phase C Connecting IED to star winding for High Impedance REF Connecting IED to delta winding for High Impedance REF RSTAB RSTAB Figure 212 High Impedance REF Connection P446SV Chapter 13 Current Protection Functions P446SV TM EN 1 377 ...

Page 410: ... used to protect equipment such as oil filled transformers with natural air cooling The thermal model is similar to that with the single time constant except that two timer constants must be set For marginal overloading heat will flow from the windings into the bulk of the insulating oil Therefore at low current the replica curve is dominated by the long time constant for the oil This provides pro...

Page 411: ...ts are compared and the largest magnitude is taken as the input to the thermal overload function If this current exceeds the thermal trip threshold setting a start condition is asserted The Start signal is applied to the chosen thermal characteristic module which has three outputs signals alarm trip and thermal state measurement The thermal state measurement is made available in one of the MEASURE...

Page 412: ...gure 215 Dual time constant thermal characteristic The current setting is calculated as Thermal Trip Permissible continuous loading of the transformer item CT ratio For an oil filled transformer with rating 400 to 1600 kVA the approximate time constants are t1 5 minutes t2 120 minutes An alarm can be raised on reaching a thermal state corresponding to a percentage of the trip threshold A typical s...

Page 413: ...surement of 100 The current setting is calculated as Thermal Trip Permissible continuous loading of the plant item CT ratio The following tables show the approximate time constant in minutes for different cable rated voltages with various conductor cross sectional areas and other plant equipment Area mm2 6 11 kV 22 kV 33 kV 66 kV 25 50 10 minutes 15 minutes 40 minutes 70 120 15 minutes 25 minutes ...

Page 414: ...rotection is implemented in the BROKEN CONDUCTOR column of the relevant settings group This column contains the settings to enable the function for the pickup threshold and the time delay 8 2 BROKEN CONDUCTOR PROTECTION LOGIC The ratio of I2 I1 is calculated and compared with the threshold setting If the threshold is exceeded the delay timer is initiated The CTS block signal is used to block the o...

Page 415: ...ing example was recorded by an IED during commissioning Ifull load 500A I2 50A therefore the quiescent I2 I1 ratio 0 1 To allow for tolerances and load variations a setting of 20 of this value may be typical Therefore set I2 I1 0 2 In a double circuit parallel line application using a 40 setting will ensure that the broken conductor protection will operate only for the circuit that is affected A s...

Page 416: ...Chapter 13 Current Protection Functions P446SV 384 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 417: ...CHAPTER 14 VOLTAGE PROTECTION FUNCTIONS ...

Page 418: ...Chapter 14 Voltage Protection Functions P446SV 386 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 419: ... these functions including the principles logic diagrams and applications This chapter contains the following sections Chapter Overview 387 Undervoltage Protection 388 Overvoltage Protection 391 Compensated Overvoltage 394 Residual Overvoltage Protection 395 P446SV Chapter 14 Voltage Protection Functions P446SV TM EN 1 387 ...

Page 420: ...estored the load is not connected Therefore the automatic tripping of a feeder on detection of complete loss of voltage may be required This can be achieved by a three phase undervoltage element Where outgoing feeders from a busbar are supplying induction motor loads excessive dips in the supply may cause the connected motors to stall and should be tripped for voltage reductions that last longer t...

Page 421: ...from each of these phases are OR d together to create a 3 phase Start signal V n Start which can be be activated when any of the three phases start Any Phase or when all three phases start Three Phase depending on the chosen V Operate Mode setting The outputs of the timer modules are the trip signals which are used to drive the tripping output relay These tripping signals are also OR d together to...

Page 422: ... protection should be set at some value below the voltage excursions that may be expected under normal system operating conditions This threshold is dependent on the system in question but typical healthy system voltage excursions may be in the order of 10 of nominal value The same applies to the time setting The required time delay is dependent on the time for which the system is able to withstan...

Page 423: ...levant settings group The Overvoltage parameters are contained within the sub heading OVERVOLTAGE The product provides two stages of overvoltage protection with independent time delay characteristics Stage 1 provides a choice of operate characteristics where you can select between An IDMT characteristic DT Definite Time You set this using the V 1 Function setting The IDMT characteristic is defined...

Page 424: ...he VTS Fast Block signal This start signal is applied to the timer module to produce the Trip signal which can be blocked by the overvoltage timer block signal V n Timer Block For each stage there are three Phase overvoltage detection modules one for each phase The three Start signals from each of these phases are OR d together to create a 3 phase Start signal V n Start which can then be activated...

Page 425: ...elay according to the severity of the overvoltage As the voltage settings for both of the stages are independent the second stage could then be set lower than the first to provide a time delayed alarm stage If only one stage of overvoltage protection is required or if the element is required to provide an alarm only the remaining stage may be disabled This type of protection must be co ordinated w...

Page 426: ...ne Length l The remote voltage is calculated using the following equations Vr Ir D C BA Vs Is where Vr is the voltage at the receiving end Ir is the current at the receiving end Vs is the measured voltage at the sending end Is is the measured current at the sending end A D cosh y l B Zc sinh y l C Yc sinh y l y l Ö Z Y Zc 1 Yc Ö Z Y Y total line capacitive charging susceptance Zc characteristic im...

Page 427: ...e more than one stage For example an insulated system may require an alarm stage and a trip stage It is common in such a case for the system to be designed to withstand the associated healthy phase overvoltages for a number of hours following an earth fault In such applications an alarm is generated soon after the condition is detected which serves to indicate the presence of an earth fault on the...

Page 428: ...hen this happens the comparator output produces a Start signal VN n Start which signifies the Start of protection This can be blocked by a VTS Fast block signal This Start signal is applied to the timer module The output of the timer module is the VN n Trip signal which is used to drive the tripping output relay 5 3 APPLICATION NOTES 5 3 1 CALCULATION FOR SOLIDLY EARTHED SYSTEMS Consider a Phase A...

Page 429: ...ehind the protection to the line impedance in front of the protection up to the point of fault For a remote fault far away the ZS ZL ratio will be small resulting in a correspondingly small residual voltage Therefore the protection only operates for faults up to a certain distance along the system The maximum distance depends on the device setting 5 3 2 CALCULATION FOR IMPEDANCE EARTHED SYSTEMS Co...

Page 430: ...at the residual voltage generated by an earth fault on an insulated system will be the highest possible value 3 x phase neutral voltage as the zero sequence source impedance is infinite 5 3 3 SETTING GUIDELINES The voltage setting applied to the elements is dependent on the magnitude of residual voltage that is expected to occur during the earth fault condition This in turn is dependent on the met...

Page 431: ...CHAPTER 15 FREQUENCY PROTECTION FUNCTIONS ...

Page 432: ...Chapter 15 Frequency Protection Functions P446SV 400 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 433: ...describes the operation of these functions including the principles logic diagrams and applications This chapter contains the following sections Chapter Overview 401 Frequency Protection 402 Independent R O C O F Protection 405 P446SV Chapter 15 Frequency Protection Functions P446SV TM EN 1 401 ...

Page 434: ... and overfrequency protection Frequency Protection is implemented in the FREQ PROTECTION column of the relevant settings group 2 1 UNDERFREQUENCY PROTECTION A reduced system frequency implies that the net load is in excess of the available generation Such a condition can arise when an interconnected system splits and the load left connected to one of the subsystems is in excess of the capacity of ...

Page 435: ...rols in the system to respond These should not be excessive as this could jeopardize system stability Time delay settings of 5 20 s are typical The protection function should be set so that declared frequency time limits for the generating set are not infringed Typically a 10 underfrequency condition should be continuously sustainable 2 2 OVERFREQUENCY PROTECTION An increased system frequency aris...

Page 436: ...rmined the function is blocked 2 2 3 APPLICATION NOTES 2 2 3 1 SETTING GUIDELINES Following changes on the network caused by faults or other operational requirements it is possible that various subsystems will be formed within the power network It is likely that these subsystems will suffer from a generation load imbalance The islands where generation exceeds the existing load will be subject to o...

Page 437: ... above nominal frequency the rate of change of frequency setting is considered as positive and the element will operate for rising frequency conditions If the frequency threshold is set below nominal frequency the setting is considered as negative and the element will operate for falling frequency conditions The function uses the following settings shown for stage 1 only other stages follow the sa...

Page 438: ...Chapter 15 Frequency Protection Functions P446SV 406 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 439: ...CHAPTER 16 MONITORING AND CONTROL ...

Page 440: ...Chapter 16 Monitoring and Control P446SV 408 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 441: ...ntrol functionality This chapter contains the following sections Chapter Overview 409 Event Records 410 Disturbance Recorder 414 Measurements 415 CB Condition Monitoring 416 CB State Monitoring 427 Circuit Breaker Control 429 Pole Dead Function 435 System Checks 436 P446SV Chapter 16 Monitoring and Control P446SV TM EN 1 409 ...

Page 442: ...the Event Text cell You can expand the details of the event by clicking on the icon to the left of the time stamp The following table shows the correlation between the fields in the setting application software s event viewer and the cells in the menu database Field in Event Viewer Equivalent cell in menu DB Cell reference User settable Left hand column header VIEW RECORDS Time Date 01 03 No Right...

Page 443: ...created which logs the logic states of all output relays You can tell which output relay has changed state by comparing the new event with the previous one The description of this event type as shown in the Event Text cell is always Output Contacts where is the batch number of the output relay contacts This is 1 for the first batch of output contacts and 2 for the second batch of output contacts i...

Page 444: ...en the fault recorder stops Note We recommend that you do not set the triggering contact to latching This is because if you use a latching contact the fault record would not be generated until the contact has been fully reset 2 1 5 MAINTENANCE EVENTS Internal failures detected by the self test procedures are logged as maintenance records Maintenance records are special types of standard events The...

Page 445: ... the RECORD CONTROL column In this column you can set which DDBs generate events 2 1 7 SECURITY EVENTS An event record is generated each time a setting that requires an access level is executed The event type description shown in the Event Text cell displays the type of change 2 1 8 PLATFORM EVENTS Platform events are special types of standard events The event type description shown in the Event T...

Page 446: ...ition cells The Duration cell sets the overall recording time and the Trigger Position cell sets the trigger point as a percentage of the duration For example the default settings show that the overall recording time is set to 1 5 s with the trigger point being at 33 3 of this giving 0 5 s pre fault and 1 s post fault recording times With the Trigger Mode set to Single if further triggers occurs w...

Page 447: ...the fault location in metres miles ohms or percentage depending on the chosen units in the Fault Location cell of the MEASURE T SETUP column The Fault Locator uses pre fault and post fault analogue input signals to calculate the fault location The result is included it in the fault record The pre fault and post fault voltages are also presented in the fault record When applied to parallel circuits...

Page 448: ...s last reset CB Operate Time A register stores the total amount of time the CB has transitioned from closed to open is stored in an accumulator giving at any time a measure of the total time that the CB has spent tripping since the values was last reset Excessive Fault Frequency A counter registers the number of CB trips that have been performed for all phases giving at any time the total number o...

Page 449: ...mode Set CB2 Cumulative IA broken In Set Reset CB2PhaseACurrent Set CB2 Cumulative IB broken In Set Reset CB2PhaseBCurrent Set CB2 Cumulative IC broken In Set Reset CB2PhaseCCurrent CB2 Trip3ph 1 CB2 Ext Trip3ph 0 t CB2 Trip OutputA 1 CB2 Ext Trip A 0 t CB2 Trip OutputB 1 CB2 Ext Trip B 0 t CB2 Trip OutputC 1 CB2 Ext Trip C 0 t 1 1 1 1 Reset CB Data Reset CB Data Note Broken current totals not inc...

Page 450: ...ase C Incrément Réinit 1 Déc 3ph DJ2 Déc ext 3ph DJ2 Sortie Déc A DJ2 Déc 2 Extern A Sortie Déc B DJ2 Déc 2 Extern B Sortie Déc C DJ2 Déc 2 Extern C RAZ Données DJ2 RAZ Infos DJ2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 DJ2 Compteur de déclenchement Phase A Incrément Réinit DJ2 Compteur de déclenchement Phase B Incrément Réinit DJ2 Compteur de déclenchement Phase C Incrément Réinit 526 534 523 535 524 536 525 537 447 1600 5...

Page 451: ...A fixed threshold IB fixed threshold IC fixed threshold CB2 operating time phase A Start Stop CB2 Trip3ph 1 CB2 Ext Trip3ph CB2 Trip OutputA CB2 Ext Trip A CB2 Trip OutputB 1 CB2 Ext Trip B Pole Dead A CB2 operating time phase B Start Stop 1 1 Pole Dead B 1 CB2 Trip OutputC 1 CB2 Ext Trip C CB2 operating time phase C Start Stop Pole Dead C 1 1 Rst CB2 Data Reset CB2 Data CB2OpTimePhA Counter Incre...

Page 452: ...y Counter Increment Reset 1 R Q S 0 t 1 CB1 LO Alarm CB1FltFreqTime CB2 Trip3ph CB2 Ext Trip3ph CB2 Trip OutputA CB2 Ext Trip A CB2 Trip OutputB CB2 Ext Trip B CB2 Trip OutputC CB2 Ext Trip C 1 1 1 1 CB2 Excessive Fault Frequency Counter Increment Reset 1 R Q S 0 t 1 CB2 LO Alarm CB2FltFreqTime Figure 229 Excessive Fault Frequency logic diagram Chapter 16 Monitoring and Control P446SV 420 P446SV T...

Page 453: ...1 Closed A ph CB1 Closed B ph CB1 Closed C ph CB1 Closed 3 ph 1 CB mon LO reset Yes 1 Rst CB mon LO by Clear Alarms R Q S CB2 Failed to Trip CB2 Open 3 ph CB2 LO Alarm 0 t CB mon LO RstDly Reset CB2 Lockout Alarm CB Close CB2 Closed A ph CB2 Closed B ph CB2 Closed C ph CB2 Closed 3 ph 1 Figure 230 Reset Lockout Alarm logic diagram P446SV Chapter 16 Monitoring and Control P446SV TM EN 1 421 ...

Page 454: ...reqLock 1 1 CB1 Pre Lockout CB1 Time Maint CB1 Time Maint Alarm Enabled CB1 Time Maint R Q S CB1 Time Lockout CB1 Time Lockout Alarm Enabled CB1 Time Lockout 1 CB1 Mon LO Alarm Reset CB1 Data Yes 1 Rst CB1 Data 1 Control CB1 Unhealthy CB1 Control no Check Synch CB1 failed to trip CB1 failed to close Reset CB1 Lockout Alarm R Q S CB1 LO Alarm Clear Alarms Greatest broken current total Max no of CB ...

Page 455: ... operations Fault frequency count Greatest CB operate time Figure 232 CB2 Condition Monitoring logic diagram 5 7 RESET CIRCUIT BREAKER LOCKOUT Lockout conditions caused by the circuit breaker condition monitoring functions can be reset according to the condition of the Rst CB mon LO by setting found in the CB CONTROL column There are two options CB Close and User interface If set to CB Close a tim...

Page 456: ...ker lockout command in the CB CONTROL column If Res LO by NoAR is set to Enabled the circuit breaker lockout can be reset by temporarily generating an AR disabled signal If Res LO by TDelay is set to Enabled the circuit breaker lockout is automatically reset after a time delay set in the LO Reset Time setting If Res LO by ExtDDB is Enabled the circuit breaker lockout can be reset by activation of ...

Page 457: ...it Breaker Lockout Logic Diagram Modules 57 58 5 8 APPLICATION NOTES 5 8 1 SETTING THE THRESHOLDS FOR THE TOTAL BROKEN CURRENT Where power lines use oil circuit breakers OCBs changing of the oil accounts for a significant proportion of the switchgear maintenance costs Often oil changes are performed after a fixed number of CB fault operations However this may result in premature maintenance where ...

Page 458: ...ed to the standard demanded by the switchgear manufacturer s maintenance instructions Some circuit breakers such as oil circuit breakers OCBs can only perform a certain number of fault interruptions before requiring maintenance attention This is because each fault interruption causes carbonising of the oil degrading its dielectric properties The maintenance alarm threshold setting No CB Ops Maint ...

Page 459: ...exist an alarm will be issued after a 5 s time delay An output contact can be assigned to this function via the programmable scheme logic PSL The time delay is set to avoid unwanted operation during normal switching duties In the CB CONTROL column there is a setting called CB Status Input This cell can be set at one of the following four options None 52A 52B Both 52A and 52B Where None is selected...

Page 460: ...s Input 52A 1 pole 52B 1 pole 52A 52B 1 pole CB1 Aux C 52 A CB1 Aux C 52 B CB1 Status Input 52A 1 pole 52B 1 pole 52A 52B 1 pole Phase B Same logicasphase A Phase C Same logicasphase A 1 CB1 Closed A ph 1 CB1 Open A ph 1 CB1 Closed B ph 1 CB1 Open B ph 1 CB1 Closed C ph 1 CB1 Open C ph CB1 Status Alm 1 CB1 Status Time 420 424 421 425 422 426 423 427 907 903 908 904 909 905 910 906 301 Figure 234 C...

Page 461: ...lose cycle before the pulse has elapsed If an attempt to close the breaker is being made and a protection trip signal is generated the protection trip command overrides the close command The Reset Lockout by setting is used to enable or disable the resetting of lockout automatically from a manual close after the time set by Man Close RstDly If the CB fails to respond to the control command indicat...

Page 462: ...the option to cancel or restart the close procedure The time delay is determined by the Man Close Delay setting in the CB CONTROL menu When the command has been executed a screen confirming the present status of the circuit breaker is displayed You are then prompted to select the next appropriate command or exit If no keys are pressed for a period of 5 seconds while waiting for the command confirm...

Page 463: ...ontrol operations It is possible to connect such push buttons and signals to opto inputs and map these to the relevant DDB signals For this to work you have to set the CB control by cell to option 4 opto option 5 Opto Local option 6 Opto Remote or option 7 Opto Local Remote in the CB CONTROL column 7 5 REMOTE CB CONTROL Remote CB control can be achieved by setting the CB Trip Close cell in the SYS...

Page 464: ...sation criteria are not satisfied within the time period following a Close command the device will lockout and alarm 7 8 CB CONTROL AR IMPLICATIONS An Auto Close CB signal from the Auto close logic bypasses the Man Close Delay time and the CB Close output operates immediately to close the circuit breaker If Autoreclose is used it may be desirable to block its operation when performing a manual clo...

Page 465: ...TripCB1 Any Trip CB1 Open 3 ph CB1 Closed 3 ph CB1 Healthy ManCB1 Unhealthy NoCS CB1ManClose CB1 Man SCOK CB1 Ext Trip A CB1 Ext Trip B CB1 Ext Trip C CB1 Open A ph CB1 Open B ph CB1 Open C ph CB1 Closed A ph CB1 Closed B ph CB1 Closed C ph 1 1 Note If the DDB signal CB1 Healthy or CB2 Healthy is not mapped in PSL it defaults to High 1 RD Q S 0 t 1 RD Q S 0 t 1 RD Q S 0 t 1 1 1 1 0 t 0 t Trip Puls...

Page 466: ...t Trip A CB2 Ext Trip B CB2 Ext Trip C CB2 Open A ph CB2 Open B ph CB2 Open C ph CB2 Closed A ph CB2 Closed B ph CB2 Closed C ph 1 1 1 RD Q S 0 t 1 RD Q S 0 t 1 RD Q S 0 t 1 1 1 1 0 t 0 t Trip Pulse Time Close Pulse Time Man Close Delay CB Healthy Time Check Sync Time Note If the DDB signal CB1 Healthy or CB2 healthy is not mapped in PSL it defaults to High 441 442 1435 1448 1419 522 840 538 539 5...

Page 467: ...t Set V V I Current Set CB2 Open A ph CB2 Open B ph CB2 Open C ph CB2 Open 3 ph Figure 240 Pole Dead logic If both the line current and voltage values fall below a certain threshold or a CB Open condition is asserted from the state control logic the device initiates a Pole Dead condition The current and voltage thresholds can be set with the I Current Set and the V settings respectively in the CBF...

Page 468: ...uld lose synchronism altogether and the frequency at one end could slip relative to the other end In this situation the second line end would require a synchronism check comprising both phase angle and slip frequency checks If the second line end busbar has no power source other than the feeder that has tripped the circuit breaker will see a live line and dead bus assuming the first circuit breake...

Page 469: ...nal if either set of permitted closing conditions is satisfied Each stage can also be set to inhibit circuit breaker closing if selected blocking conditions such as overvoltage undervoltage or excessive voltage magnitude difference are detected CS2 requires the phase angle difference to be decreasing in magnitude before permitting the circuit breaker to close CS2 has an optional Adaptive closing f...

Page 470: ...lts Dead Volts Check Sync Stage 2 Limits Rotating Vector 180º System Split Limits VLINE Check Sync Stage 1 Limits 0º V BUS Figure 241 Check Synchronisation vector diagram Chapter 16 Monitoring and Control P446SV 438 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 471: ... Bus 1 Live Bus 1 Dead Bus 2 Live Bus 2 Inhibit LB2 Inhibit LB1 Inhibit DB1 Inhibit DB2 Inhibit LL Inhibit DL MCB VTS MCB VTS CB1 CS MCB VTS CB2 CS 1 1 1 1 1 1 VAN VBN VCN VAB VBC VCA VBus1 VBus2 438 1521 1423 1522 1523 1524 1525 1424 1425 888 889 886 887 1461 1462 Figure 242 Voltage Monitor for CB Closure Module 59 P446SV Chapter 16 Monitoring and Control P446SV TM EN 1 439 ...

Page 472: ...S1 Vl Vb CB1 CS1 Vl Vb CB1 CS1 AngHigh CB1 CS1 Fl Fb CB1 CS1 Fl Fb CB1 CS1 AngHigh CB1 CS2 AngHigh CB1 CS2 Fl Fb CB1 CS2 Fl Fb CB1 CS2 AngHigh CB1 CS AngRotACW CB1 CS AngRotCW SyschecksCB 1 Enabled SChksInactiveCB 1 Disabled CB1 CS1 Status Enabled CB1 CS1 Enabled CB1 CS2 Status Enabled CB1 CS2 Enabled Check Synchronisation Function CB1 CS2 Vl Vb CB1 CS2 Vl Vb MCB VTS MCB VTS CB CS CB1 CS2 Vl Vb CB...

Page 473: ...CB2 CS1 Vl Vb CB2 CS1 AngHigh CB2 CS1 Fl Fb CB2 CS1 Fl Fb CB2 CS1 AngHigh CB2 CS2 AngHigh CB2 CS2 Fl Fb CB2 CS2 Fl Fb CB2 CS2 AngHigh CB2 CS AngRotACW CB2 CS AngRotCW SyschecksCB 2 Enabled SChksInactiveCB 2 Disabled CB2 CS1 Status Enabled CB2 CS1 Enabled CB2 CS2 Status Enabled CB2 CS2 Enabled Check Synchronisation Function CB2 CS2 Vl Vb CB2 CS2 Vl Vb MCB VTS MCB VTS CB CS CB2 CS2 Vl Vb CB2 CS2 Vl ...

Page 474: ... breaker may have different VT Ratios In such cases a magnitude correction factor is required There are some applications where the main VT is on the HV side of a transformer and the Check Sync VT is on the LV side or vice versa If the vector group of the transformer is not 0 the voltages are not in phase so phase correction is also necessary The correction factors are as follows and are located i...

Page 475: ...2 220 3 110 3 220 3 110 220 110 127 110 0 577 0º 3 220 3 110 3 220 3 110 3 220 110 381 110 1 732 0º P446SV Chapter 16 Monitoring and Control P446SV TM EN 1 443 ...

Page 476: ...Chapter 16 Monitoring and Control P446SV 444 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 477: ...CHAPTER 17 SUPERVISION ...

Page 478: ...Chapter 17 Supervision P446SV 446 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 479: ...s the supervison functions This chapter contains the following sections Chapter Overview 447 Voltage Transformer Supervision 448 Current Transformer Supervision 452 Trip Circuit Supervision 454 P446SV Chapter 17 Supervision P446SV TM EN 1 447 ...

Page 480: ...b or V connected VTs are used The Negative Sequence VTS Element is blocked by the Any Pole Dead DDB signal during SP AR Dead Time The resetting of the blocking signal is delayed by 240 ms after an Any Pole Dead condition disappears 2 2 LOSS OF ALL THREE PHASE VOLTAGES If all three voltage inputs are lost there will be no Negative Phase Sequence quantities present but the device will see that there...

Page 481: ...ercurrent fault For faults with I2 less than the setting VTS I2 Inhibit VTS will be active and block the associated functions if sufficient V2 is measured VTS is only enabled during a live line condition as indicated by the pole dead logic to prevent operation under dead system conditions Thresholds The negative sequence thresholds used by the element are V2 10 V fixed I2 0 05 to 0 5 In settable d...

Page 482: ...e Dead VTS Reset Mode Manual Auto MCB VTS VTS Status Indication Blocking VTS Acc Ind 1 1 1 S R Q 1 S R Q 1 VTS Slow Block VTS Fast Block VT Fail Alarm 1 1 S R Q 1 Hardcoded threshold Hardcoded threshold Hardcoded threshold 240ms 240ms VTS Time Delay 20ms S R Q Any Voltage dependent function 1 VT Fast Block All Poles Dead 1 Block Distance Cycle Cycle 5 Cycle 1 Cycle Figure 246 VTS logic Chapter 17 ...

Page 483: ...S indication is given after the VTS Time Delay has expired If it is set to Indication their is a risk of maloperation because protection elements are not blocked In this case the VTS indication is given before the VTS Time Delay expires if a trip signal is given in this case a signal from the VTS acceleration logic is used as an input This scheme also operates correctly under very low load or even...

Page 484: ...ived even if the actual power system phase currents are healthy Standard CTS works by detecting a derived zero sequence current where there is no corresponding derived zero sequence voltage The voltage transformer connection used must be able to refer zero sequence voltages from the primary to the secondary side Therefore this element should only be enabled where the VT is of a five limb construct...

Page 485: ...ative sequence overcurrent Measured quantities such as DEF can be selectively blocked by designing an appropriate PSL scheme Differential CTS can be used to restrain the differential protection if required 3 4 APPLICATION NOTES 3 4 1 SETTING GUIDELINES The residual voltage setting CTS VN Inhibit and the residual current setting CTS IN Set should be set to avoid unwanted operation during healthy sy...

Page 486: ...CB status monitoring If you require CB status monitoring further opto inputs must be used Note A 52a CB auxiliary contact follows the CB position A 52b auxiliary contact is the opposite V01214 52A 52B R1 Trip Output Relay ve ve Opto input Blocking diode Circuit Breaker Trip coil Trip path Figure 248 TCS Scheme 1 When the CB is closed supervision current passes through the opto input blocking diode...

Page 487: ...d the NC normally closed output relay opens and the LED and user alarms are reset The 50 ms delay on pick up timer prevents false LED and user alarm indications during the power up time following a voltage supply interruption 4 2 TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION SCHEME 2 This scheme provides supervision of the trip coil with the breaker open or closed but does not provide pre closing supervision of the tr...

Page 488: ...8 Output Relay LED User Alarm 0 400 dropoff straight 0 0 Latching Opto Input 2 1 pickup 0 50 CB Aux 3ph 52 A CB Aux 3ph 52 B NC stands for Normally Closed Figure 251 PSL for TCS Scheme 2 In TCS scheme 2 both opto inputs must be low before a trip circuit fail alarm is given 4 3 TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION SCHEME 3 TCS Scheme 3 is designed to provide supervision of the trip coil with the breaker open o...

Page 489: ... trip circuit monitoring The table below shows the resistor values and voltage settings required for satisfactory operation Trip Circuit Voltage Opto Voltage Setting with R1 Fitted Resistor R1 R2 ohms Resistor R3 ohms 48 54 24 27 1 2k 600 110 250 48 54 2 7k 1 2k 220 250 110 125 5 0k 2 5k Warning This Scheme is not compatible with Trip Circuit voltages of less than 48 V 4 3 2 PSL FOR TCS SCHEME 3 O...

Page 490: ...Chapter 17 Supervision P446SV 458 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 491: ...CHAPTER 18 DIGITAL I O AND PSL CONFIGURATION ...

Page 492: ...Chapter 18 Digital I O and PSL Configuration P446SV 460 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 493: ...ication Software document is available that gives a comprehensive description of the PSL but enough information is provided in this chapter to allow you to allocate the principal digital inputs and outputs This chapter contains the following sections Chapter Overview 461 Configuring Digital Inputs and Outputs 462 Scheme Logic 463 Configuring the Opto Inputs 465 Assigning the Output Relays 466 Fixe...

Page 494: ...rable are Optically isolated digital inputs opto inputs These can be used to monitor the status of associated plant Output relays These can be used for purposes such as initiating the tripping of circuit breakers providing alarm signals etc Programmable LEDs The number and colour of the programmable LEDs varies according to the particular product being applied Function keys and associated LED indi...

Page 495: ...ts you do not need to take any action However if you want to change the input output mappings or to implement custom scheme logic you can change these or create new PSL schemes using the PSL editor The PSL consists of components such as logic gates and timers which combine and condition DDB signals The logic gates can be programmed to perform a range of different logic functions The number of inpu...

Page 496: ...ng PSL file or create a new one for the particular product that you are using and then open a PSL file If you want to create a new PSL file you should select File then New then Blank scheme This action opens a default file appropriate for the device in question but deletes the diagram components from the default file to leave an empty diagram with configuration information loaded To open an existi...

Page 497: ...me visible You use these cells to set the voltage ranges for each individual opto input Within the OPTO CONFIG column there are also settings to control the filtering applied to the inputs as well as the pick up drop off characteristic The filter control setting provides a bit string with a bit associated with all opto inputs Setting the bit to 1 means that a half cycle filter is applied to the in...

Page 498: ...tion it according to your needs The output of the conditioner respects the attributes you have assigned The toolbar button for a Contact Conditioner looks like this The PSL contribution that it delivers looks like this Note Contact Conditioners are only available if they have not all been used In some default PSL schemes all Contact Conditioners might have been used If that is the case and you wan...

Page 499: ...r in the hardware or software The state of the healthy LED is reflected by the watchdog contacts at the back of the unit 6 1 TRIP LED LOGIC When a trip occurs the trip LED is illuminated It is possible to reset this with a number of ways Directly with a reset command by pressing the Clear Key With a reset logic input With self resetting logic You enable the automatic self resetting with the Sys Fn...

Page 500: ...n is latched pending user intervention To map an LED in the PSL you should use the LED Conditioner button in the toolbar to import it You then condition it according to your needs The output s of the conditioner respect the attribute you have assigned The toolbar button for a tri colour LED looks like this The PSL contribution that it delivers looks like this The toolbar button for a single colour...

Page 501: ...owever the actual number of LEDs depends on the device hardware For example if a small 20TE device has only 4 programmable LEDs LEDs 5 8 will not take effect even if they are mapped in the PSL P446SV Chapter 18 Digital I O and PSL Configuration P446SV TM EN 1 469 ...

Page 502: ...on keys that are set to Toggled mode and their DDB signal active high to be locked in their active state therefore preventing any further key presses from deactivating the associated function Locking a function key that is set to the Normal mode causes the associated DDB signals to be permanently off This safety feature prevents any inadvertent function key presses from activating or deactivating ...

Page 503: ...ed to trigger any PSL function to which they are connected There are three setting columns associated with the control inputs CONTROL INPUTS CTRL I P CONFIG and CTRL I P LABELS These are listed in the Settings and Records appendix at the end of this manual P446SV Chapter 18 Digital I O and PSL Configuration P446SV TM EN 1 471 ...

Page 504: ...Chapter 18 Digital I O and PSL Configuration P446SV 472 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 505: ...CHAPTER 19 FIBRE TELEPROTECTION ...

Page 506: ...Chapter 19 Fibre Teleprotection P446SV 474 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 507: ...otection signalling for protection of transmission lines and distribution feeders The feature is called Fibre Teleprotection This chapter contains the following sections Chapter Overview 475 Protection Signalling Introduction 476 Fibre Teleprotection Implementation 478 IM64 Logic 485 Application Notes 487 P446SV Chapter 19 Fibre Teleprotection P446SV TM EN 1 475 ...

Page 508: ...ignalling to convey information concerning the relaying quantity phase angle of current and phase and magnitude of current respectively between local and remote relaying points Comparison of local and remote signals provides the basis for both fault detection and discrimination of the schemes 2 2 TELEPROTECTION COMMANDS Some Protection schemes use signalling to convey commands between local and re...

Page 509: ... a spurious trip is higher 2 3 TRANSMISSION MEDIA AND INTERFERENCE The transmission media that provide the communication links involved in protection signalling can be Private pilots Rented pilots or channels Power line carrier Radio Optical fibres Historically pilot wires and channels discontinuous pilot wires with isolation transformers or repeaters along the route between signalling points have...

Page 510: ...ty before the contents are used Allocation of teleprotection commands is realised with mappings between InterMiCOM 64 signals and internal DDB logic signals using the product s the Programmable Scheme Logic PSL 3 1 SETTING UP THE IM64 SCHEME To use the fibre teleprotection features in this product you will need to configure the protection signalling scheme The protection signalling scheme is defin...

Page 511: ...t in the message If the receiving device matches the address the message will be used If it does not match it is discarded The address field is an 8 bit field in the message It can carry any 8 bit value but certain values have been chosen for maximum security For convenience they have been arranged into 32 groups All devices in a scheme must share the same group For addressing the different device...

Page 512: ...ical channel 1 IM64 Ch1 Input 4 will be the same for bit 4 in logical channel 2 IM64 Ch2 Input 4 and will take the value 1 3 1 3 TWO TERMINAL IM64 OPERATION The protection signalling connection requirement for products operating as a Two Terminal scheme is that the Physical Channels labelled as Ch1 should be connected together That means that the local Ch1 Tx connects to the remote Ch1 Rx and the ...

Page 513: ... for the device connected as its Remote 2 So eight full duplex commands are available between any two terminals Each device transmits both channels of eight IM64 commands to the connected devices At the Remote 1 device the eight Channel 1 IM64 commands are used directly by the receiving device which passes through the eight Channel 2 IM64 commands to the remote 2 device All three devices in the sc...

Page 514: ... communications links where the connection is not direct fibre a number of options are available to interface with standard telecommunications equipment These are Fibre connection to telecommunications equipment supporting the IEEE C37 94 interface Connection to G 703 V 35 or X 21 electrical circuits using auxiliary P59x interface units P59x interface unit options are P591 Fiber optic to electrica...

Page 515: ...l fiber 850 nm multimode optical fiber 850 nm multimode optical fiber Figure 257 Interfacing to PCM multiplexers Note P59x interface units should be mounted as close as possible to the telecommunications equipment to minimise interference on the electrical connections 3 1 6 2 1 INDIRECT CONNECTION FIBRE IEEE C37 94 An 850 nm fibre optic interface can connect directly to a multiplexer supporting th...

Page 516: ... nm interface on the protection device When used you need one unit for each transmitter receiver pair That means one unit at each end of each communications channel The P59x devices should be mounted as close as possible to the telecommunications equipment to minimise interference on the electrical connections A detailed description of the devices can be found in the P59x Technical Manual The P59x...

Page 517: ... t 0 Channel Timeout 1 1 1 V02502 t 0 t 0 t 0 Figure 258 IM64 channel fail and scheme fail logic Ch1 Degraded Signalling Fail Ch1 Timeout 1 Channel Timeout Channel 1 IM64 Bits received from channel 2 Ch2 Timeout V02503 3 terminal 3 terminal Channel Timeout 3 terminal Channel 2 IM64 Bits received from channel 1 Channel Timeout 3 terminal Figure 259 IM64 general alarm signals logic P446SV Chapter 19...

Page 518: ...nsit Message Info Channel Mismatch Channel 1 Communication message IEEE C37 94 Channel 2 Communication message IEEE C37 94 Comms Mode Standard IEEE C37 94 Relay Power Up Fixed Pulse 1 Message Evaluation Channel 1 Error in Receive Message Info Error in Transit Message Info Channel Mismatch RD Q S RD Q S Figure 260 IM64 communications mode and IEEE C37 94 alarm signals Chapter 19 Fibre Teleprotectio...

Page 519: ...ther the Ch Timeout or the Ch Degraded signal persists in the alarmed state for more than the duration of the Comm Fail Timer setting according to the conditions set in the Comm Fail Mode setting the Signalling Fail signal is raised For two ended schemes including dual redundant schemes the IM64 SchemeFail signal is generated at the same time as the Signalling Fail signal However for three termina...

Page 520: ...eset a 0 sent on IM64 bit 8 This causes both ends to raise an alarm LED 8 in the example or switch the aided scheme out of service due to loss of channel This is intended only as an example You may need to customise it for your application requirements 5 4 THREE ENDED SCHEME EXTENDED SUPERVISION The example for an IM64 two terminal scheme above can be used for three terminal applications However f...

Page 521: ...The logic presented above is intended only as an example You may need to customise it for your application requirements P446SV Chapter 19 Fibre Teleprotection P446SV TM EN 1 489 ...

Page 522: ...Chapter 19 Fibre Teleprotection P446SV 490 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 523: ...CHAPTER 20 ELECTRICAL TELEPROTECTION ...

Page 524: ...Chapter 20 Electrical Teleprotection P446SV 492 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 525: ...owing sections Chapter Overview 493 Introduction 494 Teleprotection Scheme Principles 495 Implementation 496 Configuration 497 Connecting to Electrical InterMiCOM 499 Application Notes 500 P446SV Chapter 20 Electrical Teleprotection P446SV TM EN 1 493 ...

Page 526: ...leprotection schemes Using full duplex communications eight binary command signals can be sent in each direction between connected products The communication connection complies with the EIA RS 232 standard Ports may be connected directly or using modems Alternatively EIA RS 232 converters can be used for connecting to other media such as optical fibres Communications statistics and diagnostics en...

Page 527: ...circuit at that end The communications system must be designed so that interference on the communication circuit does not cause spurious trips If a spurious trip occurs the primary system might be unnecessarily isolated 3 2 PERMISSIVE TRIPPING Permissive trip commands are monitored by a protection device The circuit breaker is tripped when receipt of the command coincides with a start condition be...

Page 528: ...ing sent to a remote terminal are referenced in the PSL as IM Output 1 IM Output 8 Signals received from the remote terminal are referenced as IM Input 1 IM Input 8 Note As well as the optional Modem InterMiCOM some products are available with a feature called InterMiCOM64 IM64 The functionality and assignment of commands in InterMiCOM and InterMiCOM64 are similar but they act independently and ar...

Page 529: ...M COMMS column The value set in the Source Address of the transmitting device should match that set in the Receive Address of the receiving device For example set Source Address to 1 at a local terminal and set Receive Address to 1 at the remote terminal The Source Address and Receive Address settings in the device should be set to different values to avoid false operation under inadvertent loopba...

Page 530: ...e PSL Note When an Electrical InterMiCOM signal is sent from a local terminal only the remote terminal will react to the command The local terminal will only react to commands initiated at the remote terminal Chapter 20 Electrical Teleprotection P446SV 498 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 531: ...connection the maximum baud rate can generally be used 6 2 LONG DISTANCE EIA RS 232 is suitable for short distance connections only less than 15m Where this limitation is a problem direct connection between devices is not possible For this case inter device connections should be made as shown below the figure below E02523 DCD RxD TxD DTR GND RTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 DCD RxD TxD GND DCD RxD TxD GND IE...

Page 532: ... of disruption Taking into account these factors we recommend a maximum baud rate setting of 9600 bps As baud rates decrease communications become more robust with fewer interruptions but overall signalling times increase At slower baud rates the choice of signalling mode becomes significant You should also consider what happens during periods of noise when message structure and content can be los...

Page 533: ...ode you should set IM FrameSyncTim greater than those listed above If you set IM FrameSyncTim lower than the minimum setting listed above the device could interpret a valid change in a message as a corrupted message We recommend a setting of 25 for the communications failure alarm P446SV Chapter 20 Electrical Teleprotection P446SV TM EN 1 501 ...

Page 534: ...Chapter 20 Electrical Teleprotection P446SV 502 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 535: ...CHAPTER 21 COMMUNICATIONS ...

Page 536: ...Chapter 21 Communications P446SV 504 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 537: ...ic Devices for the substation IEDs As standard all products support rugged serial communications for SCADA and SAS applications By option any product can support Ethernet communications for more advanced SCADA and SAS applications This chapter contains the following sections Chapter Overview 505 Communication Interfaces 506 Serial Communication 507 Standard Ethernet Communication 510 Redundant Eth...

Page 538: ...der option Rear Port 1 RP1 fibre Optional Fibre SCADA Remote settings Courier MODBUS IEC60870 5 103 DNP3 0 order option Rear Port 2 RP2 Optional RS232 RS485 K Bus SCADA Remote settings SK4 Courier only SK5 InterMicom only Ethernet Optional Ethernet IEC 61850 or DNP3 Remote settings IEC 61850 Courier tunnelled or DNP3 0 order option Note Optional communications boards are always fitted into slot A ...

Page 539: ...e connection is reversed The RS485 bus must be terminated at each end with 120 Ω 0 5 W terminating resistors between the signal wires The RS485 standard requires that each device be directly connected to the actual bus Stubs and tees are forbidden Loop bus and Star topologies are not part of the RS485 standard and are also forbidden Two core screened twisted pair cable should be used The final cab...

Page 540: ...he bus 3 3 K BUS K Bus is a robust signalling method based on RS485 voltage levels K Bus incorporates message framing based on a 64 kbps synchronous HDLC protocol with FM0 modulation to increase speed and security The rear interface is used to provide a permanent connection for K Bus which allows multi drop connection A K Bus spur consists of up to 32 IEDs connected together in a multi drop arrang...

Page 541: ...ote communication using K Bus Note An RS232 USB converter is only needed if the local computer does not provide an RS232 port Further information about K Bus is available in the publication R6509 K Bus Interface Guide which is available on request P446SV Chapter 21 Communications P446SV TM EN 1 509 ...

Page 542: ...n also be made to a 10Base T or a 100Base TX Ethernet switch using the RJ45 port 4 1 HOT STANDBY ETHERNET FAILOVER This is used for products which are fitted with a standard Ethernet board The standard Ethernet board has one fibre and one copper interface If there is a fault on the fibre channel it can switch to the copper channel or vice versa When this function detects a link failure it generate...

Page 543: ...n path to another without noticeable consequences Standard protocols of the time could not meet the demanding requirements of network availability for substation automation solutions Switch over times were unacceptably long For this reason companies developed proprietary protocols More recently however standard protocols which support bumpless redundancy namely PRP and HSR have been developed and ...

Page 544: ...ceived on both ports Devices such as printers that have a single Ethernet port can be connected to either of the networks but will not directly benefit from the PRP principles Such devices are called Singly Attached Nodes SAN For devices with a single Ethernet port that need to connect to both LANs this can be achieved by employing Ethernet Redundancy Boxes sometimes abbreviated to RedBox Devices ...

Page 545: ...only in their sequence number which is used to identify one frame from the other Each frame is sent to the network via a separate port The destination DANH receives two identical frames removes the HSR tag of the first frame received and passes this frame D on for processing The other duplicate frame is discarded The nodes forward frames from one port to the other unless it was the node that injec...

Page 546: ...ingly Attached Nodes D frame Destination V01031 Figure 270 HSR unicast topology For unicast frames the whole bandwidth is available as both frames A B stop at the destination node 5 3 3 HSR APPLICATION IN THE SUBSTATION Chapter 21 Communications P446SV 514 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 547: ...ts managed by RSTP blocking function Ring connection managed by RST P blocking function on upper switches and IEDs interconnected directly Figure 272 IED attached to redundant Ethernet star or ring circuit The RSTP implementation in this product is compatible with any devices that use RSTP RSTP can recover network faults quickly but the fault recovery time depends on the number of devices on the n...

Page 548: ...f Healing Management function SHM manages the ring Under healthy conditions frames are sent on the main ring primary fibre in one direction with short check frames being sent every 5 μs in the opposite direction on the back up ring secondary fibre If the main ring breaks the SHMs at either side of the break start the network self healing On one side of the break received messages are no longer sen...

Page 549: ...o devices is broken the network continues to operate correctly The Dual Homing Manager DHM handles topologies where a device is connected to two independent networks one being the main path the other being the backup path Both are active at the same time Internet frames from a sending device are sent by the DHM to both networks Receiving devices apply a duplicate discard principle This means that ...

Page 550: ...Dual homing SWD21x Dual homing SWD21x V01015 Modified frames from network1 Modified frames from network2 No modified frames Network 1 Network 2 Figure 276 Dual homing mechanism The H36x is a repeater with a standard 802 3 Ethernet switch plus the DHM Chapter 21 Communications P446SV 518 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 551: ...work that uses the Internet Protocol IP for communication between nodes IP addresses are stored as binary numbers but they are represented using Decimal Dot Notation where four sets of decimal numbers are separated by dots as follows XXX XXX XXX XXX For example 10 86 254 85 An IP address in a network is usually associated with a subnet mask The subnet mask defines which network the device belongs ...

Page 552: ...P address must be configured before connecting the IED to the network to avoid an IP address conflict The way you configure the IP address depends on the redundancy protocol you have chosen PRP HSR If using PRP or HSR you configure the REB IP address using the PRP HSR Configurator software RSTP If using RSTP you configure the REB IP address using the PRP HSR Configurator software SHP or DHP If usi...

Page 553: ...to the ANSI ESD 20 20 2007 standard 4 Wear a 1 MΩ earth strap and connect it to the earth ground point on the back of the IED E01019 5 Lift the upper and lower flaps Remove the six screws securing the front panel and pull the front panel outwards E01020 P446SV Chapter 21 Communications P446SV TM EN 1 521 ...

Page 554: ...5 8 Once you have set the IP address reassemble the IED following theses instructions in the reverse order Warning Take care not to damage the pins of the ribbon cable connector on the front panel when reinserting the ribbon cable 5 8 PRP HSR CONFIGURATOR The PRP HSR Configurator tool is intended for MiCOM Px4x IEDs with redundant Ethernet using PRP Parallel Redundancy Protocol or HSR High availab...

Page 555: ...urator 1 Double click the WinPcap installer 2 Double click the Configurator installer 3 Click Next and follow the on screen instructions 5 8 3 STARTING THE CONFIGURATOR To start the configurator 1 Select the Configurator from the Windows Programs menu 2 The Login screen appears For user mode login enter the Login name as User and click OK with no password 3 If the login screen does not appear chec...

Page 556: ...C 61850 IP address 3 The board network address is updated and displayed in the main window 5 8 7 SNTP IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION To Configure the SNTP server IP address 1 From the main window click the SNTP Config button The Device setup screen appears 2 Enter the required MAC SNTP address and server IP SNTP Address Click OK 3 The updated MAC and IP SNTP addresses appear in the main screen 5 8 8 CHE...

Page 557: ...Time This is the time after which an entry is removed from the duplicates Node Reboot Interval This is the minimum time during which a node that reboots remains silent 5 8 11 FILTERING DATABASE The Filtering Database is used to determine how frames are forwarded or filtered across the on board Ethernet switch Filtering information specifies the set of ports to which frames received from a specific...

Page 558: ... table and apply the filter Update Table This updates the MAC table according to the filtering range entered in the MAC address range boxes Apply Filter This applies the filtering configuration in the MAC table to the HSR PRP board 5 8 12 END OF SESSION To finish the session 1 In the main window click the Quit button a new screen appears 2 If a database backup is required click Yes a new screen ap...

Page 559: ...nfigurator from the Windows Programs menu 2 The Login screen appears For user mode login enter the Login name as User and click OK with no password 3 If the login screen does not appear check all network connections 4 The main window appears In the bottom right hand corner of the main window click the Language button to select the language 5 The Network Board drop down list shows the Network Board...

Page 560: ...C SNTP address and server IP SNTP Address Click OK 3 The updated MAC and IP SNTP addresses appear in the main screen 5 9 7 CHECK FOR CONNECTED EQUIPMENT To check what devices are connected to the device being monitored 1 From the main window select the device 2 Click the Equipment button 3 At the bottom of the main window a box shows the ports where devices are connected and their MAC addresses 5 ...

Page 561: ...s 2 Select the Port Parameters tab then click Get Parameters to read the port parameters Alternatively select the port numbers to read the parameters 5 9 8 3 PORT STATES This is used to see which ports of the board are enabled or disabled 1 From the main window click the device address to select the device The RSTP Config window appears 2 Select the Port States tab then click the Get Port States b...

Page 562: ...m has developed its own Redundancy ring and star mechanisms using two specific Ethernet ports of the redundant switches This redundancy works between Alstom switches of the same type The two redundant Ethernet connections between Alstom switches create one private redundant Ethernet LAN The Ethernet ports dedicated to the redundancy are optical Ethernet ports The Alstom redundancy mechanism uses a...

Page 563: ...r the required board IP address The first two octets can be configured The third octet is always 254 The last octet is set using the DIP switches SW2 on the redundant Ethernet board next to the ribbon connector 3 Click OK The board network address is updated and displayed in the main window 4 From the main window click the SNTP Config button The Device setup screen appears 5 Enter the required MAC...

Page 564: ...mmunication only between some Ethernet physical ports Ports on the switch can be grouped into Physical VLANs to limit traffic flooding This is because it is limited to ports belonging to that VLAN and not to other ports Port based VLANs are VLANs where the packet forwarding decision is based on the destination MAC address and its associated port You must define outgoing ports allowed for each port...

Page 565: ... a network workstation server router bridge etc maintains a MIB that reflects the status of the managed resources on that system such as the version of the software running on the device the IP address assigned to a port or interface the amount of free hard drive space or the number of open files The MIB does not contain static data but is instead an object oriented dynamic database that provides ...

Page 566: ...SE IED Missing YES 10 Intermicom loopback YES 11 Intermicom message fail YES 12 Intermicom data CD fail YES 13 Intermicom Channel fail YES 14 Backup setting fail YES 15 User Curve commit to flash failure YES 16 SNTP time Sync fail YES 17 PTP failure alarm YES 4 Device Mode 1 IED Mod Beh YES 2 Simulation Mode of Subscription YES 6 3 REDUNDANT ETHERNET BOARD MIB STRUCTURE The Redundant Ethernet boar...

Page 567: ...Pkts256to511Octets 18 etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets MIB structure for PRP HSR Address Name 0 ITU 1 ISO 0 Standard 62439 IECHighavailibility 3 PRP 1 linkRedundancyEntityObjects 0 lreConfiguration 0 lreConfigurationGeneralGroup 1 lreManufacturerName 2 lreInterfaceCount 1 lreConfigurationInterfaceGroup 0 lreConfigurationInterfaces 1 lreInterfaceConfigTable 1 lreInterfaceConfigEntry 1 lreInterfaceConf...

Page 568: ... 1 lreStatistics 1 lreStatisticsInterfaceGroup 0 lreStatisticsInterfaces 1 lreInterfaceStatsTable 1 lreInterfaceStatsIndex 2 lreCntTotalSentA 3 lreCntTotalSentB 4 lreCntErrWrongLANA 5 lreCntErrWrongLANB 6 lreCntReceivedA 7 lreCntReceivedB 8 lreCntErrorsA 9 lreCntErrorsB 10 lreCntNodes 11 IreOwnRxCntA 12 IreOwnRxCntB 3 lreProxyNodeTable 1 lreProxyNodeEntry 1 reProxyNodeIndex 2 reProxyNodeMacAddress...

Page 569: ...tOctets 17 ifOutUcastPkts 18 ifOutNUcastPkts 19 ifOutDiscards 20 ifOutErrors 21 ifOutQLen 22 ifSpecific 16 rmon 1 statistics 1 etherStatsTable 1 etherStatsEntry 1 etherStatsIndex 2 etherStatsDataSource 3 etherStatsDropEvents 4 etherStatsOctets 5 etherStatsPkts 6 etherStatsBroadcastPkts 7 etherStatsMulticastPkts 8 etherStatsCRCAlignErrors 9 etherStatsUndersizePkts 10 etherStatsOversizePkts 11 ether...

Page 570: ...el Two different versions are available SNMPv2c and SNMPv3 To enable the main processor SNMP interface 1 Select the COMMUNICATIONS column and scroll to the SNMP PARAMETERS heading 2 You can select either v2C V3 or both Selecting None will disable the main processor SNMP interface SNMP Trap Configuration SNMP traps allow for unsolicited reporting between the IED and up to two SNMP managers with uni...

Page 571: ... the Auth Password setting enter the 8 character password to be used by the IED for authentication 4 If privacy is enabled use the Encrypt Protocol setting to set the 8 character password that will be used by the IED for encryption SNMP V2C Security Configuration SNMPv2c implements authentication between the master and agent using a parameter called the Community Name This is effectively the passw...

Page 572: ...or situations where the level of information contained in this manual is insufficient further publications R6511 and R6512 containing in depth details about the protocol and its use are available on request Courier is an General Electric proprietary communication protocol Courier uses a standard set of commands to access a database of settings and data in the IED This allows a master to communicat...

Page 573: ...at the cell is settable and returns the limits 1 Preload Setting This places a new value into the cell This value is echoed to ensure that setting corruption has not taken place The validity of the setting is not checked by this action 2 Execute Setting This confirms the setting change If the change is valid a positive response is returned If the setting change fails an error response is returned ...

Page 574: ...set the number of stored events For simple event records Type 0 cells 0102 to 0105 contain the event details A single cell is used to represent each of the event fields If the event selected is a fault or maintenance record Type 3 the remainder of the column contains the additional information Fault Record Selection Select Fault cell 0105 This cell can be used to select a fault record directly usi...

Page 575: ...ings can be uploaded from and downloaded to the IED using the block transfer mechanism The following cells are used to perform the extraction Domain cell B204 Used to select either PSL settings upload or download or PSL configuration data upload only Sub Domain cell B208 Used to select the Protection Setting Group to be uploaded or downloaded Version cell B20C Used on a download to check the compa...

Page 576: ...efault which has to be changed It is important that no two IEDs share the same address COMMUNICATIONS RP1 Address 100 5 Move down to the next cell RP1 InactivTimer This cell controls the inactivity timer The inactivity timer controls how long the IED waits without receiving any messages on the rear port before revoking any password access that was enabled and discarding any changes For the rear po...

Page 577: ...Px40 platform It is not a description of the standard itself The level at which this section is written assumes that the reader is already familiar with the IEC 60870 5 103 standard This section should provide sufficient detail to enable understanding of the standard at a level required by most users The IEC 60870 5 103 interface is a master slave interface with the device as the slave device The ...

Page 578: ...e time synchronization message is sent as a send confirm or a broadcast send no reply message If the clock is being synchronized using the IRIG B input then it will not be possible to set the device time using the IEC 60870 5 103 interface An attempt to set the time via the interface will cause the device to create an event with the current date and time taken from the IRIG B synchronized internal...

Page 579: ...0870 5 103 CONFIGURATION To configure the device 1 Select the CONFIGURATION column and check that the Comms settings cell is set to Visible 2 Select the COMMUNICATIONS column 3 Move to the first cell down RP1 protocol This is a non settable cell which shows the chosen communication protocol in this case IEC 60870 5 103 COMMUNICATIONS RP1 Protocol IEC 60870 5 103 4 Move down to the next cell RP1 Ad...

Page 580: ...ommands will be ignored i e CB Trip Close change setting group etc When in this mode the device returns a negative acknowledgement of command message to the master station 7 3 DNP 3 0 This section describes how the DNP 3 0 standard is applied in the product It is not a description of the standard itself The level at which this section is written assumes that the reader is already familiar with the...

Page 581: ... 3 0 point data These can be used to cross reference to the DDB definition list See the relevant Menu Database document The binary input points can also be read as change events using Object 2 and Object 60 for class 1 3 event data 7 3 3 OBJECT 10 BINARY OUTPUTS Object 10 binary outputs contains commands that can be operated using DNP 3 0 Therefore the points accept commands of type pulse on null ...

Page 582: ...d as their present running value from Object 20 or as a frozen value from Object 21 The running counters of object 20 accept the read freeze and clear functions The freeze function takes the current value of the object 20 running counter and stores it in the corresponding Object 21 frozen counter The freeze and clear function resets the Object 20 running counter to zero after freezing its value Bi...

Page 583: ... be possible to set the device time using the Courier interface An attempt to set the time using the interface will cause the device to create an event with the current date and time taken from the IRIG B synchronized internal clock 7 3 8 DNP3 DEVICE PROFILE This section describes the specific implementation of DNP version 3 0 within General Electric MiCOM P40 Agile IEDs for both compact and modul...

Page 584: ...tial file transfer Object 70 variations 2 through 7 are supported Device Attribute Object 0 is supported Maximum Data Link Frame Size octets Transmitted 292 Received 292 Maximum Application Fragment Size octets Transmitted Configurable 100 to 2048 Default 2048 Received 249 Maximum Data Link Retries Fixed at 2 Maximum Application Layer Retries None Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation Configurable...

Page 585: ...nsfer Support Append File Mode No Custom Status Code Strings No Permissions Field Yes File Events Assigned to Class No File Events Send Immediately Yes Multiple Blocks in a Fragment No Max Number of Files Open 1 7 3 8 2 DNP3 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE The implementation table provides a list of objects variations and control codes supported by the device Object Request Library will parse Response Librar...

Page 586: ... 1 read 00 01 06 07 08 17 27 28 start stop no range or all limited qty index 129 response 00 01 17 28 start stop index see note 2 20 5 default see note 1 32 Bit Binary Counter without Flag 1 read 00 01 06 07 08 17 27 28 start stop no range or all limited qty index 129 response 00 01 17 28 start stop index see note 2 20 6 16 Bit Binary Counter without Flag 1 read 00 01 06 07 08 17 27 28 start stop ...

Page 587: ...0 01 06 07 08 17 27 28 start stop no range or all limited qty index 30 1 32 Bit Analog Input 1 read 00 01 06 07 08 17 27 28 start stop no range or all limited qty index 129 response 00 01 17 28 start stop index see note 2 30 2 16 Bit Analog Input 1 read 00 01 06 07 08 17 27 28 start stop no range or all limited qty index 129 response 00 01 17 28 start stop index see note 2 30 3 default see note 1 ...

Page 588: ...1 default see note 1 32 Bit Analog Output Status 1 read 00 01 06 07 08 17 27 28 start stop no range or all limited qty index 129 response 00 01 17 28 start stop index see note 2 40 2 16 Bit Analog Output Status 1 read 00 01 06 07 08 17 27 28 start stop no range or all limited qty index 129 response 00 01 17 28 start stop index see note 2 40 3 Short Floating Point Analog Output Status 1 read 00 01 ...

Page 589: ...nt objects qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded to when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 respectively Otherwise static object requests sent with qualifiers 00 01 06 07 or 08 will be responded to with qualifiers 00 or 01 For change event objects qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded to 7 3 8 3 DNP3 INTERNAL INDICATIONS The following table lists the DNP3 0 Internal Indications IIN and...

Page 590: ... the device software application restarts This IIN is cleared when the master station explicitly writes a 0 into this bit of the Internal Indications object Yes Octet 2 0 Function code not implemented The received function code is not implemented within the relay Yes 1 Requested object s unknown The relay does not have the specified objects or there are no objects assigned to the requested class T...

Page 591: ... authorized The request has not been accepted because of insufficient authorization 127 Undefined The request not been accepted because of some other undefined reason Note Code numbers 10 through to 126 are reserved for future use 7 3 9 DNP3 CONFIGURATION To configure the device 1 Select the CONFIGURATION column and check that the Comms settings cell is set to Visible 2 Select the COMMUNICATIONS c...

Page 592: ...is complete To restore the default configuration at any time from the CONFIGURATION column select the Restore Defaults cell then select All Settings In MiCOM S1 Agile the DNP3 0 data is shown in three main folders one folder each for the point configuration integer scaling and default variation data format The point configuration also includes screens for binary inputs binary outputs counters and ...

Page 593: ...ry day use There is a wide range of Ethernet compatible products that may be used to supplement the LAN installation hubs bridges switches 7 4 2 IEC 61850 INTEROPERABILITY A major benefit of IEC 61850 is interoperability IEC 61850 standardizes the data model of substation IEDs which allows interoperability between products from multiple vendors An IEC 61850 compliant device may be interoperable bu...

Page 594: ...d by an instance number For example XCBR1 circuit breaker MMXU1 measurements FrqPTOF2 overfrequency protection stage 2 Data Object This next layer is used to identify the type of data you will be presented with For example Pos position of Logical Node type XCBR Data Attribute This is the actual data measurement value status description etc For example stVal status value indicating actual position ...

Page 595: ...n the Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement PICS document which is available as a separate document 7 4 7 IEC 61850 PEER TO PEER GOOSE COMMUNICATIONS The implementation of IEC 61850 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event GOOSE enables faster communication between IEDs offering the possibility for a fast and reliable system wide distribution of input and output data values The GOOSE model...

Page 596: ...use the IEC 61850 Configurator which is part of the settings application software If the device is compatible with edition 2 however you can configure it with the HMI To configure IEC61850 edition 2 using the HMI you must first enable the IP From HMI setting after which you can set the media copper or fibre IP address subnet mask and gateway address IEC 61850 allows IEDs to be directly configured ...

Page 597: ...Network must be unique Duplicate IP addresses result in conflict and must be avoided Most IEDs check for a conflict on every IP configuration change and at power up and they raise an alarm if an IP conflict is detected The IED can be configured to accept data from other networks using the Gateway setting If multiple networks are used the IP addresses must be unique across networks 7 4 11 IEC 61850...

Page 598: ...rd compatibility issues 7 4 11 2 EDITION 2 COMMON DATA CLASSES The following common data classes CDCs are new to Edition 2 and therefore should not be used in GOOSE control blocks in mixed Edition 1 and Edition 2 systems Histogram HST Visible string status VSS Object reference setting ORG Controllable enumerated status ENC Controllable analogue process value APC Binary controlled analogue process ...

Page 599: ...d freely on the process bus across the substation and between different devices without any additional wiring This is because there are no longer any electrical connections to instruments transformers that restrict the location of IEDs The new IEC 61850 Edition 2 test modes enable the introduction of standby protection IEDs at any location within the substation which has access to both station and...

Page 600: ...he IED into the Test Blocked mode as defined in IEC 61850 7 4 Edition Two This allows test signals to be injected into the network which will check that the configuration is correct GOOSE signals issued by the device will be flagged as test so that subscribing switchgear controllers know not to trip during this testing In this way the protection can be tested all the way up to the switchgear contr...

Page 601: ...CB open close Control Inputs The following commands are still allowed Poll Class 1 Read spontaneous events Poll Class 2 Read measurands GI sequence ASDU7 Start GI Poll Class 1 Transmission of Disturbance Records sequence ASDU24 ASDU25 Poll Class 1 Time Synchronisation ASDU6 General Commands ASDU20 namely INF23 activate characteristic 1 INF24 activate characteristic 2 INF25 activate characteristic ...

Page 602: ...es measurands Generate reports Extract disturbance records Time synchronisation Change active setting group 8 4 READ ONLY SETTINGS The following settings are available for enabling or disabling Read Only Mode RP1 Read Only RP2 Read Only only for products that have RP2 NIC Read Only where Ethernet is available 8 5 READ ONLY DDB SIGNALS The remote read only mode is also available in the PSL using th...

Page 603: ...is picked up by a satellite dish and passed on to receiver The receiver receives the signal and converts it into time signal suitable for the substation network IEDs in the substation use this signal to govern their internal clocks and event recorders IED IED IED Receiver Satellite dish GPS time signal GPS satellite V01040 IRIG B Figure 287 GPS Satellite timing signal The IRIG B time code signal i...

Page 604: ... poll rate in the cells SNTP Server 1 SNTP Server 2 and SNTP Poll rate respectively The SNTP time synchronisation status is displayed in the SNTP Status cell in the DATE AND TIME column 9 2 1 LOSS OF SNTP SERVER SIGNAL ALARM This function issues an alarm when there is a loss of time synchronization on the SNTP server It is issued when the SNTP sever has not detected a valid time synchronisation re...

Page 605: ...isation within each grouped set 9 4 TIME SYNCHRONSIATION USING THE COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS All communication protocols have in built time synchronisation mechanisms If an external time synchronisation mechanism such as IRIG B SNTP or IEEE 1588 PTP is not used to synchronise the devices the time synchronisation mechanism within the relevant serial protocol is used The real time is usually defined i...

Page 606: ...Chapter 21 Communications P446SV 574 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 607: ...CHAPTER 22 CYBER SECURITY ...

Page 608: ...Chapter 22 Cyber Security P446SV 576 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 609: ...devices within substations use standardised protocols for communication Furthermore substations can be interconnected with open networks such as the internet or corporate wide networks which use standardised protocols for communication This introduces a major security risk making the grid vulnerable to cyber attacks which could in turn lead to major electrical outages Clearly there is now a need t...

Page 610: ...g cyber attacks by hackers Good cyber security can be achieved with a range of measures such as closing down vulnerability loopholes implementing adequate security processes and procedures and providing technology to help achieve this Examples of vulnerabilities are Indiscretions by personnel users keep passwords on their computer Bad practice users do not change default passwords or everyone uses...

Page 611: ...sets which control or have an influence on the reliability of North America s electricity generation and distribution systems These standards have been compulsory in the USA for several years now Compliance auditing started in June 2007 and utilities face extremely heavy fines for non compliance NERC CIP standards CIP standard Description CIP 002 1 Critical Cyber Assets Define and document the Cri...

Page 612: ...by providing a section in the documentation where it describes changes affecting the hardware and software 3 1 3 CIP 004 CIP 004 requires that personnel with authorized cyber access or authorized physical access to Critical Cyber Assets including contractors and service vendors have an appropriate level of training Power utility responsibilities General Electric s contribution To provide appropria...

Page 613: ...ent monitors and logs access 3 1 7 CIP 008 CIP 008 requires that an incident response plan be developed including the definition of an incident response team their responsibilities and associated procedures Power utility responsibilities General Electric s contribution To provide an incident response team and have appropriate processes in place General Electric cannot provide additional help with ...

Page 614: ...they occur held in a circular buffer Records contain all defined fields from the standard and record all defined function event types where the function is supported No password defeat mechanism exists Instead a secure recovery password scheme is implemented Unused ports physical and logical may be disabled Chapter 22 Cyber Security P446SV 582 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 615: ...password security Password recovery procedure Disabling of unused physical and logical ports Inactivity timer Security events management External to the IEDs the following cyber security measures have been implemented Antivirus Security patch management 4 1 NERC COMPLIANT DISPLAY For the device to be NERC compliant it must provide the option for a NERC compliant default display The default display...

Page 616: ...aning Read Operation Write Operation 0 Read Some Write Minimal SYSTEM DATA column Description Plant Reference Model Number Serial Number S W Ref Access Level Security Feature SECURITY CONFIG column User Banner Attempts Remain Blk Time Remain Fallback PW level Security Code UI only Password Entry LCD Contrast UI only 1 Read All Write Few All data and settings are readable Poll Measurements All item...

Page 617: ...vel 3 password setting 4 2 1 BLANK PASSWORDS A blank password is effectively a zero length password Through the front panel it is entered by confirming the password entry without actually entering any password characters Through a communications port the Courier and Modbus protocols each have a means of writing a blank password to the IED A blank password disables the need for a password at the le...

Page 618: ...DDB signals HMI Access Lvl 1 HMI Access Lvl 2 FPort AccessLvl1 FPort AccessLvl2 RPrt1 AccessLvl1 RPrt1 AccessLvl2 RPrt2 AccessLvl1 RPrt2 AccessLvl2 Each pair of DDB signals indicates the access level as follows Level 1 off Level 2 off 0 Level 1 on Level 2 off 1 Level 1 off Level 2 on 2 Level 1 on Level 2 on 3 Key HMI Human Machine Interface FPort Front Port RPrt Rear Port Lvl Level 4 3 ENHANCED PA...

Page 619: ...ncy status You can then choose to enter a new NERC compliant password or accept the non NERC compliant password just entered 4 3 3 PASSWORD BLOCKING You are locked out temporarily after a defined number of failed password entry attempts Each invalid password entry attempt decrements the Attempts Remain data cell by 1 When the maximum number of attempts has been reached access is blocked If the att...

Page 620: ...y of validity timer see below When the recovery password is entered As soon as the security code is displayed on the LCD a validity timer is started This validity timer is set to 72 hours and is not configurable This provides enough time for the contact centre to manually generate and send a recovery password The Service Level Agreement SLA for recovery password generation is one working day so 72...

Page 621: ...le to disable unused physical ports A level 3 password is needed to perform this action To prevent accidental disabling of a port a warning message is displayed according to whichever port is required to be disabled For example if rear port 1 is to be disabled the following message appears REAR PORT 1 TO BE DISABLED CONFIRM The following ports can be disabled depending on the model Front port Fron...

Page 622: ...GGED OUT ON int LEVEL n PASSWORD SET BLANK P WORD SET BLANK BY int LEVEL p PASSWORD SET NON COMPLIANT P WORD NOT NERC BY int LEVEL p PASSWORD MODIFIED PASSWORD CHANGED BY int LEVEL p PASSWORD ENTRY BLOCKED PASSWORD BLOCKED ON int PASSWORD ENTRY UNBLOCKED P WORD UNBLOCKED ON int INVALID PASSWORD ENTERED INV P W ENTERED ON int PASSWORD EXPIRED P WORD EXPIRED ON int PASSWORD ENTERED WHILE BLOCKED P W...

Page 623: ...IG UPLOADED IED CONFG UPLOAD BY int USER CURVES UPLOADED USER CRV UPLOAD BY int GROUP crv PSL CONFIG UPLOADED PSL CONFG UPLOAD BY int GROUP grp SETTINGS UPLOADED SETTINGS UPLOAD BY int GROUP grp EVENTS HAVE BEEN EXTRACTED EVENTS EXTRACTED BY int nov EVNTS ACTIVE GROUP CHANGED ACTIVE GRP CHNGE BY int GROUP grp CS SETTINGS CHANGED C S CHANGED BY int DR SETTINGS CHANGED DR CHANGED BY int SETTING GROU...

Page 624: ...n configuring the IED you should log out Do this by going up to the top of the menu tree When you are at the Column Heading level and you press the Up button you may be prompted to log out with the following display DO YOU WANT TO LOG OUT You will only be asked this question if your password level is higher than the fallback level If you confirm the following message is displayed for 2 seconds LOG...

Page 625: ...CHAPTER 23 INSTALLATION ...

Page 626: ...Chapter 23 Installation P446SV 594 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 627: ...ormation about installing the product This chapter contains the following sections Chapter Overview 595 Handling the Goods 596 Mounting the Device 597 Cables and Connectors 600 Case Dimensions 604 P446SV Chapter 23 Installation P446SV TM EN 1 595 ...

Page 628: ...tion work 2 3 STORING THE GOODS If the unit is not installed immediately store it in a place free from dust and moisture in its original packaging Keep any de humidifier bags included in the packing The de humidifier crystals lose their efficiency if the bag is exposed to ambient conditions Restore the crystals before replacing it in the carton Ideally regeneration should be carried out in a venti...

Page 629: ...rect operation during installation open the lower access cover hold the battery in place and pull the red tab to remove the battery isolation strip V01412 Figure 290 Location of battery isolation strip 3 1 FLUSH PANEL MOUNTING Panel mounted devices are flush mounted into panels using M4 SEMS Taptite self tapping screws with captive 3 mm thick washers also known as a SEMS unit Caution Do not use co...

Page 630: ...nown as a SEMS unit Caution Risk of damage to the front cover molding Do not use conventional self tapping screws including those supplied for mounting MiDOS products because they have slightly larger heads Once the tier is complete the frames are fastened into the racks using mounting angles at each end of the tier Figure 291 Rack mounting of products Products can be mechanically grouped into sin...

Page 631: ...Case size summation Blanking plate part number 15TE GJ2028 103 20TE GJ2028 104 25TE GJ2028 105 30TE GJ2028 106 35TE GJ2028 107 40TE GJ2028 108 P446SV Chapter 23 Installation P446SV TM EN 1 599 ...

Page 632: ...cks for CT and VT circuits Medium duty MD terminal blocks for the power supply relay outputs and rear communications port MiDOS terminal blocks for CT and VT circuits RTD CLIO terminal block for connection to analogue transducers Figure 292 Terminal block types MiCOM products are supplied with sufficient M4 screws for making connections to the rear mounted terminal blocks using ring terminals with...

Page 633: ...asher between the conductor and the product case or using tinned ring terminals 4 4 WATCHDOG CONNECTIONS These should be wired with 1 mm PVC insulated multi stranded copper wire terminated with M4 ring terminals The wire should have a minimum voltage rating of 300 V RMS 4 5 EIA RS 485 AND K BUS CONNECTIONS For connecting the EIA RS485 K Bus ports use 2 core screened cable with a maximum total leng...

Page 634: ...the device has a metallic Ethernet connection it can be connected to either a 10Base T or a 100Base TX Ethernet hub Due to noise sensitivity we recommend this type of connection only for short distance connections ideally where the products and hubs are in the same cubicle For increased noise immunity CAT 6 category 6 STP shielded twisted pair cable and connectors can be used The connector for the...

Page 635: ...ated at the product end with a 25 pin D type male connector 4 13 GPS FIBRE CONNECTION Some products use a GPS 1 PPS timing signal If applicable this is connected to a fibre optic port on the coprocessor board in slot B The fibre optic port uses an ST type connector compatible with fibre multimode 50 125 µm or 62 5 125 µm 850 nm 4 14 FIBRE COMMUNICATION CONNECTIONS The fibre optic port consists of ...

Page 636: ... Note If mouting plate is required use flush mounting cut out dimentions 8 off holes Dia 3 4 Sealing strip 483 19 rack All dimensons in mm Secondary cover when fitted Incl wiring Side view max 206 00 30 00 240 00 157 5 177 00 200 00 177 0 4U 202 00 181 30 10 35 159 00 23 30 155 40 168 00 A B B A B A A B Figure 293 40TE case dimensions Chapter 23 Installation P446SV 604 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 637: ...CHAPTER 24 COMMISSIONING INSTRUCTIONS ...

Page 638: ...Chapter 24 Commissioning Instructions P446SV 606 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 639: ...on 626 Setting Checks 628 IEC 61850 Edition 2 Testing 630 Distance Protection 635 Delta Directional Comparison 641 DEF Aided Schemes 644 Out of Step Protection 646 Protection Timing Checks 648 System Check and Check Synchronism 650 Check Trip and Autoreclose Cycle 651 End to End Communication Tests 652 End to End Scheme Tests 655 Onload Checks 657 Final Checks 659 Commmissioning the P59x 660 P446S...

Page 640: ...heck the settings by extracting them using the settings application software or by means of the front panel interface HMI panel The menu language is user selectable so you can change it for commissioning purposes if required Note Remember to restore the language setting to the customer s preferred language on completion Caution Before carrying out any work on the equipment you should be familiar w...

Page 641: ...n the Test Mode cell is set to Contacts Blocked the relay output status indicates which contacts would operate if the IED was in service It does not show the actual status of the output relays as they are blocked 3 3 TEST PORT STATUS CELL This cell displays the status of the DDB signals that have been allocated in the Monitor Bit cells If you move the cursor along the binary numbers the correspond...

Page 642: ...ing with one bit for each user configurable output contact which can be set to 1 to operate the output and 0 to not operate it 3 7 CONTACT TEST CELL When the Apply Test command in this cell is issued the contacts set for operation change state Once the test has been applied the command text on the LCD will change to No Operation and the contacts will remain in the Test state until reset by issuing...

Page 643: ...rrent or voltage would be used The rate of rise of current and DC components A complete set of three phase analogue inputs Real dynamic step changes in current and voltage Some of the protection in this product is based on delta techniques which recognise step changes in actual power system quantities Because these may not be produced by static test sets certain functions are can be disabled or by...

Page 644: ...LEDs are illuminated when accessing from a remote location A 1 indicates that a particular LED is illuminated Note When the status in both Red LED Status and Green LED Status cells is 1 this indicates the LEDs illumination is yellow 3 15 USING A MONITOR PORT TEST BOX A test box containing eight LEDs and a switchable audible indicator is available It is housed in a small plastic box with a 25 pin m...

Page 645: ...nditions to generate delta conditions Dynamic impedance state sequencer capable of sequencing through 4 impedance states Integrated or separate variable DC supply 0 250 V Integrated or separate AC and DC measurement capabilities 0 440V AC 0 250V DC Integrated and or separate timer Integrated and or separate test switches In addition you will need A portable computer installed with appropriate soft...

Page 646: ...T EQUIPMENT Advisory test equipment may be required for extended commissioning procedures Current clamp meter Multi finger test plug P992 for test block type P991 MMLB for test block type MMLG blocks Electronic or brushless insulation tester with a DC output not exceeding 500 V KITZ K Bus EIA RS 232 protocol converter for testing EIA RS 485 K Bus port EIA RS 485 to EIA RS 232 converter for testing...

Page 647: ...t be isolated from the IED for these checks If a P991 test block is provided the required isolation can be achieved by inserting test plug type P992 This open circuits all wiring routed through the test block Before inserting the test plug you should check the scheme diagram to ensure that this will not cause damage or a safety hazard the test block may for example be associated with protection cu...

Page 648: ... screws These are located two at the top and two at the bottom Note Use a magnetic bladed screwdriver to minimise the risk of the screws being left in the terminal block or lost Pull the terminal block away from the rear of the case and check with a continuity tester that all the shorting switches being used are closed 5 1 3 INSULATION Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissi...

Page 649: ...he IED or interface unit using the battery charger with the battery disconnected as this can irreparably damage the power supply circuitry Caution Energise the IED only if the auxiliary supply is within the specified operating ranges If a test block is provided it may be necessary to link across the front of the test plug to connect the auxiliary supply to the IED 5 2 PRODUCT CHECKS WITH THE IED E...

Page 650: ...s reason you must ensure you set the correct year even if the device is using IRIG B to maintain the internal clock You set the Date and Time by one of the following methods Using the front panel to set the Date and Time cells respectively By sending a courier command to the Date Time cell Courier reference 0801 Note If the auxiliary supply fails the time and date will be maintained by the auxilia...

Page 651: ... LEDS To test these LEDs set the Test LEDs cell to Apply Test Check that all user programmable LEDs illuminate 5 2 8 TEST OPTO INPUTS This test checks that all the opto inputs on the IED are functioning correctly The opto inputs should be energised one at a time For terminal numbers please see the external connection diagrams in the Wiring Diagrams chapter Ensuring correct polarity connect the sup...

Page 652: ...nnection to the port The cable screen should be connected to pin 16 and pins 17 and 18 are for the communication signal Figure 294 RP1 physical connection For K Bus applications pins 17 and 18 are not polarity sensitive and it does not matter which way round the wires are connected EIA RS 485 is polarity sensitive so you must ensure the wires are connected the correct way round pin 18 is positive ...

Page 653: ...erial port board providing additional serial connectivity It provides two 9 pin D type serial port connectors SK4 and SK5 Both ports are configured as DTE Date Terminal Equipment ports That means they can be connected to communications equipment such as a modem with a straight through cable SK4 can be configured as an EIA RS232 EIA RS485 or K Bus connection for Courier protocol only whilst SK5 is ...

Page 654: ...n the CT AND VT RATIOS column If the Local Values cell is set to Secondary the value displayed should be equal to the applied current Note If a PC connected to the IED using the rear communications port is being used to display the measured current the process will be similar However the setting of the Remote Values cell in the MEASURE T SETUP column will determine whether the displayed values are...

Page 655: ...The measurement accuracy of the IED is 1 However an additional allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used P446SV Chapter 24 Commissioning Instructions P446SV TM EN 1 623 ...

Page 656: ...tatus of the InterMiCOM loopback mode Note If INTERMICOM COMMS Loopback Mode is set to Internal only the internal software of the device is checked This is useful for testing functionality if no communications connections are made Use the External setting during commissioning because it checks both the software and hardware When the IED is switched into either Internal or External Loopback Mode it...

Page 657: ... cell are zero 6 2 2 INTERMICOM CHANNEL DIAGNOSTICS Check that the following cells in the INTERMICOM COMMS column all read OK Data CD Status FrameSync Status Message Status Channel Status 6 2 3 SIMULATING A CHANNEL FAILURE 1 Simulate a failure of the communications link by breaking a connection and checking that some of these cells show Fail 2 Restore the communications loopback and ensure that th...

Page 658: ...ed to a multiplexer the loopback testing is exactly the same whether connected directly or via a multiplexer The P590 interface units require additional tests see P590 documentation To enable IM64 set the InterMiCOM64 cell in the CONFIGURATION column to Enable Warning NEVER look directly into the transmit port or the end of an optical fibre as this could severely damage your eyes 7 1 CHECKING THE ...

Page 659: ... loopback 2 Check that MEASUREMENTS 4 IM64 Rx Status matches the test pattern set The communication statistics show the number of valid and erroneous messages received Note The propagation delay measurement is not valid in this mode of operation The IED responds as if it is connected to a remote IED It indicates a loopback alarm which can only be cleared by setting COMMISSION TESTS Loopback Mode t...

Page 660: ...ystem Explorer In this case perform a Quick Connect to the IED then manually add the settings file to the device name in the system Refer to the Settings Application Software help for details of how to do this 8 1 2 ENTERING SETTINGS USING THE HMI 1 Starting at the default display press the Down cursor key to show the first column heading 2 Use the horizontal cursor keys to select the required col...

Page 661: ...ept the new settings or press the Clear key to discard the new settings Note If the menu time out occurs before the setting changes have been confirmed the setting values are also discarded Control and support settings are updated immediately after they are entered without the Update settings prompt It is not possible to change the PSL using the IED s front panel HMI Caution Where the installation...

Page 662: ...vated or not You can select the mode of operation by Using the front panel HMI with the setting IED Test Mode under the COMMISSION TESTS column Using an IEC 61850 control service to System LLN0 Mod Using an opto input via PSL with the signal Block Contacts The following table summarises the IED behaviour under the different modes IED Test Mode Setting Result Disabled Normal IED behaviour Test Prot...

Page 663: ...his new state the IED will continue to subscribe to the simulated GOOSE 1 message in red Even if this simulated GOOSE 1 message disappears the real GOOSE 1 message in green will still not be processed This means all Virtual Inputs derived from the GOOSE 1 message will go to their default state The only way to bring the IED out of this state is to set the Subscriber Sim setting back to False The IE...

Page 664: ... received 6 Verify function based on test signal outputs Binary outputs e g CB trips will not operate All transmitted GOOSE and MMS data items will be tagged with the quality parameter set to test so that the receiver understands that they have been issued by a device under test and can respond accordingly This is summarised in the following diagram V01062 Figure 298 Test example 1 9 3 2 TEST PROC...

Page 665: ...lant 1 Set device into Contacts Blocked Mode Select COMMISSION TESTS IED Test Mode Test 2 Confirm new behaviour has been enabled View COMMISSION TESTS IED Mod Beh and check that it shows Test 3 Set device into Simulation Listening Mode Select COMMISSION TESTS Subscriber Sim Enabled 4 If using sampled values set the sampled values test mode Select IEC 61850 9 2LE SV Test Mode Enabled 5 Inject simul...

Page 666: ...cts DDB is not set and the Apply Test command in this cell is issued contacts change state and the command text on the LCD changes to No Operation The contacts remain in the Test state until reset by issuing the Remove Test command The command text on the LCD shows No Operation after the Remove Test command has been issued Note When the IED Test Mode cell is set to Contacts Blocked the Relay O P S...

Page 667: ...st block s taking care not to open circuit any CT secondary windings If using MMLG type test blocks the live side of the test plug must be provided with shorting links before it is inserted into the test block 4 When the test is complete make sure COMMISSIONING TESTS Static Test Mode is set back to Disabled 10 1 2 ZONE 1 REACH CHECK The zone 1 element is set to be directional forward 1 Apply a dyn...

Page 668: ...st described above to find the zone reach 4 Record the impedance at which the device trips The measured impedance should be within 10 of the expected reach 5 Read and reset the alarms 6 Check that the correct reverse offset Z3 has been applied The setting is in the Z3 Ph Rev Reach and Z3 Gnd Rev Reach cells 10 1 5 ZONE 4 REACH CHECK The zone 4 element is set to be directional reverse 1 Apply a dyn...

Page 669: ...pare a dynamic A phase to neutral fault as detailed above 2 Set a timer to start when the fault injection is applied and to stop when the trip occurs 3 To verify correct output contact mapping use the trip contacts that would be expected to trip the circuit breaker s Any Trip for 3 pole tripping Trip A for single pole tripping 4 For two breaker applications stop the timer when CB1 and CB2 trip con...

Page 670: ...he signalling the scheme logic may not use opto inputs for the aided scheme implementation In this case internal DDB signals need to be set or reset to test the operation of the protection scheme Use the IM64 Test Mode with the IM64 Test Pattern to assert or monitor the relevant signals Ensure that the injection test set timer is still connected to measure the time taken for the device to trip A s...

Page 671: ...pplications 1 Energise the Signal Receive opto input This is done by applying a continuous DC voltage onto the required opto input from the test set or station battery 2 Inject an end of line fault and record the operating time The measured operating time should typically be less than 20 ms for 50 Hz and less than 16 7 ms for 60 Hz when set for instantaneous operation 3 Switch OFF the AC supply an...

Page 672: ...tact but is now stopped by the Signal Send contact This is the contact that would normally be connected to the pilot signalling channel 2 Inject a Zone 4 fault and record the signal send contact operating time The measured operating time should typically be less than 20 ms for 50 Hz and less than 16 7 ms for 60 Hz applications 3 Switch OFF the ACsupply and reset the alarms 10 3 6 SCHEME TIMER SETT...

Page 673: ...t situations for a conventional signalling scheme We assume a conventional signalling scheme implementation If an InterMiCOM64 scheme is used to provide the signalling the scheme logic may not use opto inputs for the aided scheme implementation In this case internal DDB signals need to be set or reset to test the operation of the protection scheme Use the IM64 Test Mode with the IM64 Test Pattern ...

Page 674: ...two breaker applications stop the timer when CB1 and CB2 trip contacts have both closed Monitor by connecting the contacts in series to stop the timer if necessary 5 Record the phase A trip time 6 Switch OFF the AC supply and reset the alarms 11 2 2 PHASE B 1 Reconfigure to test a B phase fault 2 Repeat the test this time ensuring that the breaker trip contacts relative to B phase operation close ...

Page 675: ...ded line prior to the onset of a fault 2 Simulate a reverse fault on the A phase The A phase voltage must be simulated to drop by 3 times the Dir V Rev setting Va Vn 3 Dir V Rev 3 The fault current on the A phase should be set to 3 times the DI Rev setting and in antiphase to the forward injections Ia 3 Dir I Rev Ð180 θ Line 4 Prepare the dynamic A phase reverse fault as detailed above Ensure that...

Page 676: ...ipping on A phase faults should be used 2 Connect the output relay so that its operation will trip the test set and stop the timer 3 Connect the current output of the test set to the A phase current transformer input 4 Connect all three phase voltages Va Vb and Vc 5 Depending on the test equipment used make sure the timer is set to start when the current is applied 12 1 2 PERFORM THE TEST 1 Ensure...

Page 677: ... TEST FOR PERMISSIVE SCHEMES 1 Reconnect the test set so that the timer is no longer stopped by the Trip contact but is now stopped by the Signal Send contact the contact that would normally be connected to the pilot signalling channel 2 Repeat the forward fault injection and record the Signal Send contact operating time The measured operating time should typically be less than 40 ms 3 Switch OFF ...

Page 678: ...setting Predictive OST setting Predictive and OST setting 13 1 OST SETTING 1 Clear all alarms 2 Set the OST timer to zero 3 To test OST a 4 state test sequence is required Based on healthy voltages VA VB VC 57 8 V calculate the currents to generate the impedances as below State 1 State 2 State 3 State 4 Applied current all 3 phases 57 8 1 1R6 57 8 R5 0 5 R6 R5 57 8 0 95R5 57 8 1 1R5 Angle 0 0 0 18...

Page 679: ...tate 2 State 3 Applied current all 3 phases 57 8 1 1R6 57 8 R5 0 5 R6 R5 57 8 0 95R5 Angle 0 0 0 Duration 500 ms Longer than 25 ms but shorter than Delta t set time 500 ms Now apply the 3 state sequence check that all 3 phases have tripped and that an OST alarm is displayed on the local LCD 13 3 PREDICTIVE AND OST SETTING As per Predictive OST 13 4 OST TIMER TEST 1 Repeat the test as for predictiv...

Page 680: ... test set and stop the timer 5 Connect the current output of the test set to the A phase current transformer input If the I 1 Directional cell in the OVERCURRENT column is set to Directional Fwd the current should flow out of terminal 2 If set to Directional Rev it should flow into terminal 2 If the I 1 Directional cell in the OVERCURRENT column has been set to Directional Fwd or Directional Rev t...

Page 681: ... ST Inverse 12 12 11 51 12 73 Note With the exception of the definite time characteristic the operating times given are for a Time Multiplier Setting TMS or Time Dial Setting TDS of 1 For other values of TMS or TDS the values need to be modified accordingly Note For definite time and inverse characteristics there is an additional delay of up to 0 02 second and 0 08 second respectively You may need...

Page 682: ...nd voltage magnitude compensation settings to compensate for healthy voltage angle and magnitude differences between the check sync VT input and the selected main VT reference phase These are CB1 CS VT PhShft CB1 CS VT Mag CB2 CS VT PhShft CB2 CS VT Mag Any voltage measurements or comparisons using bus VT inputs are made using the compensated values Each circuit breaker controlled can have two sta...

Page 683: ... configured for single pole tripping either set CT VT RATIO VT Connected to No or apply appropriate voltage signals to prevent the pole dead logic from converting to 3 pole tripping 1 To test the first three phase auto reclose cycle set COMMISSION TESTS Test Autoreclose to Trip 3 Pole The IED performs a trip reclose cycle 2 Repeat this operation to test the subsequent three phase auto reclose cycl...

Page 684: ...ess If it was necessary to fail the communications while testing the non current differential elements observe the communications behaviour for a few minutes before removing the loopbacks 2 After you are satisfied with the communications behaviour in loopback set COMMISSION TESTS Test Mode and Test Loopback to Disabled Note Most of the required optical signal power levels have already been measure...

Page 685: ...the P591 1 Check that all the cabling is correct 2 Verify that the Healthy LED is on For the P592 1 Set the V 35 LOOPBACK switch to the 0 position 2 Set the CLOCK SWITCH DSR CTS and DATA RATE switches on each unit to the positions required for the specific application 3 Ensure the OPTO LOOPBACK switch is in the 0 position 4 If applicable replace the secondary front cover For the P593 1 Set the X 2...

Page 686: ...ber of errored messages after a minimum period of 1 hour 4 Check that the ratio of errored good messages is better than 10 4 5 Record the measured message propagation delays for channel 1 and channel 2 if fitted Chapter 24 Commissioning Instructions P446SV 654 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 687: ...croll down and ensure that the Monitor Bit 1 cell is set to DDB493 and that the Monitor Bit 5 cell is set to DDB507 The Test Port Status cell appropriately sets or resets the bits that now represent Aided 1 Scheme Receive DDB493 and Aided 2 Scheme Receive DDB507 with the rightmost bit representing Aided Channel 1 From now on the engineer at the remote end should monitor the indication of the Test ...

Page 688: ...2 Return the device to service by setting COMMISSION TESTS Test Mode to Disabled Chapter 24 Commissioning Instructions P446SV 656 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 689: ...t flowing in the neutral circuit of the current transformers is negligible If the Local Values cell is set to Secondary the values displayed should be equal to the applied secondary voltage The values should be within 1 of the applied secondary voltages However an additional allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used If the Local Values cell is set to Primary the valu...

Page 690: ...ons For this test you must first know the actual direction of power flow on the system If you do not already know this you must determine it using adjacent instrumentation or protection already in service For load current flowing in the Forward direction power export to the remote line end the A Phase Watts cell in the MEASUREMENTS 2 column should show positive power signing For load current flowi...

Page 691: ...bled 6 If the IED is in a new installation or the circuit breaker has just been maintained the circuit breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero These counters can be reset using the Reset All Values cell If the required access level is not active the device will prompt for a password to be entered so that the setting change can be made 7 If the menu language has been changed to allo...

Page 692: ...f explicitly requested Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the insulation with an electronic or brushless insulation tester at a DC voltage not exceeding 500 V Terminals of the same circuits should be temporarily connected together The insulation resistance should be greater than 100 MW at 500 V On completion of the insulation resistance tests ensure all external wiring is correctly reconne...

Page 693: ... the LEDs has been established set all DIL switches except for the OPTO LOOPBACK switch to 0 and reconnect the V 35 connector P593 only Set the X 21 LOOPBACK switch to ON The green CLOCK and red X 21 LOOPBACK LED s should illuminate Reset the X 21 LOOPBACK switch to the OFF position Set the OPTO LOOPBACK switch to ON The red OPTO LOOPBACK LED should illuminate Do not reset the OPTO LOOPBACK switch...

Page 694: ...minals 4 and 8 P592 With the OPTO LOOPBACK switch in the 1 position the receive and transmit optical ports are connected together This allows the optical fibre communications between the IED and the P592 to be tested but not the internal circuitry of the P592 itself P593 Set the OPTO LOOPBACK switch to OFF and X 21 LOOPBACK switch to ON respectively With the X 21 LOOPBACK switch in this position t...

Page 695: ...CHAPTER 25 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING ...

Page 696: ...Chapter 25 Maintenance and Troubleshooting P446SV 664 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 697: ...e troubleshooting part of the chapter allows an error condition on the IED to be identified so that appropriate corrective action can be taken If the device develops a fault it is usually possible to identify which module needs replacing It is not possible to perform an on site repair to a faulty module If you return a faulty unit or module to the manufacturer or one of their approved service cent...

Page 698: ...ce counters For this reason maintenance checks should also be performed locally at the substation Caution Before carrying out any work on the equipment you should be familiar with the contents of the Safety Section or the Safety Guide SFTY 4LM and the ratings on the equipment s rating label 2 1 1 ALARMS First check the alarm status LED to see if any alarm conditions exist If so press the Read key ...

Page 699: ...c components Warning Before working at the rear of the device isolate all voltage and current supplying it Note The current transformer inputs are equipped with integral shorting switches which will close for safety reasons when the terminal block is removed To replace the complete device 1 Carefully disconnect the cables not connected to the terminal blocks e g IRIG B fibre optic cables earth as ...

Page 700: ...nge state and an alarm condition will be flagged In the case of a fault either the complete unit or just the faulty PCB identified by the in built diagnostic software should be replaced Replacement of printed circuit boards and other internal components must be undertaken by approved Service Centres Failure to obtain the authorization of after sales engineers prior to commencing work may invalidat...

Page 701: ...ocket from the plug to disconnect the front panel Caution Do not remove the screws with the larger diameter heads which are accessible when the access covers are fitted and open These screws hold the relay in its mounting panel or cubicle Caution The internal circuitry is now exposed and is not protected against electrostatic discharge and dust ingress Therefore ESD precautions and clean working c...

Page 702: ...r replacing the main processor board all the settings required for the application need to be re entered This may be done either manually or by downloading a settings file V01601 Figure 303 Front panel assembly 2 5 2 REPLACEMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS BOARDS Most products will have at least one communications board of some sort fitted There are several different boards available offering various functi...

Page 703: ...ear terminal blocks A reasonable amount of force is needed due to the friction between the contacts of the terminal blocks 4 Remove the module from the case The module may be heavy because it contains the input voltage and current transformers 5 Slot in the replacement module and push it fully back onto the rear terminal blocks To check that the module is fully inserted make sure the v shaped cut ...

Page 704: ... Remove front panel 2 Gently pull the board forward and out of the case 3 If replacing the I O board make sure the setting of the link above IDC connector on the replacement board is the same as the one being replaced 4 Before fitting the replacement board check the number on the round label next to the front edge of the board matches the slot number into which it will be fitted If the slot number...

Page 705: ...CSA Canadian Standards Association or VDE Vereinigung Deutscher Elektrizitätswerke Note Events disturbance and maintenance records will be lost if the battery is replaced whilst the IED is de energised 2 7 1 POST MODIFICATION TESTS To ensure that the replacement battery maintains the time and status data if the auxiliary supply fails scroll across to the DATE AND TIME cell then scroll down to Batt...

Page 706: ...arity against the rating label on the front Terminal 1 is dc 2 is dc If the auxiliary voltage is correct go to test 2 Otherwise check the wiring and fuses in the auxiliary supply 2 Check the LEDs and LCD backlight switch on at power up Also check the N O normally open watchdog contact for closing If the LEDs and LCD backlight switch on or the contact closes and no error code is displayed the error...

Page 707: ...oth horizontal cursor keys pressed then confirm restoration of defaults at the prompt using the Enter key If the IED powers up successfully check the programmable logic for feedback paths Other error codes relate to software errors on the main processor board 3 4 OUT OF SERVICE LED ON AT POWER UP Test Check Action 1 Using the IED menu confirm the Commission Test or Test Mode setting is Enabled If ...

Page 708: ...Examine the fault record or use the test port to check the protection element is operating correctly If the protection element does not operate check the test is correctly applied If the protection element operates check the programmable logic to make sure the protection element is correctly mapped to the contacts 4 Using the Commissioning or Test mode function apply a test pattern to the relevant...

Page 709: ... problem with one of the fibre optic signalling channels This alarm can occur in dual redundant or three terminal schemes The fibre may have been disconnected the device may have been incorrectly configured at one of the ends or there is a problem with the communications equipment Further information about the status of the signalling channels can be found in MEASUREMENTS 4 column 3 7 2 C DIFF FAI...

Page 710: ...re drawn orthogonally using the shortest path from A to B Any annotation added to the original diagram such as titles and notes are lost Sometimes a gate type does not appear as expected For example a single input AND gate in the original scheme appears as an OR gate when uploaded Programmable gates with an inputs to trigger value of 1 also appear as OR gates 3 8 2 PSL VERSION CHECK The PSL is sav...

Page 711: ... an acceptance of the quote must be delivered before going to the next stage 5 Send the product to the repair centre Address the shipment to the repair centre specified by your local contact Make sure all items are packaged in an anti static bag and foam protection Make sure a copy of the import invoice is attached with the returned unit Make sure a copy of the RMA form is attached with the return...

Page 712: ...Chapter 25 Maintenance and Troubleshooting P446SV 680 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 713: ...CHAPTER 26 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ...

Page 714: ...Chapter 26 Technical Specifications P446SV 682 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 715: ...683 Interfaces 684 Protection Functions 688 Monitoring Control and Supervision 693 Measurements and Recording 695 Ratings 696 Input Output Connections 699 Mechanical Specifications 701 Type Tests 702 Environmental Conditions 703 Electromagnetic Compatibility 704 Regulatory Compliance 707 P446SV Chapter 26 Technical Specifications P446SV TM EN 1 683 ...

Page 716: ... cable length 3 m 2 3 REAR SERIAL PORT 1 Rear serial port 1 RP1 Use For SCADA communications multi drop Standard EIA RS 485 K bus Connector General purpose block M4 screws 2 wire Cable Screened twisted pair STP Supported Protocols Courier IEC 60870 5 103 DNP3 0 MODBUS Isolation Isolation to SELV level Constraints Maximum cable length 1000 m Not all models support all protocols see ordering options...

Page 717: ...Connector 9 pin D type female connector Cable Screened twisted pair STP Supported Protocols InterMiCOM IM Isolation Isolation to SELV level Constraints Maximum cable length 15 m 2 7 IRIG B DEMODULATED IRIG B Interface Demodulated Use External clock synchronisation signal Standard IRIG 200 98 format B00X Connector BNC Cable type 50 ohm coaxial Isolation Isolation to SELV level Constraints Maximum c...

Page 718: ...re optic cabling Main Use Substation Ethernet communications Connector IEC 874 10 BFOC 2 5 ST 1 each for Tx and Rx Standard IEEE 802 3 100 BaseFX Fibre type Multimode 50 125 µm or 62 5 125 µm Supported Protocols IEC 61850 DNP3 0 Optional Redundancy Protocols Supported Rapid spanning tree protocol RSTP Self healing protocol SHP Dual homing protocol DHP Parallel Redundancy Protocol PRP Wavelength 13...

Page 719: ...CTION INTERFACE Fibre Teleprotection Interface Main Use Teleprotection communications Connectors 2 BFOC 2 5 ST Standard IEC 874 10 Protocol InterMicom 64 Fibre type Multimode 50 125 µm or 62 5 125 µm or single mode 9 125 µm Wavelength 850 nm or 1300 nm multimode 1300 nm or 1500 nm single mode Minimum reception level 28 dBm Accuracy Better than 50 ns for maximum absolute error between actual GPS ti...

Page 720: ... the trip output contact Operating time for resistive faults 20 inside the characteristic 50 Hz up to SIR 30 30 ms 60 Hz up to SIR 30 25 ms Accuracy Characteristic shape up to SIR 30 5 for on angle fault on the set line angle 10 for off angle fault Example For a 70 degree set line angle injection testing at 40 degrees would be referred to as off angle Zone time delay deviations 20 ms or 2 whicheve...

Page 721: ...s a standalone feature Configuration Permissive op times ms Direct op times ms IM64 at 64 k 13 18 17 20 IM64 at 56 k 15 20 19 22 IDiff IM64 at 64 k 22 24 23 25 IDiff IM64 at 56 k 24 26 25 27 3 5 AUTORECLOSE AND CHECK SYNYCHRONISM Accuracy Timers 20 ms or 2 whichever is greater 3 6 PHASE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION Accuracy IDMT pick up 1 05 x Setting 5 DT pick up Setting 5 Drop off IDMT and DT 0 98 x s...

Page 722: ...T Operate 5 or 40 ms whichever is greater IEEE reset 10 or 40 ms whichever is greater Repeatability 5 DT operate 2 or 50 ms whichever is greater DT reset 5 or 50 ms whichever is greater Note Reference conditions TMS 1 TD 1 IN 1A operating range 2 20In 3 7 1 EARTH FAULT DIRECTIONAL PARAMETERS Zero Sequence Polarising accuracy Directional boundary pick up RCA 90 2 Hysteresis 3 VN pick up Setting 10 ...

Page 723: ...0 W P 5 Drop off P 0 W 0 95 x ISEF 5 or 5 mA Drop off P 0 W 0 9 x P 5 or 5 mA Boundary accuracy 5 with hysteresis 1 Repeatability 1 3 9 HIGH IMPEDANCE RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT PROTECTION High Impedance and Low Impedance Pick up Setting formula 5 Drop off 0 8 x Setting formula 5 Operating time 60 ms High set pick up Setting 10 High set operating time 30 ms Repeatability 5 3 10 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERC...

Page 724: ...s Timers 2 or 20 ms whichever is greater Reset time 15 ms 3 12 BROKEN CONDUCTOR PROTECTION Pick up Setting 2 5 Drop off 0 95 x Setting 2 5 DT operate 2 or 40 ms whichever is greater Reset time 25 ms 3 13 THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION Thermal alarm pick up Calculated trip time 10 Thermal overload pick up Calculated trip time 10 Cooling time accuracy 15 of theoretical Repeatability 5 Note Operating ti...

Page 725: ...s whichever is greater CTS block operation 1 cycle CTS reset 35 ms 4 3 DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT TRANSFORMER SUPERVISION Accuracy I1 Pick up Setting 5 I1 Drop off 0 9 x setting 5 I2 I1 Pick up Setting 5 I2 I1 Drop off 0 9 x setting 5 I2 I1 Pick up Setting 5 I2 I1 Drop off 0 9 x setting 5 Time delay operation Setting 2 or 20 ms whichever is greater CTS block diff operation 1 cycle CTS reset 35 ms 4 4 CB...

Page 726: ...timer Setting 2 or 50 ms whichever is greater Dwell conditioner timer Setting 2 or 50 ms whichever is greater Pulse conditioner timer Setting 2 or 50 ms whichever is greater Chapter 26 Technical Specifications P446SV 694 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 727: ... RECORDS Disturbance Records Measurement Accuracy Minimum record duration 0 1 s Maximum record duration 10 5 s Minimum number of records at 10 5 seconds 8 Magnitude and relative phases accuracy 5 of applied quantities Duration accuracy 2 Trigger position accuracy 2 minimum Trigger 100 ms 5 3 EVENT FAULT AND MAINTENANCE RECORDS Event Fault Maintenance Records Record location Battery backed memory V...

Page 728: ... s 100 A for 1 s Linearity Linear up to 64 In non offset 6 3 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER INPUTS AC Voltage Inputs Nominal voltage 100 V to 120 V Nominal burden per phase 0 1 VA at Vn Thermal withstand 2 x Vn continuous operation 2 6 x Vn for 10 seconds Linearity Linear up to 200 V 100 120 V supply Linear up to 800 V 380 400 V supply 6 4 AUXILIARY SUPPLY VOLTAGE Nominal operating range Cortec option DC onl...

Page 729: ...NTERRUPTION Standard IEC 60255 26 2013 DC and AC 24 48V DC SUPPLY 100 interruption without de energising 20 ms at 24 V half and full load 50 ms at 36 V half and full load 100 ms at 48 V half and full load 48 110V DC SUPPLY 100 interruption without de energising 20 ms at 37V half and full load 50 ms at 60 V half and full load 100 ms at 72 V half load 100 ms at 85 V full load 200 ms at 110 V half an...

Page 730: ...1 2 loading 1 2 of all inputs outputs energised 6 7 BATTERY BACKUP Location Front panel Type 1 2 AA 3 6V Lithium Thionyly Chloride Battery reference LS14250 Lifetime 10 years IED energised for 90 of the time Chapter 26 Technical Specifications P446SV 698 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 731: ...equired to make the opto inputs immune to induced AC voltages In addition to the above thresholds some models of this product provide the following threshold levels for FSK applications For 220 250 voltage inputs Logic 0 145V Logic 1 165V 7 2 STANDARD OUTPUT CONTACTS Compliance In accordance with IEC 60255 1 2009 Use General purpose relay outputs for signalling tripping and alarming Rated voltage ...

Page 732: ... Make and break dc inductive 2500 W L R 50 ms Make and carry dc resistive 30 A for 3 s 10000 operations subject to the above limits Make carry and break dc resistive 30 A for 3 s 5000 operations subject to the above limits 30 A for 200 ms 10000 operations subject to the above limits Make carry and break dc inductive 10 A for 40 ms 10000 operations subject to the above limits 10 a for 20 ms 250V 4 ...

Page 733: ...ont face IP52 as per IEC 60529 2002 Protection against dust whole case IP50 as per IEC 60529 2002 Protection for sides of the case safety IP30 as per IEC 60529 2002 Protection for rear of the case safety IP10 as per IEC 60529 2002 8 3 MECHANICAL ROBUSTNESS Vibration test per EN 60255 21 1 1996 Response class 2 Endurance class 2 Shock and bump immunity per EN 60255 21 2 1995 Shock response class 2 ...

Page 734: ...ntacts and protective earth 1 kV ac rms for 1 minute Between all screw type EIA RS 485 contacts and protective earth 1 kV ac rms for 1 minute ANSI IEEE Compliance ANSI IEEE C37 90 2005 Across open contacts of normally open output relays 1 5 kV ac rms for 1 minute Across open contacts of normally open changeover output relays 1 kV ac rms for 1 minute Across open watchdog contacts 1 kV ac rms for 1 ...

Page 735: ...NT HUMIDITY RANGE Compliance IEC 60068 2 78 2001 and IEC 60068 2 30 2005 Durability 56 days at 93 relative humidity and 40 C Damp heat cyclic six 12 12 hour cycles 93 RH 25 to 55 C 10 4 CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENTS Compliance IEC 60068 2 42 2003 IEC 60068 2 43 2003 Industrial corrosive environment poor environmental control Sulphur Dioxide 21 days exposure to elevated concentrations 25ppm of SO2 at 75 r...

Page 736: ...splay and exposed metalwork Class 3 Condition 8 kV discharge in air to all communication ports 11 4 ELECTRICAL FAST TRANSIENT OR BURST REQUIREMENTS Compliance IEC 60255 22 4 2008 and EN61000 4 4 2004 Test severity level lll and lV IEC 60255 26 2013 Applied to communication inputs Amplitude 2 kV burst frequency 5 kHz and 100 KHz level 4 Applied to power supply and all other inputs except for commun...

Page 737: ...IEEE ANSI C37 90 2 2004 Frequency band 80 MHz to 1 GHz Spot tests at 80 160 380 450 MHz Waveform 1 kHz 80 am and pulse modulated Field strength 35 V m 11 8 RADIATED IMMUNITY FROM DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS Compliance IEC 61000 4 3 2006 Level 4 IEC 60255 26 2013 Frequency bands 800 to 960 MHz 1 4 to 2 0 GHz Test field strength 30 V m Test using AM 1 kHz 80 11 9 RADIATED IMMUNITY FROM DIGITAL RADIO TELE...

Page 738: ...upply test 2 0 5 30 MHz 73 dBµV quasi peak 60 dBµV average RJ45 test 1 where applicable 0 15 0 5 MHz 97 dBµV quasi peak 84 dBµV average RJ45 test 2 where applicable 0 5 30 MHz 87 dBµV quasi peak 74 dBµV average 11 13 RADIATED EMISSIONS Compliance EN 55022 2010 IEC 60255 26 2013 Test 1 30 230 MHz 40 dBµV m at 10 m measurement distance Test 2 230 1 GHz 47 dBµV m at 10 m measurement distance Test 3 1...

Page 739: ... in an outdoor location it must be mounted in a specific cabinet or housing to provide the equipment with the appropriate level of protection from the expected outdoor environment 12 3 R TTE COMPLIANCE 2014 53 EU Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment R TTE directive 2014 53 EU Conformity is demonstrated by compliance to both the EMC directive and the Low Voltage directive to zero volts 1...

Page 740: ...tegory for control of equipment in gas atmospheres in Zone 1 and 2 This equipment with parentheses marking around the zone number is not itself suitable for operation within a potentially explosive atmosphere Chapter 26 Technical Specifications P446SV 708 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 741: ...APPENDIX A ORDERING OPTIONS ...

Page 742: ...Appendix A Ordering Options P446SV P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 743: ...nd 8 outputs Mounting Opt R J As C 1300nm SM single channel K As D 1300nm SM single channel L As B 1300nm SM dual channel 8 input and 8 outputs Mounting Opt R N As C 1300nm SM dual channel O As D 1300nm SM dual channel P As B 1300nm MM single channel 8 input and 8 outputs Mounting Opt R R As C 1300nm MM single channel S As D 1300nm MM single channel T As B 1300nm MM dual channel 8 input and 8 outp...

Page 744: ...Appendix A Ordering Options P446SV A2 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 745: ...APPENDIX B SETTINGS AND SIGNALS ...

Page 746: ...Appendix B Settings and Signals P446SV P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 747: ... chars 16 character relay description Can be edited Plant Reference 00 05 MiCOM From 32 to 163 in steps of 1 ASCII Text 16 chars Associated plant description and can be edited Model Number 00 06 Model Number Model Number ASCII Text 32 Relay model number This display cannot be altered Serial Number 00 08 Serial Number Serial Number ASCII Text 7 Relay model number This display cannot be altered Freq...

Page 748: ... P Status 00 21 Relay O P Status Binary Flag 32 Indexed String Displays the status of all available output relays fitted Alarm Status 1 00 22 Setting Group via opto invalid Test Mode Enabled Static Test Mode Loop Back Test Enabled IM64 Test Enabled VTS Indication CTS Alarm CT2S Alarm Remote CTS Alarm Power Swing BF Block AR CB Monitor Alarm CB Lockout Alarm CB Status Alarm CB Failed to Trip CB Fai...

Page 749: ...ction failure alarm IM64 Scheme Fail alarm IEEE C37 94 Communications Alarms Diff Protection inhibited Aid1 Channel Out Aid2 Channel Out Frequency out of range Binary Flag 32 Indexed String 32 bit field gives status of first 32 alarms Includes fixed and user settable alarms Alarm Status 2 00 51 BF Block AR 2 CB2 Monitor Alarm CB2 Lockout Alarm CB2 Status Alarm CB2 Failed to Trip CB2 Failed to Clos...

Page 750: ...o all data and settings Write access to Reset demands and counters and Level 2 password setting Level 3 Password 3 required Read access to all data and settings Write access to All settings including Level 3 password setting PSL IED Config Security settings port disabling etc Password Level 1 00 D2 4 registers for writing 8 character password Each register contains a pair of characters Each regist...

Page 751: ...ation Select Event 01 01 0 From 0 to 499 in steps of 1 Unsigned Integer 16 bits Setting range from 0 to 511 This selects the required event record from the possible 512 that may be stored A value of 0 corresponds to the latest event and so on Menu Cell Ref 01 02 From Record Menu Cell Ref Cell Reference Indicates the type of event See Event sheet for more details Time Date 01 03 From Record Time Da...

Page 752: ... Start F 2 Binary Flag 32 Indexed String Displays the status of the first 32 start signals Start Elements 2 01 09 Start V 1 Start V 2 Start V A Start V B Start V C Start V 1 Start V 2 Start V A Start V B Start V C Start df dt 1 Start df dt 2 Start df dt 3 Start df dt 4 Delta I2 Low Delta I2 High Delta I1 Low Delta I1 High I2 Low I2 High I1 Low I1 High V2 Low V2 High Z2 Low Z2 High Z3 Low Z3 High Z...

Page 753: ...4 Trip F 1 Trip F 2 Trip df dt 1 Trip df dt 2 Trip df dt 3 Trip df dt 4 Phase Comparison Binary Flag 32 Indexed String Displays the status of the first 32 trip signals Trip Elements 2 01 0B Trip I 1 Trip I 2 Trip I 3 Trip I 4 Trip Broken Line Trip IN1 1 Trip IN1 2 Trip IN1 3 Trip IN1 4 Trip ISEF 1 Trip ISEF 2 Trip ISEF 3 Trip ISEF 4 Trip Thermal Trip NVD 1 Trip NVD 2 Trip I2 1 Trip V 1 Trip V 2 Tr...

Page 754: ...rier Number time seconds Displays time from protection trip to undercurrent elements indicating the CB is open Relay Trip Time 01 12 Relay Trip Time Courier Number time seconds Displays time from protection start to protection trip Fault Location 01 13 Fault Location Courier Number metres Displays fault location in metres Fault Location 01 14 Fault Location Courier Number miles Displays fault loca...

Page 755: ...ourier Number degrees Measured parameter IM Angle Pre Flt 01 28 IM Angle Pre Flt Courier Number current Measured parameter IM Angle Pre Flt 01 29 IM Angle Pre Flt Courier Number degrees Measured parameter VA Pre Flt 01 30 VA Pre Flt Courier Number voltage Measured parameter VA Angle Pre Flt 01 31 VA Angle Pre Flt Courier Number degrees Measured parameter VB Pre Flt 01 32 VB Pre Flt Courier Number ...

Page 756: ...egrees Measured parameter VA Fault 01 50 VA Fault Courier Number voltage Measured parameter VA Angle Fault 01 51 VA Angle Fault Courier Number degrees Measured parameter VB Fault 01 52 VB Fault Courier Number voltage Measured parameter VB Angle Fault 01 53 VB Angle Fault Courier Number degrees Measured parameter VC Fault 01 54 VC Fault Courier Number voltage Measured parameter VC Angle Fault 01 55...

Page 757: ...ed in the Event State field of the event Evt Extra Info 01 FC Evt Extra Info Unsigned Integer 16 bits Evt Unique Id 01 FE High order word of long stored in 1st register Low order word of long stored in 2nd register UINT32 Each event will have a unique event id The event id is a 32 bit unsigned integer that is incremented for each new event record and is stored in the record in battery backed memor...

Page 758: ...rrent Measured parameter IC RMS 02 12 IC RMS Courier Number current Measured parameter VAB Magnitude 02 14 VAB Magnitude Courier Number voltage Measured parameter VAB Phase Angle 02 15 VAB Phase Angle Courier Number angle Measured parameter VBC Magnitude 02 16 VBC Magnitude Courier Number voltage Measured parameter VBC Phase Angle 02 17 VBC Phase Angle Courier Number angle Measured parameter VCA M...

Page 759: ...rier Number frequency Measured parameter C S Voltage Mag 02 2E C S Voltage Mag Courier Number voltage Measured parameter C S Voltage Ang 02 2F C S Voltage Ang Courier Number angle Measured parameter IM Magnitude 02 32 IM Magnitude Courier Number current Measured parameter IM Phase Angle 02 33 IM Phase Angle Courier Number angle Measured parameter CB1 Bus Line Mag 02 3A CB1 Bus Line Mag Courier Num...

Page 760: ... Ang 02 4D CB2 CS Volt Ang Courier Number angle Measured parameter CB2 Bus Line Ang 02 4E CB2 Bus Line Ang Courier Number angle Measured parameter CB2 CS Slip Freq 02 4F CB2 CS Slip Freq Courier Number frequency Measured parameter V1 Rem Magnitude 02 50 V1 Rem Magnitude Courier Number voltage Measured parameter V1 Rem Phase Ang 02 51 V1 Rem Phase Ang Courier Number angle Measured parameter IA CT1 ...

Page 761: ...tts 03 02 B Phase Watts Courier Number power Measured parameter C Phase Watts 03 03 C Phase Watts Courier Number power Measured parameter A Phase VArs 03 04 A Phase VArs Courier Number VAr Measured parameter B Phase VArs 03 05 B Phase VArs Courier Number VAr Measured parameter C Phase VArs 03 06 C Phase VArs Courier Number VAr Measured parameter A Phase VA 03 07 A Phase VA Courier Number VA Measur...

Page 762: ...ourier Number VAr Measured parameter IA Fixed Demand 03 18 IA Fixed Demand Courier Number current Measured parameter IB Fixed Demand 03 19 IB Fixed Demand Courier Number current Measured parameter IC Fixed Demand 03 1A IC Fixed Demand Courier Number current Measured parameter 3Ph W Roll Dem 03 1B 3Ph W Roll Dem Courier Number power Measured parameter 3Ph VArs RollDem 03 1C 3Ph VArs RollDem Courier...

Page 763: ... Courier Number Hz sec Measured parameter MEASUREMENTS 4 05 00 This column contains measurement parameters Ch 1 Prop Delay 05 01 Ch 1 Prop Delay Courier Number time seconds Measured parameter Ch 2 Prop Delay 05 02 Ch 2 Prop Delay Courier Number time seconds Measured parameter Channel 1 Status 05 07 Rx Tx Local GPS Remote GPS Mux Clk F Error Signal Lost Path Yellow Mismatch RxN Timeout Message Leve...

Page 764: ...7 Ch1 No Dgraded m Unsigned Integer 32 bits Measured parameter Ch2 No Vald Mess 05 18 Ch2 No Vald Mess Unsigned Integer 32 bits Measured parameter Ch2 No Err Mess 05 19 Ch2 No Err Mess Unsigned Integer 32 bits Measured parameter Ch2 No Errored s 05 1A Ch2 No Errored s Unsigned Integer 32 bits Measured parameter Ch2 No Sev Err s 05 1B Ch2 No Sev Err s Unsigned Integer 32 bits Measured parameter Ch2...

Page 765: ...ockout Alarm CB OPs Maint CB OPs Lock CB Time Maint CB Time Lockout Fault Freq Lock I Maint Alarm I Lockout Alarm CB2 OPs Maint CB2 OPs Lock CB2 Time Maint CB2 Time Lockout Fault Freq Lock Binary Flag 14 Indexed String Measured parameter CB2 A Operations 06 12 CB2 A Operations Unsigned Integer 16 bits Measured parameter CB2 B Operations 06 13 CB2 B Operations Unsigned Integer 16 bits Measured para...

Page 766: ...thy to enable CB2 Close by manual control If set time runs out with input DDB CBx Healthy low 0 alarm Control CBx Unhealthy is set and CB close sequence is cancelled Check Sync Time 07 07 5 From 0 01 to 9999 in steps of 0 01 Courier Number time seconds Maximum waiting time for input signal CB1MSCOK from system check logic to enable CB1 Close by manual control Same setting applies to input signal C...

Page 767: ...e means that only a single contact is used common to all 3 poles CTRL CB2 Lead 07 81 Reset No Operation Set Reset Indexed String If Leader Select By is set to Control this user control determines the preferred leader Set Reset Reset CB1 lead Set CB2 lead This command is NON VOLATILE Reset AROK Ind 07 82 No No Yes Indexed String If Res AROK by UI is set to Enabled this command provides a pulse to r...

Page 768: ...Shots 07 93 CB2 Failed Shots Unsigned Integer 16 bits Indicates the total number of CB2 failed reclose cycles Reset CB2 Shots 07 94 No No Yes Indexed String This command resets all CB2 shots counters to zero Res AROK by UI 07 96 Enabled Disabled Enabled Indexed String If Enabled this allows the successful auto reclose signal to be reset by user interface command Reset AROK Ind Res AROK by NoAR 07 ...

Page 769: ... Menu only Battery Status 08 06 Dead Healthy Indexed String Displays whether the battery is healthy or not Battery Alarm 08 07 Enabled Disabled Enabled Indexed String Setting that determines whether an unhealthy relay battery condition is alarmed or not Primary Source 08 08 PTP IRIG B None PTP SNTP Indexed String Sets the primary time synchronisation source Secondary Source 08 09 None IRIG B None ...

Page 770: ...A local time zone adjustment can be defined using the LocalTime offset setting and all interfaces will use local time except SNTP time synchronization and IEC 61850 timestamps Flexible A local time zone adjustment can be defined using the LocalTime offset setting and each interface can be assigned to the UTC zone or local time zone with the exception of the local interfaces which will always be in...

Page 771: ...Saturday Indexed String Setting to specify the day of the week in which daylight saving time adjustment ends DST End Month 08 2A October January February March April May June July August September October November December Indexed String Setting to specify the month in which daylight saving time adjustment ends DST End Mins 08 2B 60 From 0 to 1425 in steps of 15 Courier Number time minutes Setting...

Page 772: ...efaults to all settings includes the rear communication port settings which may result in communication via the rear port being disrupted if the new default settings do not match those of the master station Setting Group 09 02 Select via Menu Select via Menu Select via PSL Indexed String Allows setting group changes to be initiated via Opto Input or via Menu Active Settings 09 03 Group 1 Group 1 G...

Page 773: ... Overcurrent Protection function I2 stages ANSI 46 67 Broken Conductor 09 12 Disabled Disabled Enabled Indexed String To enable activate or disable turn off the Broken Conductor function I2 I1 stage ANSI 46BC Earth Fault 09 13 Disabled Disabled Enabled Indexed String To enable activate or disable turn off the back up Earth Fault Protection function IN stages ANSI 50 51 67N SEF REF Prot n 09 15 Dis...

Page 774: ...s menu visible further on in the relay settings menu CT VT Ratios 09 28 Visible Invisible Visible Indexed String Sets the Current Voltage Transformer Ratios menu visible further on in the relay settings menu Record Control 09 29 Visible Invisible Visible Indexed String Sets the Record Control menu visible further on in the relay settings menu Disturb Recorder 09 2A Visible Invisible Visible Indexe...

Page 775: ... Note that Phase Diff setting and InterMiCOM64 Fiber setting are mutually exclusive as with Phase Diff enabled the digital message exchanged has the structure of the differential message i e currents are sent to the remote end etc and with InterMiCOM64 Fiber the digital message exchanged has the structure and properties of the InterMiCOM64 Fiber Function Key 09 50 Visible Invisible Visible Indexed...

Page 776: ...rrent transformer input secondary current rating MComp CT Primary 0A 0D 1 From 1 to 30000 in steps of 1 Courier Number current Sets the mutual compensation current transformer input primary current rating MComp CT Sec y 0A 0E 1 1 or 5 Courier Number current Sets the mutual compensation current transformer input secondary current rating CS Input 0A 0F AN AN BN CN AB BC CA AN 1 732 BN 1 732 CN 1 732...

Page 777: ... any operation of protection elements will not be logged as an event DDB 31 0 0B 40 0xFFFFFFFF High order word of long stored in 1st register Low order word of long stored in 2nd register Binary Flag 32 Bit Chooses whether any individual DDBs should be deselected as a stored event by setting the relevant bit to 0 zero Typically used for repetitive recurrent changes such as an Opto input assigned f...

Page 778: ...y individual DDBs should be deselected as a stored event by setting the relevant bit to 0 zero Typically used for repetitive recurrent changes such as an Opto input assigned for Minute Pulse clock synchronizing DDB 383 352 0B 4B 0xFFFFFFFF High order word of long stored in 1st register Low order word of long stored in 2nd register Binary Flag 32 Bit Chooses whether any individual DDBs should be de...

Page 779: ... 0 zero Typically used for repetitive recurrent changes such as an Opto input assigned for Minute Pulse clock synchronizing DDB 767 736 0B 57 0xFFFFFFFF High order word of long stored in 1st register Low order word of long stored in 2nd register Binary Flag 32 Bit Chooses whether any individual DDBs should be deselected as a stored event by setting the relevant bit to 0 zero Typically used for rep...

Page 780: ...an Opto input assigned for Minute Pulse clock synchronizing DDB 1151 1120 0B 63 0xFFFFFFFF High order word of long stored in 1st register Low order word of long stored in 2nd register Binary Flag 32 Bit Chooses whether any individual DDBs should be deselected as a stored event by setting the relevant bit to 0 zero Typically used for repetitive recurrent changes such as an Opto input assigned for M...

Page 781: ...te Pulse clock synchronizing DDB 1535 1504 0B 6F 0xFFFFFFFF High order word of long stored in 1st register Low order word of long stored in 2nd register Binary Flag 32 Bit Chooses whether any individual DDBs should be deselected as a stored event by setting the relevant bit to 0 zero Typically used for repetitive recurrent changes such as an Opto input assigned for Minute Pulse clock synchronizing...

Page 782: ...chronizing DDB 1919 1888 0B 7B 0xFFFFFFFF High order word of long stored in 1st register Low order word of long stored in 2nd register Binary Flag 32 Bit Chooses whether any individual DDBs should be deselected as a stored event by setting the relevant bit to 0 zero Typically used for repetitive recurrent changes such as an Opto input assigned for Minute Pulse clock synchronizing DDB 1951 1920 0B ...

Page 783: ...VA VB VC IM V Checksync IA2 IB2 IC2 IN2 V Checksync2 Indexed String Selects any available analogue input to be assigned to this channel including derived IN residual current Analog Channel 2 0C 05 VB IA IB IC IN IN Sensitive VA VB VC IM V Checksync IA2 IB2 IC2 IN2 V Checksync2 Indexed String Selects any available analogue input to be assigned to this channel including derived IN residual current A...

Page 784: ... V Checksync2 Indexed String Selects any available analogue input to be assigned to this channel including derived IN residual current Analog Channel 6 0C 09 IC IA IB IC IN IN Sensitive VA VB VC IM V Checksync IA2 IB2 IC2 IN2 V Checksync2 Indexed String Selects any available analogue input to be assigned to this channel including derived IN residual current Analog Channel 7 0C 0A IN IA IB IC IN IN...

Page 785: ...nels may be selected to trigger the disturbance recorder on either a low to high or a high to low transition Digital Input 3 0C 10 Relay 3 See Data Type G32 in Menus Database Indexed String The digital channels may monitor any of the opto isolated inputs or output contacts in addition to a number of internal relay digital signals such as protection starts LEDs etc Input 3 Trigger 0C 11 Trigger L H...

Page 786: ...disturbance recorder on either a low to high or a high to low transition Digital Input 9 0C 1C Relay 9 See Data Type G32 in Menus Database Indexed String The digital channels may monitor any of the opto isolated inputs or output contacts in addition to a number of internal relay digital signals such as protection starts LEDs etc Input 9 Trigger 0C 1D No Trigger No Trigger Trigger L H Trigger H L I...

Page 787: ... 0C 29 No Trigger No Trigger Trigger L H Trigger H L Indexed String Any of the digital channels may be selected to trigger the disturbance recorder on either a low to high or a high to low transition Digital Input 16 0C 2A Opto Input 2 See Data Type G32 in Menus Database Indexed String The digital channels may monitor any of the opto isolated inputs or output contacts in addition to a number of in...

Page 788: ...y of the opto isolated inputs or output contacts in addition to a number of internal relay digital signals such as protection starts LEDs etc Input 22 Trigger 0C 37 No Trigger No Trigger Trigger L H Trigger H L Indexed String Any of the digital channels may be selected to trigger the disturbance recorder on either a low to high or a high to low transition Digital Input 23 0C 38 Opto Input 9 See Da...

Page 789: ...ger H L Indexed String Any of the digital channels may be selected to trigger the disturbance recorder on either a low to high or a high to low transition Digital Input 29 0C 44 Opto Input 15 See Data Type G32 in Menus Database Indexed String The digital channels may monitor any of the opto isolated inputs or output contacts in addition to a number of internal relay digital signals such as protect...

Page 790: ... V Checksync2 Indexed String Selects any available analogue input to be assigned to this channel including derived IN residual current Analog Channel11 0C 52 IB2 IA IB IC IN IN Sensitive VA VB VC IM V Checksync IA2 IB2 IC2 IN2 V Checksync2 Indexed String Selects any available analogue input to be assigned to this channel including derived IN residual current Analog Channel12 0C 53 IC2 IA IB IC IN ...

Page 791: ...Measurements 3 uses always IA local as a reference Measurement Mode 0D 05 0 From 0 to 3 in steps of 1 Unsigned Integer 16 bits This setting is used to control the signing of the real and reactive power quantities the signing convention used is defined in the Measurements and Recording chapter P54x EN MR Fix Dem Period 0D 06 30 From 1 to 99 in steps of 1 Courier Number time minutes This setting def...

Page 792: ...both relay and master station are set at the same speed setting RP1 Parity 0E 05 None Odd Even None Indexed String DNP3 0 versions only This cell controls the parity format used in the data frames It is important that both relay and master station are set with the same parity setting RP1 Meas Period 0E 06 10 From 1 to 60 in steps of 1 Courier Number time seconds IEC60870 5 103 versions only This c...

Page 793: ... master station to have an interframe gap DNP Need Time 0E 11 10 From 1 to 30 in steps of 1 Courier Number time minutes DNP 3 0 versions only The duration of time waited before requesting another time sync from the master DNP App Fragment 0E 12 2048 From 100 to 2048 in steps of 1 Unsigned Integer 32 bits DNP 3 0 versions only The maximum message length application fragment size transmitted by the ...

Page 794: ... EIA RS 232 EIA RS 485 or KBus is being used for communication RP2 Comms Mode 0E 8A IEC60870 FT1 2 IEC60870 FT1 2 Frame 10 bit no parity Indexed String RP2 versions only The choice is either IEC 60870 FT1 2 for normal operation with 11 bit modems or 10 bit no parity RP2 Address 0E 90 255 From 0 to 255 in steps of 1 Unsigned Integer 16 bits RP2 versions only This cell sets the unique address for th...

Page 795: ...ing reported for a failed link SNTP PARAMETERS 0E AA DNP 3 0 over Ethernet versions only SNTP Server 1 0E AB 0 0 0 0 SNTP Server 1 ASCII Text DNP 3 0 over Ethernet versions only Indicates the SNTP Server 1 address SNTP Server 2 0E AC 0 0 0 0 SNTP Server 2 ASCII Text DNP 3 0 over Ethernet versions only Indicates the SNTP Server 2 address SNTP Poll Rate 0E AD 64 SNTP Poll Rate ASCII Text DNP 3 0 ove...

Page 796: ...us cell or via the monitor download port Monitor Bit 5 0F 09 1068 From 0 to 2047 in steps of 1 Unsigned Integer 16 bits The eight Monitor Bit cells allow the user to select the status of which digital data bus signals can be observed in the Test Port Status cell or via the monitor download port Monitor Bit 6 0F 0A 1070 From 0 to 2047 in steps of 1 Unsigned Integer 16 bits The eight Monitor Bit cel...

Page 797: ...d to select the output relay contacts that will be tested when the Contact Test cell is set to Apply Test Contact Test 0F 0F No Operation No Operation Apply Test Remove Test Indexed String When the Apply Test command in this cell is issued the contacts set for operation set to 1 in the Test Pattern cell change state After the test has been applied the command text on the LCD will change to No Oper...

Page 798: ...n the Test Pattern cell change state Red LED Status 0F 1A Red LED Status Binary Flag 18 This cell is an eighteen bit binary string that indicates which of the user programmable LEDs on the relay are illuminated with the Red LED input active when accessing the relay from a remote location a 1 indicating a particular LED is lit and a 0 not lit Green LED Status 0F 1B Green LED Status Binary Flag 18 T...

Page 799: ...y Flag 32 Displays the status of DDB signals DDB 479 448 0F 2E DDB 479 448 Binary Flag 32 Displays the status of DDB signals DDB 511 480 0F 2F DDB 511 480 Binary Flag 32 Displays the status of DDB signals DDB 543 512 0F 30 DDB 543 512 Binary Flag 32 Displays the status of DDB signals DDB 575 544 0F 31 DDB 575 544 Binary Flag 32 Displays the status of DDB signals DDB 607 576 0F 32 DDB 607 576 Binar...

Page 800: ...Binary Flag 32 Displays the status of DDB signals DDB 1119 1088 0F 42 DDB 1119 1088 Binary Flag 32 Displays the status of DDB signals DDB 1151 1120 0F 43 DDB 1151 1120 Binary Flag 32 Displays the status of DDB signals DDB 1183 1152 0F 44 DDB 1183 1152 Binary Flag 32 Displays the status of DDB signals DDB 1215 1184 0F 45 DDB 1215 1184 Binary Flag 32 Displays the status of DDB signals DDB 1247 1216 ...

Page 801: ...status of DDB signals DDB 1823 1792 0F 58 Displays the status of DDB signals DDB 1855 1824 0F 59 Displays the status of DDB signals DDB 1887 1856 0F 5A Displays the status of DDB signals DDB 1919 1888 0F 5B Displays the status of DDB signals CB MONITOR SETUP 10 00 This column contains Circuit Breaker monitoring parameters CB1 Broken I 10 01 2 From 1 to 2 in steps of 0 1 Courier Number decimal This...

Page 802: ... 10 0D 0 2 From 0 005 to 0 5 in steps of 0 001 Courier Number time seconds Setting for the circuit breaker operating time threshold which is set in relation to the specified interrupting time of the circuit breaker The relay can be set to lockout the auto reclose function on reaching a second operations threshold CB1FltFreqLock 10 0E Alarm Disabled Alarm Disabled Alarm Enabled Indexed String Enabl...

Page 803: ...elation to the specified interrupting time of the circuit breaker CB2 Time Lockout 10 2C Alarm Disabled Alarm Disabled Alarm Enabled Indexed String Setting to activate the circuit breaker operating time lockout alarm CB2 Time Lockout 10 2D 0 2 From 0 005 to 0 5 in steps of 0 001 Courier Number time seconds Setting for the circuit breaker operating time threshold which is set in relation to the spe...

Page 804: ...of inputs may be up to 32 depending on MiCOM P54x model and I O configuration Opto Input 5 11 06 24 27V 24 27V 30 34V 48 54V 110 125V 220 250V Indexed String Each opto input can individually be set to a nominal voltage value if custom is selected for the global setting The number of inputs may be up to 32 depending on MiCOM P54x model and I O configuration Opto Input 6 11 07 24 27V 24 27V 30 34V 4...

Page 805: ...idually be set to a nominal voltage value if custom is selected for the global setting The number of inputs may be up to 32 depending on MiCOM P54x model and I O configuration Opto Input 13 11 0E 24 27V 24 27V 30 34V 48 54V 110 125V 220 250V Indexed String Each opto input can individually be set to a nominal voltage value if custom is selected for the global setting The number of inputs may be up ...

Page 806: ...Opto 31 Input State Opto 32 Input State Binary Flag 32 Bit Selects each input with a pre set filter of cycle that renders the input immune to induced noise on the wiring The number of available bits may be 16 24 or 32 depending on the I O configuration Characteristic 11 80 Standard 60 80 Standard 60 80 50 70 Indexed String Selects the pick up and drop off characteristics of the optos Selecting the...

Page 807: ...ion Set Reset Indexed String Setting to allow Control Inputs 1 set reset Control Input 2 12 03 No Operation No Operation Set Reset Indexed String Setting to allow Control Inputs 2 set reset Control Input 3 12 04 No Operation No Operation Set Reset Indexed String Setting to allow Control Inputs 3 set reset Control Input 4 12 05 No Operation No Operation Set Reset Indexed String Setting to allow Con...

Page 808: ...o Operation No Operation Set Reset Indexed String Setting to allow Control Inputs 14 set reset Control Input 15 12 10 No Operation No Operation Set Reset Indexed String Setting to allow Control Inputs 15 set reset Control Input 16 12 11 No Operation No Operation Set Reset Indexed String Setting to allow Control Inputs 16 set reset Control Input 17 12 12 No Operation No Operation Set Reset Indexed ...

Page 809: ...ation Set Reset Indexed String Setting to allow Control Inputs 27 set reset Control Input 28 12 1D No Operation No Operation Set Reset Indexed String Setting to allow Control Inputs 28 set reset Control Input 29 12 1E No Operation No Operation Set Reset Indexed String Setting to allow Control Inputs 29 set reset Control Input 30 12 1F No Operation No Operation Set Reset Indexed String Setting to a...

Page 810: ...ext displayed in the hotkey menu to be changed to something more suitable for the application of an individual control input such as ON OFF IN OUT etc Control Input 3 13 18 Latched Latched Pulsed Indexed String Configures the control inputs as either latched or pulsed Ctrl Command 3 13 19 Set Reset ON OFF SET RESET IN OUT ENABLED DISABLED Indexed String Allows the SET RESET text displayed in the h...

Page 811: ...ESET IN OUT ENABLED DISABLED Indexed String Allows the SET RESET text displayed in the hotkey menu to be changed to something more suitable for the application of an individual control input such as ON OFF IN OUT etc Control Input 9 13 30 Latched Latched Pulsed Indexed String Configures the control inputs as either latched or pulsed Ctrl Command 9 13 31 Set Reset ON OFF SET RESET IN OUT ENABLED DI...

Page 812: ...ontrol Input 14 13 44 Latched Latched Pulsed Indexed String Configures the control inputs as either latched or pulsed Ctrl Command 14 13 45 Set Reset ON OFF SET RESET IN OUT ENABLED DISABLED Indexed String Allows the SET RESET text displayed in the hotkey menu to be changed to something more suitable for the application of an individual control input such as ON OFF IN OUT etc Control Input 15 13 4...

Page 813: ...menu to be changed to something more suitable for the application of an individual control input such as ON OFF IN OUT etc Control Input 20 13 5C Latched Latched Pulsed Indexed String Configures the control inputs as either latched or pulsed Ctrl Command 20 13 5D Set Reset ON OFF SET RESET IN OUT ENABLED DISABLED Indexed String Allows the SET RESET text displayed in the hotkey menu to be changed t...

Page 814: ...uts as either latched or pulsed Ctrl Command 25 13 71 Set Reset ON OFF SET RESET IN OUT ENABLED DISABLED Indexed String Allows the SET RESET text displayed in the hotkey menu to be changed to something more suitable for the application of an individual control input such as ON OFF IN OUT etc Control Input 26 13 74 Latched Latched Pulsed Indexed String Configures the control inputs as either latche...

Page 815: ...OUT etc Control Input 31 13 88 Latched Latched Pulsed Indexed String Configures the control inputs as either latched or pulsed Ctrl Command 31 13 89 Set Reset ON OFF SET RESET IN OUT ENABLED DISABLED Indexed String Allows the SET RESET text displayed in the hotkey menu to be changed to something more suitable for the application of an individual control input such as ON OFF IN OUT etc Control Inpu...

Page 816: ...ipping messages since last counter reset Rx Perm Count 15 22 Rx Perm Count Unsigned Integer 32 bit Displays the number of valid Permissive Tripping messages since last counter reset Rx Block Count 15 23 Rx Block Count Unsigned Integer 32 bit Displays the number of valid Blocking messages since last counter reset Rx NewData Count 15 24 Rx NewData Count Unsigned Integer 32 bit Displays the number of...

Page 817: ...d or Write Error InterMiCOM failure Absent 2nd Rear port is not fitted or failed to initialize Loopback Mode 15 50 Disabled Disabled Internal External Indexed String Setting to allow testing of the InterMiCOM channel When Internal is selected only the local InterMiCOM software functionality is tested whereby the relay will receive its own sent data External setting allows a hardware and software c...

Page 818: ...to Direct offers higher security at the expense of speed Selecting the channel response for this bit to Permissive offers higher dependability IM2 FallBackMode 16 19 Default Default Latched Indexed String Setting that defines the status of IM2 signal in case of heavy noise and message synchronization being lost If set to Latching the last valid IM2 status will be maintained until the new valid mes...

Page 819: ...Selecting the channel response for this bit to Blocking allows fastest signalling whereas setting to Direct offers higher security at the expense of speed Selecting the channel response for this bit to Permissive offers higher dependability IM5 FallBackMode 16 31 Default Default Latched Indexed String Setting that defines the status of IM5 signal in case of heavy noise and message synchronization ...

Page 820: ...ter which IM7 DefaultValue is applied IM8 Cmd Type 16 48 Direct Disabled Permissive Direct Indexed String Setting that defines the operative mode of the InterMiCOM_8 signal Selecting the channel response for this bit to Blocking allows fastest signalling whereas setting to Direct offers higher security at the expense of speed Selecting the channel response for this bit to Permissive offers higher ...

Page 821: ...cked in its current active position Fn Key 3 Mode 17 09 Normal Normal Toggled Indexed String Sets the function key in toggle or normal mode In Toggle mode a single key press will set latch the function key output as high or low in programmable scheme logic This feature can be used to enable disable relay functions In the Normal mode the function key output will remain high as long as key is presse...

Page 822: ...mode In Toggle mode a single key press will set latch the function key output as high or low in programmable scheme logic This feature can be used to enable disable relay functions In the Normal mode the function key output will remain high as long as key is pressed Fn Key 7 Label 17 16 Function Key 1 From 32 to 163 in steps of 1 ASCII Text 16 chars Allows the text of the function key to be change...

Page 823: ...or the application IEC 61850 9 2LE 18 00 This column contains all the configure setting measurement parameters relative to IEC 61850 9 2LE Physical Link 18 01 Fibre Optic 0 or 1 Indexed String AntiAlias Filter 18 02 Enabled Disabled Enabled Indexed String Synchro Alarm 18 03 Local 1PPS From 0 to 2 in steps of 1 Indexed String SV Test Mode 18 04 Disabled 0 or 1 Indexed String This setting is used f...

Page 824: ...e 18 1A MiCOM Logical Node 9 IA1 IB1 IC1 18 31 LN1 LN1 LN2 LN3 LN4 LN5 LN6 LN7 LN8 Indexed String IA2 IB2 IC2 18 32 Unused LN1 LN2 LN3 LN4 LN5 LN6 LN7 LN8 Indexed String INsen 18 33 Unused LN1 LN2 LN3 LN4 LN5 LN6 LN7 LN8 Indexed String IM 18 34 Unused LN1 LN2 LN3 LN4 LN5 LN6 LN7 LN8 Indexed String VA VB VC 18 35 LN1 LN1 LN2 LN3 LN4 LN5 LN6 LN7 LN8 Indexed String Vsc1 18 36 Unused LN1 LN2 LN3 LN4 L...

Page 825: ...ed LN1 LN2 LN3 LN4 LN5 LN6 LN7 LN8 Indexed String VA1 VB1 VC1 18 38 LN1 LN1 LN2 LN3 LN4 LN5 LN6 LN7 LN8 Indexed String VA2 VB2 VC2 18 39 Unused LN1 LN2 LN3 LN4 LN5 LN6 LN7 LN8 Indexed String Vcs1 18 3A Unused LN1 LN2 LN3 LN4 LN5 LN6 LN7 LN8 Indexed String Vcs2 18 3B Unused LN1 LN2 LN3 LN4 LN5 LN6 LN7 LN8 Indexed String Vcs3 18 3C Unused LN1 LN2 LN3 LN4 LN5 LN6 LN7 ...

Page 826: ...es received by the LN LN2 FramesRcvd 18 62 0 LN2 FramesRcvd Indexed String Count of IEC 61850 9 2LE frames received by the LN LN3 FramesRcvd 18 63 0 LN3 FramesRcvd Indexed String Count of IEC 61850 9 2LE frames received by the LN LN4 FramesRcvd 18 64 0 LN4 FramesRcvd Indexed String Count of IEC 61850 9 2LE frames received by the LN LN5 FramesRcvd 18 65 0 LN5 FramesRcvd Indexed String Count ofIEC 6...

Page 827: ... character 1st character Numeric Percentage LN6 LossRate Sec 18 77 0 2nd character 1st character Numeric Percentage LN7 LossRate Sec 18 78 0 2nd character 1st character Numeric Percentage LN8 LossRate Sec 18 79 0 2nd character 1st character Numeric Percentage LN9 LossRate Sec 18 7A 0 2nd character 1st character Numeric Percentage Loss Rate Reset 18 90 No No Yes Indexed String Reset Time 18 91 0 Re...

Page 828: ...ric Percentage LN5 Error Second 18 B5 0 LN5 Error Second Numeric Percentage LN6 Error Second 18 B6 0 LN6 Error Second Numeric Percentage LN7 Error Second 18 B7 0 LN7 Error Second Numeric Percentage LN8 Error Second 18 B8 0 LN8 Error Second Numeric Percentage LN9 Error Second 18 B9 0 LN9 Error Second Numeric Percentage VA VB VC 18 D1 0 VA VB VC Indexed String Vsc1 18 D2 0 Vsc1 Indexed String Vsc2 1...

Page 829: ...s point not have an active MCL file and any data model extracted from IEC 61850 may not be correct Therefore to prevent any issues you should send a correct MCL file to the IED after a connection is first established IP PARAMETERS 19 30 IP PARAMETERS ASCII text IEC61850 versions only IP address 19 31 IP address ASCII text IEC61850 versions only Displays the unique network IP address that identifie...

Page 830: ...the simulation bit for the goose control block is set Once testing is complete the cell must be set back to Disabled to restore the GOOSE scheme back to normal service Note The cell Test Mode under IED Configurator used in software prior to IEC 61850 Edition 2 has been renamed as Publisher Sim Ignore Test Flag 19 73 No No Yes Indexed String Be removed after Cat2 This setting is determines whether ...

Page 831: ...B 8 B 9 B 10 B 11 B 12 B 13 B 14 B 15 B 16 B 17 B 18 B 19 B 20 B 1 C 2 C 3 C 4 C 5 C 6 C 7 C 8 C 9 C 10 C 11 C 12 C 13 C 14 C 15 C 16 C 17 C 18 C 19 C 20 C Indexed String In 3 terminal schemes communicating groups of three relays may be configured See below Address 20 03 0 0 0 0 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 A 5 A 6 A 7 A 8 A 9 A 10 A 11 A 12 A 13 A 14 A 15 A 16 A 17 A 18 A ...

Page 832: ... B Address 0 0 is a universal address whereby any relay will be free to communicate with any other equivalent to disabling of the unique addressing When PROT COMMS IM64 is set to loop back mode the address 0 0 will replace any existing address in the relay Comms Mode 20 10 Standard Standard IEEE C37 94 Indexed String Setting that defines the data format that will be transmitted on the fiber output...

Page 833: ...iber over channel 1 Internal setting should be selected If channel 1 is routed via a multiplexer either setting may be required see Application Notes Clock Source Ch2 20 14 Internal Internal External Indexed String Setting that matches the clock source being used for data synchronization over channel 2 Ch1 N 64kbits s 20 15 1 Auto 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Indexed String Setting for channel 1 whe...

Page 834: ...of 0 001 Courier Number time seconds When the protection communications are enabled the overall propagation delay divided by 2 is calculated and the maximum value is determined and displayed in Measurements 4 column This value is displayed and compared against this setting If the setting is exceeded an alarm MaxCh2 PropDelay DDB 1387 is raised IM1 Cmd Type 20 30 Permissive Direct Permissive Indexe...

Page 835: ...l 1 2 ms delay comparing to Permissive mode Set Direct in Direct Transfer Tripping Intertripping applications Set Permissive to accommodate any Permissive or Blocking scheme IM4 FallBackMode 20 3D Default Default Latched Indexed String Setting that defines the status of IM4 signal in case of heavy noise and message synchronization being lost If set to Latching the last valid IM4 status will be mai...

Page 836: ...Default Default Latched Indexed String Setting that defines the status of IM7 signal in case of heavy noise and message synchronization being lost If set to Latching the last valid IM7 status will be maintained until the new valid message is received If set to Default the IM7 status pre defined by the user in IM7 Default Value cell will be set A new valid message will replace IM7 Default Value onc...

Page 837: ... Blk Time Remain 25 12 Blk Time Remain Integer Fallbck PW Level 25 20 0 Fallbck PW Level Unsigned Integer 16 bits Security Code 25 FF Security Code ASCII Text CTRL I P LABELS 29 00 This column contains settings for Control Input Labels Control Input 1 29 01 Control Input 1 From 32 to 163 in steps of 1 ASCII Text 16 chars Setting to allow Control Inputs 1 set reset Control Input 2 29 02 Control Inp...

Page 838: ... steps of 1 ASCII Text 16 chars Setting to allow Control Inputs 14 set reset Control Input 15 29 0F Control Input 15 From 32 to 163 in steps of 1 ASCII Text 16 chars Setting to allow Control Inputs 15 set reset Control Input 16 29 10 Control Input 16 From 32 to 163 in steps of 1 ASCII Text 16 chars Setting to allow Control Inputs 16 set reset Control Input 17 29 11 Control Input 17 From 32 to 163 ...

Page 839: ...This setting is available if MEASURE T SETUP column is selected as Visible in the CONFIGURATION column and if Distance unit in the MEASURE T SETUP column is selected as miles Dual step size is provided for cables short lines up to 10 miles the step size is 0 005 miles 0 01 miles otherwise Line Impedance 30 03 10 From 0 05 v1 I1 to 500 V1 I1 in steps of 0 01 V1 I1 Courier Number impedance Setting f...

Page 840: ...is setting is visible only if Mutual Comp is enabled Phase Sequence 30 0B Standard ABC Standard ABC Reverse ACB Indexed String This setting is used to select whether the 3 phase quantities V and I are rotating in the standard ABC sequence or whether the rotation is in reverse ACB order The appropriate selection is required to ensure that all derived sequence components and faulted phase flagging t...

Page 841: ...to specify the fault arc resistance that can be detected for faults between phases The set value determines the right hand side of the quadrilaterals This setting is visible only when Simple setting mode and quad characteristic are set Zone 1 Ph Status 31 20 Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Ch Fail Indexed String To enable activate or disable turn off or enable only in the case that differential p...

Page 842: ...nnel is lost Z4 for phase faults This setting is invisible if Phase Char is disabled Zone 4 Ph Reach 31 61 150 From 10 to 1000 in steps of 1 Courier Number percentage Setting entry as percentage of the line impedance that sets reverse Zone 4 reach in ohms GROUND DISTANCE 31 70 Ground Chars 31 71 Mho Disabled Mho Quadrilateral Disabled Mho Indexed String Setting to disable turn off ground distance ...

Page 843: ...s By default Z3 Mho ground characteristic is offset partly reverse directional thus not memory cross polarized If Z3 Gnd Offset is disabled Z3 Mho characteristic becomes memory cross polarized like all other zones Z3Gnd Rev Reach 31 A3 10 From 10 to 1000 in steps of 1 Courier Number percentage Setting entry as percentage of the line impedance that sets Zone 3 reverse reach in ohms Zone P Gnd Stat ...

Page 844: ... prevent tripping due to load encroachment under heavy load condition and detect very slow moving power swings Z Blinder Imp 31 D4 15 From 0 1 v1 I1 to 500 V1 I1 in steps of 0 01 V1 I1 Courier Number impedance Setting of radius of under impedance circle Load B Angle 31 D5 45 From 15 to 65 in steps of 1 Courier Number angle Angle setting for the two blinder lines boundary with the gradient of the r...

Page 845: ...ive 32 07 8 From 0 05 v1 I1 to 500 V1 I1 in steps of 0 01 V1 I1 Courier Number impedance Setting for Z1 resistive reach This setting is only visible if Quad is selected Z1 Tilt Top Line 32 08 3 From 30 to 30 in steps of 1 Courier Number angle Setting of Z1 top reactance line gradient to avoid over reach for resistive phase faults under heavy load Minus angle tilts the reactance line downwards Z1 S...

Page 846: ... Iph P 32 37 0 05 From 0 05 I1 to 2 I1 in steps of 0 005 I1 Courier Number current Zone P current sensitivity Z4 Ph Reach 32 40 15 From 0 05 v1 I1 to 500 V1 I1 in steps of 0 01 V1 I1 Courier Number impedance Setting for Z4 reach This is a common setting for Z4 time delayed and Z4 high speed elements used in blocking schemes and for current reversal guard Z4 Ph Angle 32 41 70 From 20 to 90 in steps...

Page 847: ... sequence for zone 2 Z2 Dynamic Tilt 32 63 Enabled Disabled Enabled Indexed String Setting that enables or disables zone 2 top reactance line dynamic tilting If set enabled the top line angle will be automatically shifted by the angle difference between the fault current and negative sequence current starting from the Z2 Tilt top line angle setting see the next cell The zone 2 as over reaching zon...

Page 848: ... in steps of 0 1 Courier Number angle Setting of Z3 mutual compensation angle R3 Gnd Res Fwd 32 79 25 From 0 05 v1 I1 to 500 V1 I1 in steps of 0 01 V1 I1 Courier Number impedance Setting for Z3 resistive reach that defines Quad s right hand line R3 Gnd Res Rev 32 7A 1 From 0 05 v1 I1 to 500 V1 I1 in steps of 0 01 V1 I1 Courier Number impedance Setting for Z3 resistive reach that defines Quad s lef...

Page 849: ...Tilt top line angle setting see the next cell The Z4 as over reaching zone is allowed only to tilt up If Dynamic tilting is disabled the top line will be shifted by the Z4 Tilt top line setting Predetermined tilting by fixed angle This setting is visible only when ground characteristic is set to Quad Z4 Tilt Top Line 32 94 3 From 30 to 30 in steps of 1 Courier Number angle Setting of the Z4 tilt a...

Page 850: ... 0 to 10 in steps of 0 01 Courier Number time seconds Time delay for Z3 phase element tZ3 Gnd Delay 34 1A 0 6 From 0 to 10 in steps of 0 01 Courier Number time seconds Time delay for Z3 ground element ZoneP Tripping 34 20 Phase And Ground Disabled Phase only Ground only Phase And Ground Indexed String Setting to select for which types of fault Zone P elements will be applied tZP Ph Delay 34 21 0 4...

Page 851: ... String Setting to select whether a Delta directional comparison scheme should be mapped to Aided scheme 1 Not applicable where a Permissive Underreaching scheme selection has been made Aid 1 Delta Dly 34 48 0 From 0 to 1 in steps of 0 002 Courier Number time seconds Time delay for Aided 1 Delta tripping Aid 1 DeltaTrip 34 49 3 Pole 3 Pole 1 and 3 Pole Indexed String Setting that defines tripping ...

Page 852: ...ne the element or group of elements that are sending a permissive signal to the other line end For the signal to be sent the element must operate and a corresponding bit in the matrix must be set to 1 High The above mapping is part of a custom made Aided 1 scheme and unlike all other schemes that are factory tested the customer must take the responsibility for testing and the operation of the sche...

Page 853: ... mode under GROUP x LINE PARAMETERS Trip Mode is set to 1 and 3 pole tReversal Guard 34 6A 0 02 From 0 to 0 15 in steps of 0 002 Courier Number time seconds Setting for the current reversal guard timer Intended to keep stability on a healthy line whilst breakers open on a faulted parallel line to clear the fault This setting is visible only when over reaching or Blocking schemes are selected Unblo...

Page 854: ...elay of DDB signal Aid2 CustomT in Once the time delay elapses the DDB signal Aid2 CustomT out will become low Note The timer is a combined hard coded PU DO timer for Custom Aided scheme 2 Trip on Close 34 80 SOTF Status 34 81 Enabled PoleDead Disabled Enabled PoleDead Enabled ExtPulse En Pdead Pulse Indexed String Setting that enables note turns on or disables turns off a special protection logic...

Page 855: ...conds The TOC Delay is a user settable time delay following the CB opening after which the TOR becomes active enabled The time must be set in conjunction with the Dead Time setting of the Auto reclose so that the setting must not exceed the minimum Dead Time setting since both timers start instantaneously Z1 EXTENSION 34 B0 Z1 Ext Scheme 34 B1 Disabled Disabled Enabled En on Ch1 Fail En on Ch2 Fai...

Page 856: ...m 0 to 100 in steps of 0 01 Courier Number time seconds Setting for the time delay for the definite time setting if selected for first stage element The setting is visible only when DT function is selected I 1 TMS 35 06 1 From 0 025 to 1 2 in steps of 0 005 Courier Number decimal Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC IDMT characteristic I 1 Time Dial 35 07...

Page 857: ...ting to adjust the operating time of the IEEE US IDMT curves The Time Dial TD is a multiplier on the standard curve equation in order to achieve the required tripping time The reference curve is based on TD 1 Care Certain manufacturer s use a mid range value of TD 5 or 7 so it may be necessary to divide by 5 or 7 to achieve parity I 2 Reset Char 35 11 DT DT Inverse Indexed String Setting to determ...

Page 858: ...levant bit set to 1 operation of the Voltage Transformer Supervision VTS will block the stage When set to 0 the stage will revert to Non directional upon operation of the VTS If I Status is set Enabled VTS no blocking should be selected in order to provide fault clearance by overcurrent protection during the VTS condition GROUP 1 NEG SEQ O C 36 00 This column contains settings for Negative Sequenc...

Page 859: ...nt Pick up setting for the second stage negative sequence overcurrent element I2 2 Time Delay 36 27 10 From 0 to 100 in steps of 0 01 Courier Number time seconds Setting for the operating time delay for the second stage negative sequence overcurrent element I2 2 TMS 36 28 1 From 0 025 to 1 2 in steps of 0 005 Courier Number decimal Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating ti...

Page 860: ...ectional operation I2 Char Angle 36 51 60 From 95 to 95 in steps of 1 Courier Number angle Setting for the relay characteristic angle used for the directional decision I2 V2pol Set 36 52 5 From 0 5 V1 to 25 V1 in steps of 0 5 V1 Courier Number voltage Setting determines the minimum negative sequence voltage threshold that must be present to determine directionality GROUP 1 BROKEN CONDUCTOR 37 00 T...

Page 861: ...IN 1 Time Dial 38 2E 1 From 0 01 to 100 in steps of 0 01 Courier Number decimal Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEEE US IDMT curves The Time Dial TD is a multiplier on the standard curve equation in order to achieve the required tripping time The reference curve is based on TD 1 Care Certain manufacturer s use a mid range value of TD 5 or 7 so it may be ...

Page 862: ...n in order to achieve the required tripping time The reference curve is based on TD 1 Care Certain manufacturer s use a mid range value of TD 5 or 7 so it may be necessary to divide by 5 or 7 to achieve parity IN2 1 IDG Time 38 41 1 2 From 1 to 2 in steps of 0 01 Courier Number time seconds Setting for the IDG curve used to set the minimum operating time at high levels of fault current IN 2 Reset ...

Page 863: ...h fault overcurrent protection during VTS condition IN DIRECTIONAL 38 55 IN Char Angle 38 56 60 From 95 to 95 in steps of 1 Courier Number angle Setting for the relay characteristic angle used for the directional decision The setting is visible only when Directional Fwd or Directional Rev is set IN Polarisation 38 57 Zero Sequence Zero Sequence Neg Sequence Indexed String Setting that determines w...

Page 864: ... current 3 Io DEF REV Set 39 08 0 04 From 0 03 I1 to 1 0 I1 in steps of 0 01 I1 Courier Number current Setting the reverse pickup current sensitivity for residual current 3 Io GROUP 1 SEF REF PROT N 3A 00 This column contains settings for SEF REF SEF REF Options 3A 01 SEF Enabled SEF Enabled Wattmetric SEF Hi Z REF Indexed String Setting to select the type of sensitive earth fault protection funct...

Page 865: ...ive earth fault element ISEF 2 Current 3A 3E 0 05 From 0 005 I3 to 0 1 I3 in steps of 0 00025 I3 Courier Number current Pick up setting for the second stage sensitive earth fault element ISEF 2 IDG Is 3A 3F 1 5 From 1 to 4 in steps of 0 1 Courier Number decimal This setting is set as a multiple of ISEF setting for the IDG curve Scandinavian and determines the actual relay current threshold at whic...

Page 866: ...conds Setting for the operating time delay for fourth stage sensitive earth fault element ISEF Blocking 3A 57 0x00F VTS Blks ISEF 1 VTS Blks ISEF 2 VTS Blks ISEF 3 VTS Blks ISEF 4 A R Blks ISEF 3 A R Blks ISEF 4 Binary Flag 8 bits Logic Settings that determine whether blocking signals from VT supervision affect certain earth fault overcurrent stages VTS Block only affects sensitive earth fault pro...

Page 867: ...of 0 01 Courier Number time seconds Setting to determine the reset release definite time for the first stage characteristic VN 2 Status 3B 07 Disabled Disabled Enabled Indexed String Setting to enable or disable the second stage definite time residual overvoltage element VN 2 Voltage Set 3B 08 10 From 1 V1 to 50 V1 in steps of 1 V1 Courier Number voltage Pick up setting for the second stage residu...

Page 868: ...if the swing is still present This allows system separation when swings fail to stabilize In Allow trip mode the Z2 phase element is unaffected by PSB detection Zone 3 Ph PSB 3D 07 Blocking Allow Trip Blocking Delayed Unblock Indexed String Setting that defines the Z3 phase element operation should any swing impedance enter and remains inside the Z3 phase characteristic for more then tZ3 Ph Delay ...

Page 869: ...allows system separation when swings fail to stabilize In Allow trip mode the Z3 ground element is unaffected by PSB detection Zone P Gnd PSB 3D 13 Blocking Allow Trip Blocking Delayed Unblock Indexed String Setting that defines the ZP ground element operation should any swing impedance enter and remains inside the ZP ground characteristic for more then tZP Gnd Delay If Blocking is selected the ZP...

Page 870: ...ance reach Z6 3D 27 32 From 500 to 0 1 in steps of 0 01 Courier Number impedance Setting for Z6 reverse reactance reach R5 3D 28 20 From 0 1 to 200 in steps of 0 01 Courier Number impedance Setting for Z5 positive resistive reach R6 3D 29 22 From 0 1 to 200 in steps of 0 01 Courier Number impedance Setting for Z6 positive resistive reach R5 3D 2A 20 From 0 1 to 200 in steps of 0 01 Courier Number ...

Page 871: ...ed Enabled Indexed String If the cell is enabled the relevant stage will become inhibited by the pole dead logic This logic produces an output when it detects either an open circuit breaker via auxiliary contacts feeding the relay opto inputs or it detects a combination of both undercurrent and undervoltage on any one phase It allows the undervoltage protection to reset when the circuit breaker op...

Page 872: ...second stage overvoltage element V 2 Voltage Set 42 15 150 From 60 V1 to 185 V1 in steps of 1 V1 Courier Number voltage This setting determines the pick up setting for the second stage overvoltage element V 2 Time Delay 42 16 0 5 From 0 to 100 in steps of 0 01 Courier Number time seconds Setting for the operating time delay for the second stage definite time overvoltage element COMP OVERVOLTAGE 42...

Page 873: ...d stage underfrequency element F 2 Time Delay 43 07 3 From 0 to 100 in steps of 0 01 Courier Number time seconds Setting that determines the minimum operating time delay for the second stage underfrequency element F 3 Status 43 08 Disabled Disabled Enabled Indexed String Setting to enable or disable the third stage underfrequency element F 3 Setting 43 09 48 5 From 45 to 65 in steps of 0 01 Courie...

Page 874: ... change of frequency measurement over a fixed period of either 6 or 12 cycles df dt 1 Status 44 04 Enabled Disabled Enabled Indexed String Setting to enable or disable the first stage df dt element df dt 1 Setting 44 05 2 From 0 1 to 10 in steps of 0 1 Courier Number Hz sec Pick up setting for the first stage df dt element df dt 1 Dir n 44 06 Negative Negative Positive Both Indexed String This set...

Page 875: ...4 Time 44 1C 3 From 0 to 100 in steps of 0 01 Courier Number time seconds Minimum operating time delay setting for the fourth stage df dt element BREAKER FAIL 45 01 CB Fail 1 Status 45 02 Enabled Disabled Enabled Indexed String Setting to enable or disable the first stage of the circuit breaker function CB Fail 1 Timer 45 03 0 2 From 0 to 10 in steps of 0 01 Courier Number time seconds Setting for...

Page 876: ...tion links cell of the relevant protection element columns in the menu VTS Reset Mode 46 03 Auto Manual Auto Indexed String The VTS block will be latched after a user settable time delay VTS Time Delay Once the signal has latched then two methods of resetting are available The first is manually via the front panel interface or remote communications and secondly when in Auto mode provided the VTS c...

Page 877: ...d then two methods of resetting are available The first is manually via the front panel interface or remote communications and secondly when in Auto mode provided the CTS condition has been removed The setting is visible if CTS Mode is not disabled CTS Time Delay 46 34 5 From 0 to 10 in steps of 0 01 Courier Number time seconds Setting that determines the operating time delay of the element upon d...

Page 878: ... DDB 880 signal SChksInactiveCB1 is set CB1 CS Volt Blk 48 8E V None V V Vdiff V and V V and Vdiff V and Vdiff V V and Vdiff Indexed String Setting to determine which if any conditions should block synchronism check for CB1 undervoltage V overvoltage V and or voltage differential Vdiff etc for the line and bus voltages CB1 CS1 Status 48 8F Enabled Disabled Enabled Indexed String Setting to enable ...

Page 879: ...er time seconds This sets CB1 closing time from receipt of CB1 close command until main contacts touch Sys Checks CB2 48 9B Disabled Disabled Enabled Indexed String Setting to enable or disable both stages of system checks for reclosing CB2 If Sys Checks CB2 is set to Disabled all other menu settings associated with synchronism checks for CB2 become invisible and a DDB 1484 signal SChksInactiveCB2...

Page 880: ...lose command at such a time that the predicted phase angle difference when CB2 main contacts touch is as close as possible to 0 degrees If adaptive closing is disabled the logic issues CB2 close command as soon as phase angle comes within set limit at CB2 CS2 Angle CB2 Cl Time 48 A8 0 05 From 0 01 to 0 5 in steps of 0 001 Courier Number time seconds This sets CB2 closing time from receipt of CB2 c...

Page 881: ...ng CB2 CS2 status in the SYSTEM CHECKS column CB2M SC DLLB 48 BB Disabled Disabled Enabled Indexed String This setting enables CB2 to close by manual control when the dead line live bus2 conditions are satisfied as set in the SYSTEM CHECKS column CB2M SC LLDB 48 BC Disabled Disabled Enabled Indexed String This setting enables CB2 to close by manual control when the live line dead bus2 conditions a...

Page 882: ...f L Fail Cls Block Follower reclose if Leader CB Fails to close This setting determines whether a follower CB should lock out without reclosing or continue to reclose if the leader CB fails to reclose when the leader CB close command is given If BF if L Fail Cls is set to Enable follower CB reclosing is locked out if the leader fails to close If BF if L Fail Cls is set to Disable the follower CB c...

Page 883: ...ad before a 3 phase auto reclose dead time can start If Disabled dead time can start when other selected conditions are satisfied irrespective of line volts DTStart by CB Op 49 64 Disabled Disabled Enabled Indexed String If Enabled a dead time start is permitted only when the CB has tripped If Disabled a dead time start is permitted when other selected conditions are satisfied irrespective of the ...

Page 884: ... tripping on AR operation Only in models with distance option Z2T AR 49 75 Block AR No Action Initiate AR Block AR Indexed String Setting that determines impact of time delayed zone 2 on AR operation Set Initiate AR if the trip should initiate a cycle and Block AR if a time delayed trip should cause lockout Set No action if Zone 2 tripping should exert no specific logic control on the recloser Onl...

Page 885: ...ermines impact of the second stage earth fault overcurrent protection on AR operation IN 3 AR 49 82 No Action No Action Initiate AR Block AR Indexed String Setting that determines impact of the third stage earth fault overcurrent protection on AR operation IN 4 AR 49 83 No Action No Action Initiate AR Block AR Indexed String Setting that determines impact of the fourth stage earth fault overcurren...

Page 886: ...eader when the system satisfies all the System Check Synchronism Stage 2 criteria as defined under the setting CB1 CS2 status in the SYSTEM CHECKS column CB1L SC DLLB 49 AB Disabled Disabled Enabled Indexed String This setting enables CB1 to auto reclose as leader when the dead line live bus1 conditions are satisfied as set in the SYSTEM CHECKS column CB1L SC LLDB 49 AC Disabled Disabled Enabled I...

Page 887: ... check is not required for any reclosures CB1F SC Shot 1 49 B7 Disabled Disabled Enabled Indexed String This setting determines whether a system check e g live bus dead line etc is required for the first shot reclosure of CB1 as follower If Enabled system check is required for the first shot reclosure If Disabled system check is not required for the first shot reclosure CB1F SC CS1 49 B8 Disabled ...

Page 888: ... CHECKS column CB2F SC LLDB 49 C2 Disabled Disabled Enabled Indexed String This setting enables CB2 to auto reclose as follower when the live line dead bus 2 conditions are satisfied in the SYSTEM CHECKS column CB2F SC DLDB 49 C3 Disabled Disabled Enabled Indexed String This setting enables CB2 to auto reclose as follower when the dead line dead bus 2 conditions are satisfied in the SYSTEM CHECKS ...

Page 889: ...Opto Input 18 Opto Input 19 4A 13 Input L13 From 32 to 163 in steps of 1 ASCII Text 16 chars Label for Opto Input 19 Opto Input 20 4A 14 Input L14 From 32 to 163 in steps of 1 ASCII Text 16 chars Label for Opto Input 20 Opto Input 21 4A 15 Input L15 From 32 to 163 in steps of 1 ASCII Text 16 chars Label for Opto Input 21 Opto Input 22 4A 16 Input L16 From 32 to 163 in steps of 1 ASCII Text 16 char...

Page 890: ...s Label for output relay 13 Relay 14 4B 0E Output R0E From 32 to 163 in steps of 1 ASCII Text 16 chars Label for output relay 14 Relay 15 4B 0F Output R0F From 32 to 163 in steps of 1 ASCII Text 16 chars Label for output relay 15 Relay 16 4B 10 Output R10 From 32 to 163 in steps of 1 ASCII Text 16 chars Label for output relay 16 Relay 17 4B 11 Output R11 From 32 to 163 in steps of 1 ASCII Text 16 ...

Page 891: ...s Label for output relay 31 Relay 32 4B 20 Output R20 From 32 to 163 in steps of 1 ASCII Text 16 chars Label for output relay 32 Repeat of Group 1 columns rows 50 00 Protection Settings of Group 2 Repeat of Group 1 columns rows 70 00 Protection Settings of Group 3 Repeat of Group 1 columns rows 90 00 Protection Settings of Group 4 Select Record B0 01 From 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 Unsigned Integer ...

Page 892: ...urier Number time seconds IA Pre Flt B0 20 IA Pre Flt Courier Number current IA Angle Pre Flt B0 21 IA Angle Pre Flt Courier Number degrees IB Pre Flt B0 22 IB Pre Flt Courier Number current IB Angle Pre Flt B0 23 IB Angle Pre Flt Courier Number degrees IC Pre Flt B0 24 IC Pre Flt Courier Number current IC Angle Pre Flt B0 25 IC Angle Pre Flt Courier Number degrees IN Pre Flt B0 26 IN Pre Flt Cour...

Page 893: ...ngle Fault B0 41 IA Angle Fault Courier Number degrees IB Fault B0 42 IB Fault Courier Number current IB Angle Fault B0 43 IB Angle Fault Courier Number degrees IC Fault B0 44 IC Fault Courier Number current IC Angle Fault B0 45 IC Angle Fault Courier Number degrees IN Fault B0 46 IN Fault Courier Number current IN Angle Fault B0 47 IN Angle Fault Courier Number degrees IM Fault B0 48 IM Fault Cou...

Page 894: ...01 From 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 Unsigned Integer 16 bits Time Date B1 02 Time Date IEC Date and Time Event Text B1 03 Event Text ASCII Text Maint Type B1 04 Maint Type UINT32 Maint Data B1 05 Maint Data UINT32 Domain B2 04 PSL Settings 0 or 1 Indexed String Sub Domain B2 08 Group 1 From 0 to 3 in steps of 1 Indexed String Version B2 0C 256 From 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 Unsigned Integer 2 Bytes Tr...

Page 895: ...ger Channel MinVal B4 08 Channel MinVal Integer Channel MaxVal B4 09 Channel MaxVal Integer Format B4 0A Format Unsigned Integer Upload B4 0B Upload Unsigned Integer No Of Samples B4 10 No Of Samples Unsigned Integer Trig Position B4 11 Trig Position Unsigned Integer Time Base B4 12 Time Base Courier Number time seconds Sample Times B4 14 Sample Times Unsigned Integer Dist Channel 1 B4 20 Dist Cha...

Page 896: ...el 11 B4 2A Dist Channel 11 Integer Dist Channel 12 B4 2B Dist Channel 12 Integer Dist Channel 13 B4 2C Dist Channel 13 Integer Dist Channel 31 B4 3D Dist Channel 31 Binary Flag Dist Channel 32 B4 3E Dist Channel 32 Binary Flag Cal Soft Version B5 01 Cal Date Time B5 02 Channel Types B5 03 Cal Coeffs B5 04 Err Count F B6 01 Msg Count F B6 02 Prot Count F B6 03 Slave Count F B6 04 Reset Count F B6 ...

Page 897: ...e IEC870 Date Time Grp3 PSL ID B7 23 0 Grp3 PSL ID Unsigned Integer 32 bits Grp4 PSL Ref B7 31 Default PSL model number Grp4 PSL Ref ASCII Text 32 chars Date Time B7 32 Date Time IEC870 Date Time Grp4 PSL ID B7 33 0 Grp4 PSL ID Unsigned Integer 32 bits Record Cntl Ref BF 01 B300 Record Cntl Ref Menu Cell 2 Record Ext Ref BF 02 B400 Record Ext Ref Menu Cell 2 Setting Transfer BF 03 Reset Demand BF ...

Page 898: ...ILABLE OPTIONS DESCRIPTION Connected i face BF 11 Connected i face Integer Security Column BF 12 2500 Security Column Menu Cell 2 Port Disable BF 13 2505 Port Disable Menu Cell 2 Port Disable end BF 14 250B Port Disable end Menu Cell 2 PW Entry Needed BF 15 PW Entry Needed Unsigned Integer 32 bits ...

Page 899: ...DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_7 From opto input 7 when opto energized 39 Opto 8 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_8 From opto input 8 when opto energized 80 IM Input 1 DDB_INTERIN_1 InterMiCOM Input 1 is driven by a message from the remote line end 81 IM Input 2 DDB_INTERIN_2 InterMiCOM Input 2 is driven by a message from the remote line end 82 IM Input 3 DDB_INTERIN_3 InterMiCOM Input 3 is driven by a message from the remot...

Page 900: ... input 3 is driven by a message from the remote line end 107 IM64 Ch2 Input 4 DDB_IM64_CH2_4_IN IM64 Ch2 input 4 is driven by a message from the remote line end 108 IM64 Ch2 Input 5 DDB_IM64_CH2_5_IN IM64 Ch2 input 5 is driven by a message from the remote line end 109 IM64 Ch2 Input 6 DDB_IM64_CH2_6_IN IM64 Ch2 input 6 is driven by a message from the remote line end 110 IM64 Ch2 Input 7 DDB_IM64_C...

Page 901: ...UT_CON_4 Input to relay 4 output conditioner 132 Relay Cond 5 DDB_OUTPUT_CON_5 Input to relay 5 output conditioner 133 Relay Cond 6 DDB_OUTPUT_CON_6 Input to relay 6 output conditioner 134 Relay Cond 7 DDB_OUTPUT_CON_7 Input to relay 7 output conditioner 135 Relay Cond 8 DDB_OUTPUT_CON_8 Input to relay 8 output conditioner 160 Timer in 1 DDB_TIMERIN_1 Input to auxiliary timer 1 161 Timer in 2 DDB_...

Page 902: ...ut from auxiliary timer 14 190 Timer out 15 DDB_TIMEROUT_15 Output from auxiliary timer 15 191 Timer out 16 DDB_TIMEROUT_16 Output from auxiliary timer 16 192 Control Input 1 DDB_CONTROL_1 Control input 1 for SCADA and menu commands into PSL 193 Control Input 2 DDB_CONTROL_2 Control input 2 for SCADA and menu commands into PSL 194 Control Input 3 DDB_CONTROL_3 Control input 3 for SCADA and menu co...

Page 903: ...25 DDB_CONTROL_25 Control input 25 for SCADA and menu commands into PSL 217 Control Input 26 DDB_CONTROL_26 Control input 26 for SCADA and menu commands into PSL 218 Control Input 27 DDB_CONTROL_27 Control input 27 for SCADA and menu commands into PSL 219 Control Input 28 DDB_CONTROL_28 Control input 28 for SCADA and menu commands into PSL 220 Control Input 29 DDB_CONTROL_29 Control input 29 for S...

Page 904: ...SEIN_25 Virtual Input 25 received from GOOSE message 249 Virtual Input 26 DDB_GOOSEIN_26 Virtual Input 26 received from GOOSE message 250 Virtual Input 27 DDB_GOOSEIN_27 Virtual Input 27 received from GOOSE message 251 Virtual Input 28 DDB_GOOSEIN_28 Virtual Input 28 received from GOOSE message 252 Virtual Input 29 DDB_GOOSEIN_29 Virtual Input 29 received from GOOSE message 253 Virtual Input 30 DD...

Page 905: ..._20 Virtual output 20 allows user to control a binary signal which can be mapped via SCADA protocol output to other devices 276 Virtual Output21 DDB_GOOSEOUT_21 Virtual output 21 allows user to control a binary signal which can be mapped via SCADA protocol output to other devices 277 Virtual Output22 DDB_GOOSEOUT_22 Virtual output 22 allows user to control a binary signal which can be mapped via S...

Page 906: ...lthy DDB_CONTROL_CB_UNHEALTHY Control CB1 Unhealthy alarm set if CB1 remains unhealthy for CB Control set time CB Healthy Time when operator controlled CB1 close sequence is initiated Please see description for CB Control setting CB Healthy Time 305 NoCS CB1ManClose DDB_CONTROL_NO_CHECK_SYNC Control No Checksync alarm set if selected system check conditions for manual closing CB1 remain unsatisfie...

Page 907: ...ealthy within the circuit breaker healthy time window 330 AR CB2 No C S DDB_AR_NO_CHECK_SYNC_2 Indicates during auto reclose in progress if system checks have not been satisfied within the check synchronizing time window 331 Invalid AR Mode DDB_INVALID_AR_MODE AR Mode selected via optos is not supported 333 InValid Mesg Fmt DDB_MESSAGE_FORMAT_FAIL Invalid Message Format 334 Main Prot Fail DDB_MAIN...

Page 908: ... progress 366 IM Message Fail DDB_INTERMICOM_MESSAGE EIA RS 232 InterMiCOM Message Failure alarm Setting that is used to alarm for poor channel quality If during the fixed 1 6 s rolling window the ratio of invalid messages to the total number of messages that should be received based upon the Baud Rate setting exceeds the above threshold a Message Fail alarm will be issued 367 IM Data CD Fail DDB_...

Page 909: ...ST_TRIP_INHIBIT Block distance aided scheme 1 tripping 395 Aid1 Inhibit DEF DDB_AIDED1_DEF_TRIP_INHIBIT Block DEF aided scheme 1 tripping 396 Aid1 Inhib Delta DDB_AIDED1_DIR_TRIP_INHIBIT Block Delta directional aided scheme 1 tripping 397 Aid2 InhibitDist DDB_AIDED2_DIST_TRIP_INHIBIT Block distance aided scheme 2 tripping 398 Aid2 Inhibit DEF DDB_AIDED2_DEF_TRIP_INHIBIT Block DEF aided scheme 2 tr...

Page 910: ... B 52 A DDB_CB_PHASE_B_52A 52 A CB1 B phase closed CB auxiliary 423 CB1Aux C 52 A DDB_CB_PHASE_C_52A 52 A CB1 C phase closed CB auxiliary 424 CB1Aux 3ph 52 B DDB_CB_THREE_PHASE_52B 52 B CB Contact Input 425 CB1Aux A 52 B DDB_CB_PHASE_A_52B 52 B CB Contact Input A Phase 426 CB1Aux B 52 B DDB_CB_PHASE_B_52B 52 B CB Contact Input B Phase 427 CB1Aux C 52 B DDB_CB_PHASE_C_52B 52 B CB Contact Input C Ph...

Page 911: ...o reclose cycle 452 Loopback Mode DDB_INTERNAL_LOOPBACK To enable loopback mode via opto input 458 Inhibit WI DDB_INHIBIT_WI Inhibit weak infeed aided scheme logic 459 Test Mode DDB_TEST_MODE Commissioning tests automatically places relay in test mode 460 103 CommandBlock DDB_COMMAND_BLOCKING For IEC 870 5 103 protocol only used for Command Blocking relay ignores SCADA commands 461 103 MonitorBloc...

Page 912: ...chemes This signal is normally driven from an opto input on conventional channels or from InterMiCOM 493 Aided1 Scheme Rx DDB_AIDED1_CRX_EXT Aided channel 1 external signal received for input to distance fixed scheme logic 494 Aided 1 Receive DDB_AIDED1_CRX_INT Aided channel 1 internal signal received generated in the signal receive logic 496 Aid1 Block Send DDB_AIDED1_BLOCK_SEND Prevent sending b...

Page 913: ...d then connected 517 Aid2 Trip Enable DDB_AIDED2_TRIP_ENABLE Aided scheme 2 trip enable this is a permissive signal used to accelerate zone 2 or a blocking signal which has been inverted It is a signal output part way through the internal fixed logic of aided schemes 518 Aid2 Custom Trip DDB_AIDED2_CUSTOM_TRIP_ENABLE Aid2 custom trip enable 519 Aid 2 Dist Trip DDB_AIDED2_DIST_TRIP Aided scheme 2 d...

Page 914: ...hase allows external protection to initiate breaker 2 fail 539 CB2 Ext Trip A DDB_CB2_EXTERNAL_TRIP_A External trip A phase allows external protection to initiate breaker 2 fail 540 CB2 Ext Trip B DDB_CB2_EXTERNAL_TRIP_B External trip B phase allows external protection to initiate breaker 2 fail 541 CB2 Ext Trip C DDB_CB2_EXTERNAL_TRIP_C External trip C phase allows external protection to initiate...

Page 915: ...NPSOC_4_START 4th stage Neg Sequence overcurrent start 571 I2 1 Trip DDB_NPSOC_1_TRIP 1st stage Neg Sequence overcurrent trip 572 I2 2 Trip DDB_NPSOC_2_TRIP 2nd stage Neg Sequence overcurrent trip 573 I2 3 Trip DDB_NPSOC_3_TRIP 3rd stage Neg Sequence overcurrent trip 574 I2 4 Trip DDB_NPSOC_4_TRIP 4th stage Neg Sequence overcurrent trip 576 AR Trip Test DDB_AR_TRIP_TEST Autoreclose trip test 577 A...

Page 916: ...e 2 B Phase Trip 616 Zone 2 C Trip DDB_ZONE_2_TRIP_C Zone 2 C Phase Trip 617 Zone 2 N Trip DDB_ZONE_2_TRIP_N Zone 2 N Trip 618 Zone 3 Trip DDB_ZONE_3_TRIP Zone 3 Trip 619 Zone 3 A Trip DDB_ZONE_3_TRIP_A Zone 3 A Phase Trip 620 Zone 3 B Trip DDB_ZONE_3_TRIP_B Zone 3 B Phase Trip 621 Zone 3 C Trip DDB_ZONE_3_TRIP_C Zone 3 C Phase Trip 622 Zone 3 N Trip DDB_ZONE_3_TRIP_N Zone 3 N Trip 623 Zone P Trip...

Page 917: ...2_TRIP_C Aided channel scheme 2 trip C phase 646 Aided 2 Trip N DDB_AIDED2_TRIP_N Aided channel scheme 2 trip involving ground N 647 Aid 2 WI Trip A DDB_AIDED2_WI_TRIP_A Aided scheme 2 weak infeed trip phase A 648 Aid 2 WI Trip B DDB_AIDED2_WI_TRIP_B Aided scheme 2 weak infeed trip phase B 649 Aid 2 WI Trip C DDB_AIDED2_WI_TRIP_C Aided scheme 2 weak infeed trip phase C 650 Aid2 Delta Tr3Ph DDB_AID...

Page 918: ...p DDB_SEF_1_TRIP 1st stage sensitive earth fault SEF protection trip 676 ISEF 2 Trip DDB_SEF_2_TRIP 2nd stage sensitive earth fault SEF protection trip 677 ISEF 3 Trip DDB_SEF_3_TRIP 3rd stage sensitive earth fault SEF protection trip 678 ISEF 4 Trip DDB_SEF_4_TRIP 4th stage sensitive earth fault SEF protection trip 679 Broken Wire Trip DDB_BROKEN_CONDUCTOR_TRIP Broken Conductor Trip 680 Thermal T...

Page 919: ..._TOR_TRIP TOR trip zone 1 trip on reclose 705 TOR Trip Zone 2 DDB_ZONE_2_TOR_TRIP TOR Trip Zone 2 706 TOR Trip Zone 3 DDB_ZONE_3_TOR_TRIP TOR Trip Zone 3 707 TOR Trip Zone 4 DDB_ZONE_4_TOR_TRIP TOR Trip Zone 4 708 TOR Trip Zone P DDB_ZONE_P_TOR_TRIP TOR Trip Zone P 709 SOTF Trip Zone 1 DDB_ZONE_1_SOTF_TRIP SOTF trip zone 1 switch on to fault 710 SOTF Trip Zone 2 DDB_ZONE_2_SOTF_TRIP SOTF Trip Zone...

Page 920: ...urrent start phase A 763 I 1 Start B DDB_POC_1_PH_B_START 1st stage overcurrent start phase B 764 I 1 Start C DDB_POC_1_PH_C_START 1st stage overcurrent start phase C 765 I 2 Start DDB_POC_2_3PH_START 2nd stage overcurrent start 3 phase 766 I 2 Start A DDB_POC_2_PH_A_START 2nd stage overcurrent start phase A 767 I 2 Start B DDB_POC_2_PH_B_START 2nd stage overcurrent start phase B 768 I 2 Start C D...

Page 921: ... three phase start 793 V 2 Start A AB DDB_PUV_2_PH_A_START Undervoltage stage 2 A phase start 794 V 2 Start B BC DDB_PUV_2_PH_B_START Undervoltage stage 2 B phase start 795 V 2 Start C CA DDB_PUV_2_PH_C_START Undervoltage stage 2 C phase start 796 V 1 Start DDB_POV_1_3PH_START Overvoltage stage 1 three phase start 797 V 1 Start A AB DDB_POV_1_PH_A_START Overvoltage stage 1 A phase start 798 V 1 St...

Page 922: ...uch a feature is required for a particular application appropriate mapping should be created in PSL using output DDBs from sequence counter single phase dead time and three phase dead time logic as required 844 CB1 AR 3p InProg DDB_AR_3_POLE_IN_PROGRESS CB1 Auto Reclose AR 3 pole in Progress 845 CB1 AR 1p InProg DDB_AR_1_POLE_IN_PROGRESS CB1 AR 1pole in progress 846 Seq Counter 0 DDB_SEQ_COUNT_0 A...

Page 923: ...s low current It is used for breaker failure in models with one CT input and also it is used for fault record reset as the sum CTs in models with two CTs 867 CB1 IA Start DDB_PHASE_A_UNDERCURRENT_CB1 A phase undercurrent level detector pickup detects low current in CT1 It is used for breaker failure in models with two CT inputs 868 CB1 IB Start DDB_PHASE_B_UNDERCURRENT_CB1 B phase undercurrent lev...

Page 924: ... 892 Pole Dead A DDB_PHASE_A_POLEDEAD Phase A Pole Dead 893 Pole Dead B DDB_PHASE_B_POLEDEAD Phase B Pole Dead 894 Pole Dead C DDB_PHASE_C_POLEDEAD Phase C Pole Dead 895 VTS Acc Ind DDB_VTS_ACCELERATE_INPUT Accelerate Ind 896 VTS Volt Dep DDB_VTS_ANY_VOLTAGE_DEP_FN Any Voltage Dependent 897 AR Check Sync OK DDB_SYNC_AR_CS_CHECK_OK Input to the auto reclose logic to indicate system in synchronism 8...

Page 925: ...928 CTS Block DDB_CTS_BLOCK Standard or differential CT supervision block current transformer supervision 952 Faulted Phase A DDB_FLTREC_FLT_A Faulted phase A must be assigned as this sets the start flag used in records and on the LCD display 953 Faulted Phase B DDB_FLTREC_FLT_B Faulted phase B must be assigned as this sets the start flag used in records and on the LCD display 954 Faulted Phase C ...

Page 926: ...nt DDB_ZONE_P_BN Zone P BN ground fault element 980 ZoneP CN Element DDB_ZONE_P_CN Zone P CN ground fault element 981 ZoneP AB Element DDB_ZONE_P_AB Zone P AB phase fault element 982 ZoneP BC Element DDB_ZONE_P_BC Zone P BC phase fault element 983 ZoneP CA Element DDB_ZONE_P_CA Zone P CA phase fault element 984 Zone4 AN Element DDB_ZONE_4_AN Zone 4 AN ground fault element 985 Zone4 BN Element DDB_...

Page 927: ...ection 1008 Delta Dir Rev BC DDB_DELTA_DIR_REV_BC Delta directional scheme reverse BC detection 1009 Delta Dir Rev CA DDB_DELTA_DIR_REV_CA Delta directional scheme reverse CA detection 1010 Phase Select A DDB_PHS_SEL_A Phase selector phase A pickup 1011 Phase Select B DDB_PHS_SEL_B Phase selector phase B pickup 1012 Phase Select C DDB_PHS_SEL_C Phase selector phase C pickup 1013 Phase Select N DDB...

Page 928: ... of circuit breaker operations maintenance lockout excessive number of circuit breaker trip operations safety lockout CB1 1110 CB1 Time Maint DDB_EXCESSIVE_OP_TIME_ALARM Excessive circuit breaker operating time maintenance alarm excessive operation time alarm for the circuit breaker slow interruption time CB1 1111 CB1 Time Lockout DDB_EXCESSIVE_OP_TIME_LOCKOUT Excessive circuit breaker operating t...

Page 929: ...communication Local relay that is sending over Ch2 indicates that remote end is not receiving 1136 Ch2 Mismatch RxN DDB_IEEE37_94_CH2_BAD_RX_N Indication of mismatch between InterMiCOM64 Ch 2 setting and Mux 1137 Ch2 Timeout DDB_CH2_TIMEOUT Indication that no valid message is received over channel 2 during Channel Timeout window 1138 Ch2 Degraded DDB_CH2_MESS_LEVEL Indicates poor channel 2 quality...

Page 930: ...indicates that level access 1 for the rear port 1 interface is enabled 1181 RPrt1 AccessLvl2 DDB_REMOTEPASSWORD_TWO It indicates that level access 2 for the rear port 1 interface is enabled 1182 RPrt2 AccessLvl1 DDB_REMOTE2PASSWORD_ONE It indicates that level access 1 for the rear port 2 interface is enabled 1183 RPrt2 AccessLvl2 DDB_REMOTE2PASSWORD_TWO It indicates that level access 2 for the rea...

Page 931: ...NT_12 PSL Internal Node 1206 PSL Int 13 DDB_PSLINT_13 PSL Internal Node 1207 PSL Int 14 DDB_PSLINT_14 PSL Internal Node 1208 PSL Int 15 DDB_PSLINT_15 PSL Internal Node 1209 PSL Int 16 DDB_PSLINT_16 PSL Internal Node 1210 PSL Int 17 DDB_PSLINT_17 PSL Internal Node 1211 PSL Int 18 DDB_PSLINT_18 PSL Internal Node 1212 PSL Int 19 DDB_PSLINT_19 PSL Internal Node 1213 PSL Int 20 DDB_PSLINT_20 PSL Intern...

Page 932: ... DDB_PSLINT_41 PSL Internal Node 1235 PSL Int 42 DDB_PSLINT_42 PSL Internal Node 1236 PSL Int 43 DDB_PSLINT_43 PSL Internal Node 1237 PSL Int 44 DDB_PSLINT_44 PSL Internal Node 1238 PSL Int 45 DDB_PSLINT_45 PSL Internal Node 1239 PSL Int 46 DDB_PSLINT_46 PSL Internal Node 1240 PSL Int 47 DDB_PSLINT_47 PSL Internal Node 1241 PSL Int 48 DDB_PSLINT_48 PSL Internal Node 1242 PSL Int 49 DDB_PSLINT_49 P...

Page 933: ... DDB_PSLINT_70 PSL Internal Node 1264 PSL Int 71 DDB_PSLINT_71 PSL Internal Node 1265 PSL Int 72 DDB_PSLINT_72 PSL Internal Node 1266 PSL Int 73 DDB_PSLINT_73 PSL Internal Node 1267 PSL Int 74 DDB_PSLINT_74 PSL Internal Node 1268 PSL Int 75 DDB_PSLINT_75 PSL Internal Node 1269 PSL Int 76 DDB_PSLINT_76 PSL Internal Node 1270 PSL Int 77 DDB_PSLINT_77 PSL Internal Node 1271 PSL Int 78 DDB_PSLINT_78 P...

Page 934: ... VTS I Inhibit setting has been exceeded in phase b 1296 VTS Ic DDB_VTS_IC_OPERATED VTS I Inhibit setting has been exceeded in phase c 1297 VTS Va DDB_VTS_VA_OPERATED Va has exceed 30 volts drop off at 10 volts 1298 VTS Vb DDB_VTS_VB_OPERATED Vb has exceed 30 volts drop off at 10 volts 1299 VTS Vc DDB_VTS_VC_OPERATED Vc has exceed 30 volts drop off at 10 volts 1300 VTS I2 DDB_VTS_I2_OPERATED VTS I...

Page 935: ...mparator 1322 Z3 CA Comparator DDB_ZONE_3_CA_RAW Z3 CA Comparator 1323 ZP AN Comparator DDB_ZONE_P_AN_RAW ZP AN Comparator 1324 ZP BN Comparator DDB_ZONE_P_BN_RAW ZP BN Comparator 1325 ZP CN Comparator DDB_ZONE_P_CN_RAW ZP CN Comparator 1326 ZP AB Comparator DDB_ZONE_P_AB_RAW ZP AB Comparator 1327 ZP BC Comparator DDB_ZONE_P_BC_RAW ZP BC Comparator 1328 ZP CA Comparator DDB_ZONE_P_CA_RAW ZP CA Com...

Page 936: ...1 Blocked by PSB 1350 Zone 2 Blocked DDB_ZONE_2_BLOCKED Zone 2 Blocked by PSB 1351 Zone 3 Blocked DDB_ZONE_3_BLOCKED Zone 3 Blocked by PSB 1352 Zone P Blocked DDB_ZONE_P_BLOCKED Zone P Blocked by PSB 1353 Zone 4 Blocked DDB_ZONE_4_BLOCKED Zone 4 Blocked by PSB 1354 Mem Valid DDB_MEM_VALID Memory Valid 1355 Ph Two Cycle DDB_PH_TWO_CYCLE Phase Sel Two Cycle 1356 Ph Five Cycle DDB_PH_FIVE_CYCLE Phase...

Page 937: ...9 Teleprot Rx DDB_TELEPROTECTION_RECEIVED This applies only if distance primary FUN is selected in IEC870 5 103 This is an output signal available in the PSL which could be mapped to a signal receive of one of the two teleprotection channels 1380 Group Warning DDB_GROUP_WARNING This is an output signal available in the PSL which can be mapped in IEC870 5 103 to a minor defect which does not shut d...

Page 938: ...ockout 1422 Rst CB2 Lockout DDB_RESET_CB2_LOCKOUT DDB mapped in PSL from opto or comms input Reset Lockout Opto Input to reset CB2 Lockout state 1423 MCB VTS CB2 CS DDB_MCB_VTS_CS2 DDB mapped in PSL from opto input Bus2 VT secondary MCB tripped or VT fail detected by external VTS scheme or signal from host relay VTS scheme 1424 Inhibit LB2 DDB_INHIBIT_LIVE_BUS2 DDB mapped in PSL from opto input ex...

Page 939: ...S2_DEAD Indicates Bus 2 input is dead i e voltage setting 48 8A 1463 CB2 CS2 OK DDB_CHECKSYNC2_2_OK CB2 close with synchronism check type 2 is permitted setting 48 A2 Enabled and Line and Bus 2 voltages satisfy relay settings for CB2 synchronism check type 2 1464 CB1 CS2 SlipF DDB_CS2_SLIP_O Line Bus 1 slip freq setting 48 98 frequency difference slip between line voltage and bus 1 voltage is grea...

Page 940: ...e pole tripping autoreclosing is not permitted for CB2 It can be applied in PSL when required to force trip conversion logic for internal and or external protection to three phase trip mode for CB2 1488 En CB1 Follower DDB_ENABLE_CB_FOLLOWER Indicates conditions are satisfied to enable CB1 follower sequence 1491 CB1F SCOK DDB_CB_FOLLOWR_SYSTEM_CHECK_OK System conditions OK to reclose CB1 when foll...

Page 941: ...L DDB_INHIBIT_DEAD_LINE DDB mapped in PSL from opto input external signal to inhibit Dead Line function 1524 Inhibit LB1 DDB_INHIBIT_LIVE_BUS1 DDB mapped in PSL from opto input external signal to inhibit Live Bus 1 function 1525 Inhibit DB1 DDB_INHIBIT_DEAD_BUS1 DDB mapped in PSL from opto input external signal to inhibit Dead Bus 1 function 1526 CB1 In Service DDB_CB1_IN_SERVICE CB1 In Service ca...

Page 942: ...SUCCESSFUL_SPAR CB1 successful single phase AR 1572 CB1 Fast SCOK DDB_CB_FAST_SYSTEM_CHECK_OK OK to reclose CB1 with sync check without waiting for dead time to complete 1573 CB1L SCOK DDB_CB_LEADER_SYSTEM_CHECK_OK System conditions OK to reclose CB1 when dead time complete 1574 CB1 Man SCOK DDB_CB_MANUAL_SYSTEM_CHECK_OK System conditions OK to manually close CB1 1575 CB1 Fail Pr Trip DDB_CB_FAIL_...

Page 943: ... Bus1 freq Line freq 0 001Hz Line voltage vector rotating clockwise relative to VBus1 1597 Rst CB2 Data DDB_RESET_ALL_VALUES_2 Rst CB2 All Val 1598 CB2 Pre Lockout DDB_CB2_PRE_LOCKOUT Output from CB2 monitoring logic 1599 CB2 LO Alarm DDB_CB2_LOCKOUT_ALARM CB2 LO Alarm 1600 CB2 Trip 3ph DDB_TRIP_3PH_2 3 Phase Trip 2 1601 CB2 Trip OutputA DDB_TRIP_A_PHASE_2 A Phase Trip 2 1602 CB2 Trip OutputB DDB_...

Page 944: ...SLINT_117 PSL Internal Node 1633 PSL Int 118 DDB_PSLINT_118 PSL Internal Node 1634 PSL Int 119 DDB_PSLINT_119 PSL Internal Node 1635 PSL Int 120 DDB_PSLINT_120 PSL Internal Node 1636 PSL Int 121 DDB_PSLINT_121 PSL Internal Node 1637 PSL Int 122 DDB_PSLINT_122 PSL Internal Node 1638 PSL Int 123 DDB_PSLINT_123 PSL Internal Node 1639 PSL Int 124 DDB_PSLINT_124 PSL Internal Node 1640 PSL Int 125 DDB_P...

Page 945: ...50 DDB_PSLINT_150 PSL Internal Node 1696 IEC Usr 01 Open DDB_IEC_USR_OPN_1 IEC61850 User Dual Point Status 1 Open 1697 IEC Usr 01 Close DDB_IEC_USR_CLS_1 IEC61850 User Dual Point Status 1 Closed 1698 IEC Usr 02 Open DDB_IEC_USR_OPN_2 IEC61850 User Dual Point Status 2 Open 1699 IEC Usr 02 Close DDB_IEC_USR_CLS_2 IEC61850 User Dual Point Status 2 Closed 1700 IEC Usr 03 Open DDB_IEC_USR_OPN_3 IEC6185...

Page 946: ...ject in an incoming GOOSE message 1733 Quality VIP 6 DDB_VIP_QUALITY_6 GOOSE virtual input 6 provides the Quality attributes of any data object in an incoming GOOSE message 1734 Quality VIP 7 DDB_VIP_QUALITY_7 GOOSE virtual input 7 provides the Quality attributes of any data object in an incoming GOOSE message 1735 Quality VIP 8 DDB_VIP_QUALITY_8 GOOSE virtual input 8 provides the Quality attribut...

Page 947: ...that derives a virtual input is present 1761 PubPres VIP 2 DDB_VIP_PUB_PRES_2 GOOSE virtual input 2 indicates if the GOOSE publisher responsible for publishing the data that derives a virtual input is present 1762 PubPres VIP 3 DDB_VIP_PUB_PRES_3 GOOSE virtual input 3 indicates if the GOOSE publisher responsible for publishing the data that derives a virtual input is present 1763 PubPres VIP 4 DDB...

Page 948: ...OOSE publisher responsible for publishing the data that derives a virtual input is present 1786 PubPres VIP 27 DDB_VIP_PUB_PRES_27 GOOSE virtual input 27 indicates if the GOOSE publisher responsible for publishing the data that derives a virtual input is present 1787 PubPres VIP 28 DDB_VIP_PUB_PRES_28 GOOSE virtual input 28 indicates if the GOOSE publisher responsible for publishing the data that ...

Page 949: ...ssage 1820 Virtual Input 61 DDB_GOOSEIN_61 Virtual Input 61 received from GOOSE message 1821 Virtual Input 62 DDB_GOOSEIN_62 Virtual Input 62 received from GOOSE message 1822 Virtual Input 63 DDB_GOOSEIN_63 Virtual Input 63 received from GOOSE message 1823 Virtual Input 64 DDB_GOOSEIN_64 Virtual Input 64 received from GOOSE message 1824 Quality VIP 33 DDB_VIP_QUALITY_33 GOOSE virtual input 33 prov...

Page 950: ...lity VIP 56 DDB_VIP_QUALITY_56 GOOSE virtual input 56 provides the Quality attributes of any data object in an incoming GOOSE message 1848 Quality VIP 57 DDB_VIP_QUALITY_57 GOOSE virtual input 57 provides the Quality attributes of any data object in an incoming GOOSE message 1849 Quality VIP 58 DDB_VIP_QUALITY_58 GOOSE virtual input 58 provides the Quality attributes of any data object in an incom...

Page 951: ...E publisher responsible for publishing the data that derives a virtual input is present 1876 PubPres VIP 53 DDB_VIP_PUB_PRES_53 GOOSE virtual input 53 indicates if the GOOSE publisher responsible for publishing the data that derives a virtual input is present 1877 PubPres VIP 54 DDB_VIP_PUB_PRES_54 GOOSE virtual input 54 indicates if the GOOSE publisher responsible for publishing the data that der...

Page 952: ...ary signal which can be mapped via SCADA protocol output to other devices 1905 Virtual Output50 DDB_GOOSEOUT_50 Virtual output 50 allows user to control a binary signal which can be mapped via SCADA protocol output to other devices 1906 Virtual Output51 DDB_GOOSEOUT_51 Virtual output 51 allows user to control a binary signal which can be mapped via SCADA protocol output to other devices 1907 Virtu...

Page 953: ...his DDB means the test application function is in hold state ALSTOM internal Use only 1921 SAV Test Inhibit DDB_9_2_SAV_TEST_INHIBIT This DDB means the test application function is in inhibit state ALSTOM internal Use only 1922 SAV Alarm Test DDB_9_2_SAV_TEST_ALARM This DDB means the IEC 61850 9 2LE test alarm only for test ALSTOM internal Use only ...

Page 954: ...Appendix B Settings and Signals P446SV B208 P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 955: ...APPENDIX C WIRING DIAGRAMS ...

Page 956: ...Appendix C Wiring Diagrams P446SV P446SV TM EN 1 ...

Page 957: ...T SCALE CAD DATA 1 1 DIMENSIONS mm Title Substation Automation Solutions ALSTOM GRID UK LTD STAFFORD Sht Next Sht 30 11 2010 W LINTERN DRAWING OUTLINE UPDATED CID BLIN 8BHLDT 10Px4001 1 EXTERNAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM COMMS OPTIONS MICOM Px40 PLATFORM J ...

Page 958: ...N FIBRE OPTIC TX2 RX1 TX1 E11 RELAY 8 E18 RELAY 7 RELAY 6 E16 E17 E15 E13 E14 E12 E5 RELAY 4 RELAY 5 E8 E10 E9 E7 E6 RELAY 3 RELAY 2 E2 E4 E3 E1 RELAY 1 F12 F13 F11 F14 WATCHDOG CONTACT CONTACT WATCHDOG 100 BASE TX 100 BASE FX IEC 61850 9 2 LE IEC 61850 9 2 LE SAMPLE ANALOGUE VALUE ONLY SAMPLE ANALOGUE VALUE ONLY SLOT C SLOT C SLOT A SLOT B Drg No Issue Revision Date Date Name Chkd DO NOT SCALE CA...

Page 959: ...TTING CUSTOMER SETTING DEFAULT SETTING Not Used Block CB1 2 AR L3 Aid 1 Receive L4 Aid 1 COS LGS L5 Reset LEDs MCB VTS CB1 Healthy CB2 Healthy R1 Trip Z1 R2 Any Start R3 Any Trip R4 General Alarm R5 IM64 1 CB1 Fail Trip Control Close CB1 Control Trip CB1 Drg No Issue Revision Date Date Name Chkd DO NOT SCALE CAD DATA 1 1 DIMENSIONS mm Title Substation Automation Solutions ALSTOM GRID UK LTD STAFFO...

Page 960: ......

Page 961: ......

Page 962: ...contained in this document is indicative only No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances It is provided without liability and is subject to change without notice Reproduction use or disclosure to third parties without express written authority is ...

Reviews:

No comments